Panasonic Mobile Communications 208009A UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID User Manual 000 P 01A
Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Ltd UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID 000 P 01A
Contents
User Manual Part 1
docomo PRIME series
P-01A
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ISSUE DATE: ‘08.10
NAME:
PHONE NUMBER:
MAIL ADDRESS:
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Before Using the Handset
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Phonebook
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Security Settings
Camera
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
i-αppli/i-Widget
Map/GPS Function
Full Browser/PC Movie
Mail
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
1Seg
Data Management
Music
Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/Troubleshooting
Index/Quick Manual
DOCOMO W-CDMA・GSM/GPRS system
Thank you for selecting the “docomo PRIME series P-01A”.
Before or during use of the P-01A, make sure that you read this manual and the
separate manuals for other optional devices thoroughly so that you can use the
P-01A correctly.
If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the docomo
Information Center listed on the back page of this manual.
The P-01A is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to
ensure long-term performance.
●Because the FOMA terminals use radio waves, they cannot be used in places
where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels, underground, or in
buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA
service area. They may not be used in the high-rise buildings even when the
antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls
even when using without moving while the radio waves are strong enough for
the three antennas to appear on the display.
●Use the FOMA terminal carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in
public, or in crowded or quiet places.
●Since the FOMA terminals use radio waves as the medium of
telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party. However, the
W-CDMA・GSM/GPRS system automatically supports tapping prevention, so
your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party.
●The FOMA terminals change your voice into digital signals and send them to
the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the digital signals
may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice may sound
different from the actual original voice.
●
The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result
of the use of SSL. Neither DOCOMO nor the certifiers as listed herein make
any representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL. In the
event that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL, neither
DOCOMO nor the certifiers shall be responsible for any such damage or loss.
Certifiers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust, Inc., GlobalSign K.K.,
RSA Security Inc., SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd., and
Comodo CA Ltd.
●This FOMA terminal supports FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA High-Speed Area.
●The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by
DOCOMO and in DOCOMO’s roaming area.
●It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information (such as
Phonebook entries, schedule events, text memos, record messages, voice
memos, movie memos) stored in the FOMA terminal and keep them in a safe
place. Note that we cannot be held responsible for the unlikely event of loss of
the stored contents due to a malfunction, repair, change of your model, or
other mishandling of the FOMA terminal.
●You are advised to save your important data files to the microSD card. If you
have a personal computer, you can transfer and save the information such as
Phonebook entries, mail messages, schedule events, and others to the
personal computer by using DOCOMO keitai datalink.
Before using your FOMA terminal
For Using This Manual
This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (page 118). If you use
Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some
menu configurations change according to the usage frequency
depending on the type of the menu. Further, some menu numbers
that are assigned to the menu items do not apply.
You can download the latest information about this manual
from the following DOCOMO website:
・User’s Manual (PDF file) Download
(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html)
※The URL and the content of the website might be modified
without notice.
Access the online for checking or changing the content of your subscription, for application of respective services, and
for request of Information materials.
ｉMenu お客様サポート (user support) お申込・お手続き (Applications/Procedures) 各種お申込・お手続き
(Respective applications/procedures)
My docomo (http://www.mydocomo.com/)
各種お申込・お手続き (Respective applications/procedures)
• You will need your “network ID” to access e-site from i-mode.
• No packet communication charges are incurred when accessing e-site from i-mode.
Accessing from overseas will incur charges.
• You will need your “docomo ID/password” to access e-site from PC.
• If you do not have or you have forgotten your “network ID” or “docomo ID/password”,
contact the docomo Information Center listed on the back cover of this manual.
• DOCOMO e-site may not be available depending upon the content of your subscription.
• You may not be able to access some e-site services due to system maintenance, etc.
From i-mode
Packet communication charges free
From PC
Do not forget your FOMA terminal ... or your manners!
■Where use is prohibited
Be sure to turn off the power to your FOMA terminal in airplanes and in hospitals.
※
Persons with electronic medical equipment are in places other than the actual wards.
Make sure you have the power switched off even if you are in a lobby or waiting room.
■
When in crowded places such as packed trains, where you could be near
a person with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator
The implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator operation can be
affected by radio emissions from the FOMA terminal.
■While driving
Using the mobile phone in your hand while driving is subject to punishment.
※If you answer a call out of necessity, tell the caller with Hands-free that you will call
him/her back, park your car to somewhere safe, and then dial.
■When in theaters, movie theaters, museums, and similar venues
If you use your FOMA terminal where you are supposed to be quiet, you will
disturb those around you.
■If you use the FOMA terminal in quiet places such as restaurants and
hotel lobbies, keep the volume of your voice and other sounds down.
■Do not block thoroughfares when using the FOMA terminal.
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when
shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. This manual was produced in such a way as to allow easy recycling. Please recycle
this manual when it is no longer needed.
In the following cases, be certain to turn off the power.
In the following cases, be certain to set Public Mode.
Adjust the volume of your voice and ring tone according to where you are.
Respect the privacy.
These functions help you keep your manners in public.
Handy functions are available such as for setting the response
to incoming calls and setting the tones to silent.
●Public Mode (Drive Mode/Power Off) (Page 69 and page 70)
The guidance that you are currently driving or in a place where you
should refrain from using a mobile phone or the guidance that you
are in a place where you should turn off the power is played back to
the caller. Then the call is disconnected.
●Record Message function (Page 71)
Callers can record a message when you cannot come to the phone.
●Vibrator (Page 108)
When the vibrator is set, it vibrates for incoming calls.
●Manner Mode/Super Silent/Original Manner (Page 110)
In Manner Mode or Super Silent, the keypad sound, ring tone and
other sounds from the FOMA terminal are muted.
In Original Manner, you can set whether or not to activate the Record
Message function, and can change the settings for the vibrator and
ring tone.
※The shutter sound cannot be muted.
Optional services are also available, such as Voice Mail Service
(page 440) and Call Forwarding Service (page 444).
General inquiries
<docomo Information Center> Repairs
0120-005-250 (toll free)
★Service available in English, Portuguese, Chinese, Spanish, and Korean.
★Available from mobile phones and PHSs.
■From DOCOMO mobile phones
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix)113 (toll free)
★Unavailable from land-line phones, etc.
■From land-line phones
(In Japanese only)
0120-800-000 (toll free)
★Available from mobile phones and PHSs.
■From DOCOMO mobile phones
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix)151 (toll free)
★Unavailable from land-line phones, etc.
■From land-line phones
(In Japanese only)
0120-800-000 (toll free)
★Available from mobile phones and PHSs.
• Please confirm the phone number before you dial.
• For Applications or Repairs and After-Sales Service, please contact the above-mentioned information center or the docomo shop etc. near you on the NTT DOCOMO website or the
i-mode site.
NTT DOCOMO website http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/
i-mode site ｉMenu 1 お客様サポート (user support) 1 ドコモショップ (docomo Shop) (In Japanese only)
Loss or theft of FOMA terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas
<docomo Information Center> (available 24 hours a day)
Failures encountered overseas
<Network Technical Operation Center> (available 24 hours a day)
■From DOCOMO mobile phones
-81-3-5366-3114* (toll free)
* You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a landline phone, etc.
※If you use P-01A, you should dial the number +81-3-5366-3114
(to enter “+”, press and hold the “0” key for at least one second).
■From DOCOMO mobile phones
-81-3-6718-1414* (toll free)
* You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a landline phone, etc.
※If you use P-01A, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1414
(to enter “+”, press and hold the “0” key for at least one second).
■From land-line phones ＜Universal number＞
-800-0120-0151*
* You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for the country you stay.
※See page 462 and page 463 for international call access codes for major countries (Table 1)
and international prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2).
■From land-line phones ＜Universal number＞
-800-5931-8600*
* You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for the country you stay.
※See page 462 and page 463 for international call access codes for major countries (Table 1)
and international prefix numbers for the universal number (Table 2).
●If you lose your FOMA terminal or have it stolen, immediately take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the FOMA terminal.
●If the FOMA terminal you purchased malfunctions, bring your FOMA terminal to a repair counter specified by DOCOMO after you return to Japan.
International call access code for
the country you stay (Table 1)
International call access code for
the country you stay (Table 1)
International prefix number for
the universal number (Table 2)
International prefix number for
the universal number (Table 2)
Don’t forget your mobile phone ... or your manners!
When using your mobile phone in a public place, don’t forget to show common courtesy and consideration for others around you.
To prevent damage to the environment, bring used
battery packs to an NTT DOCOMO service counter,
an NTT DOCOMO agent or a recycle center. This manual is printed using
an ink based on soy bean oil.
November ’08 (1st Edition)
3TR100101AAA
F1008F0-
A
Sales:
Manufacturer:
’08.10
P-01A INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
In this manual, illustrations and symbols are used in the explanations so
that you can correctly and easily use the FOMA terminal.
pThe operating procedures and displays in this manual are described with the default
settings of the “Frosty White” (see page 476) handset mainly. However, the following
settings are changed.
・“Display setting” → “Stand-by display/Stand-by disp. Wide”: OFF
・“Display setting” → “Clock” → “Stand-by clock/Stand-by clock Wide” → “Position”:
Pattern 1
・“Display setting” → “Battery icon/Antenna icon”: Pattern 1
・“Menu icon setting”: Visual
pThe operating procedures and displays in this manual are described with Normal Style
mainly.
pDisplays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones
might differ.
pIn this manual, “Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli which supports the IC card function” is
described as “Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli”.
pNote that “P-01A” is referred to as “FOMA terminal” in this manual.
pIn the operating procedures of this manual, key operations are described with
simplified key icons.
pThe functions which use a microSD card are described in this manual; however, you
need to obtain a microSD card separately to make these functions available. See
page 370 for the microSD card.
Viewing/Searching This Manual By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired
functions and services are described:
How to Refer to This Manual
Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services.
Search from keywords for the functions you frequently use or the functions that are
convenient if you can know any.
Search from the tabs printed on the cover.
See the next page for details.
Search from the contents that categorize functions.
Search from here to use the main functions.
Search from the function list.
Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief description about basic functions. You can take it
when you go out. Further, Quick Manual “For Overseas Use” is attached, so refer to it
when you use the FOMA terminal overseas.
From the Index
From Easy Search
From the Tabs on the Cover
From the Contents P.6
From the Main Functions P.8
From the Function List P.476
From Quick Manual P.550
It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission.
The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice.
2
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
How to search for “Alarm” is explained here as an example of search method.
Additional guidance . . . . . . . . . . .457
Address link function. . . . . . . . . . . .207
After-sales services. . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Alarm setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Answer setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
From the Index
P.542
Search for a function or a service
name as shown on the right.
Search for the function you
frequently use or that is
convenient if you know any as
shown on the right.
Other things you can do
To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 116
To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 248
To listen to music.................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 280
To check your location and surroundings......................<Map/GPS Function> 328
To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 370
To exchange information using infrared rays.........<Infrared Communication> 384
To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock.....................................<Alarm> 404
To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator ..................................<Calculator> 417
To use the FOMA terminal overseas........................ <International Roaming> 460
To update software programs........................................... <Software Update> 521
S
Go to page 404
where “Alarm”
is explained.
From Easy Search
P.4
i-αppli/i-Widget
Map/GPS Function
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Data Management
Music
Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/Troubleshooting
Multitask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Multitask> 401
Informing You of an Incoming Call/Mail Message by Voice
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reading Aloud> 402
Turning Power On/Off Automatically at a Specified Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Auto Power ON/OFF> 404
Using Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Alarm> 404
Using Calendar to Manage Schedule . . . . . . . . . . .<Schedule> 407
Using ToDo to Manage Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <ToDo> 411
Setting Operating Conditions of Alarm . . . . . <Alarm Setting> 413
From the Tabs on the
Cover
Cover page
Search for the function you want
to set in the order of “Cover”
→ “First page of Chapter”
→ “Description page” as shown
on the right.
3
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
404
Convenient Functions
You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time with an alarm tone,
animation and illumination. You can store up to twelve alarms.
1mStationeryAlarm
Highlight an alarm and press
l()
Do the following operations.
2Press l().
+m-4-4
<Alarm>
Using Alarm
Alarm You can set whether to validate or invalidate the alarm.
ON or OFF
Time Enter the time for sounding the alarm.
pYou cannot set the same time as the time set for the stored
alarm.
Tone Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pIf you set “Step”, the alarm tone is silent for about three
seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three
seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
Prefer manner
mode
You can set the alarm tone which sounds at the specified time
during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF
ON. . . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for “Alarm volume”.
OFF. . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
The icon appears on the desktop.
“” . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).
“” . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.
pIf you set “Alarm” of the stored schedule event/ToDo item to “OFF”, the icons are not
displayed.
Function Menu while Alarm is Displayed
Edit Go to step 1 of “Using Alarm” on page 404.
Detail You can display the stored alarm contents.
Set this You can validate the stored alarm.
YES
pYou can validate also by pressing Oo().
Set all You can validate all the stored alarm.
YES
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter you Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pDuring a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for “Volume” (earpiece volume).
pWhen you set the power to automatically turn on and an alarm to sound, the default
alarm tone sounds if the alarm with the UIM security is selected.
pTurn off the FOMA terminal after setting “Auto power ON” to “OFF” when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
When you set an alarm for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, and “ToDo”
Note: The page above is a sample.
Menu number
(See page 36)
Function name
You can find this in
Index.
Operating
procedure
(See page 34)
Reference display
(Characters and settings
are for reference.)
Options and their
explanations
Items shown on the
display
(Some items cannot
be executed.)
Operation and
supplementary
explanation for each
item
Operations related to
the function and
explanations for
supplementary
operations
Chapter title
You can
search by
chapter.
Cautions or
references for using
each function
Lower sub-menu item
of the Function menu
4
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
To retrieve a desired function with simple words, refer to the following:
Easy Search
To know convenient functions for making calls
To/Not to notify your phone number to the other party
....................................................................................<Caller ID Notification> 48
To switch to a videophone call during a voice call
...........................................................................<Switch to Videophone Call> 53
To change a volume level of the other party’s voice ....................... <Volume> 67
To put a call on hold during a call.................................................... <Holding> 68
To do the following when you cannot answer calls
To put an incoming call on hold before answering ......................... <On Hold> 68
To convey the message that you need to refrain from talking on the phone
..................................................................... Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) 69
....................................................................... Using Public Mode (Power Off) 70
To record voice/video messages.......................... <Record Message Setting> 71
To change melody or illumination
To adjust the ring volume........................................................<Ring Volume> 68
To change ring tones according to callers......................<Add to Phonebook> 90
To change ring tones........................................................<Select Ring Tone> 106
To know incoming calls by vibrator .................................................<Vibrator> 108
To mute the keypad sound...................................................<Keypad Sound> 109
To activate Manner Mode...................................................... <Manner Mode> 110
To change colors/lighting patterns of Call indicator for incoming calls
.................................................................................................. <Illumination> 120
To change/know display settings
To know the meaning of marks (icons) on the display .....................<Display> 28
To change the Stand-by display (Wallpaper) ...................... <Display Setting> 113
To display a calendar on the Stand-by display..............................<Calendar> 113
To change the menu display .................................................. <Simple Menu> 118
To change the character size ...............................................<Character Size> 123
To make full use of mail
To send Deco-mail ...................................................................... <Deco-mail> 150
To send images ....................................................................... <Attachments> 157
To sort and save mail automatically ..............................................<Auto-sort> 176
To make full use of camera
To change the shooting size...................................................... <Image Size> 244
To save to the microSD card ...........................................................<Store In> 245
To display shot images......................................................... <Picture Viewer> 346
5
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
※1 This is a pay service.
※2 This is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
To use the FOMA terminal with a sense of security
To lock the FOMA terminal from away when it gets lost .<Omakase Lock>※1129
To keep Phonebook entries from prying eyes .........................<Secret Mode> 136
To reject calls without a caller ID..............................<Call Setting without ID> 139
To reject calls from the phone numbers that are not
in the Phonebook ............................................................ <Reject Unknown> 140
To separately store Phonebook and other data
files in preparation for their erasure.................... <Data Security Service>※2140
To make full use of 1Seg
To watch 1Seg programs ...................................................... <Activate 1Seg> 255
To record 1Seg programs.................. <Record Video> <Record Still Images> 262
To set TV Timer/Timer Recording for 1Seg programs
.......................................................................<TV Timer> <Timer Recording> 263
To change settings of video and audio...................................<User Settings> 268
Other things you can do
To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 116
To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 248
To listen to music.................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 280
To check your location and surroundings ......................<Map/GPS Function> 328
To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 370
To exchange information using infrared rays.........<Infrared Communication> 384
To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock.....................................<Alarm> 404
To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator .................................. <Calculator> 417
To use the FOMA terminal overseas ........................<International Roaming> 460
To update software programs........................................... <Software Update> 521
To update security ......................................................... <Scanning Function> 527
pThe operating procedures for frequently used functions are summarized in Quick
Manual. (See page 550)
6
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Contents
Viewing/Searching This Manual . . . . .1
Easy Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Main Functions of P-01A. . . . . . . . . . . .8
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Accessories and Main Options . . . . 20
Before Using the
Handset
21
Part Names and Functions, Styles, Display,
Desktop Icon, Selecting Menu, Guide,
UIM (FOMA Card), Battery, Charging, Power ON/OFF,
Select Language, Set Time, Caller ID Notification,
Own Number, etc.
Voice/
Videophone Calls/
PushTalk
49
Making a Call/Videophone Call, Call Records,
Chaku-moji, Receiving a Call/Videophone Call, Volume,
Ring Volume, Public Mode, Record Message Setting,
Chara-den, Making a PushTalk Call,
Receiving a PushTalk Call, PushTalk Phonebook, etc.
Phonebook
89
Available Phonebooks,
Add to Phonebook (FOMA terminal/UIM),
Group Setting, Search Phonebook, Edit Phonebook,
Delete Data, No. of Phonebook, 2-touch Dial,
Voice Dial
Sound/Screen/
Light Settings
105
Select Ring Tone, Vibrator, Manner Mode,
Display Setting, Backlight, Menu Icon Setting,
Kisekae Tool, Set to Machi-chara,
Horizontal Open Menu, Illumination, Font, etc.
Security Settings
125
Security Codes, Change Security Code, Releasing PIN
Lock, Lock All, Omakase Lock, Self Mode,
Personal Data Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, Secret Mode,
Call Setting without ID, Reject Unknown,
Reset Settings, Initialize, etc.
Mail
145
i-mode Mail, Deco-mail, Decome-Anime, Template,
Attachments, Mail Auto-receive, Receive Option,
Check New Message, Message R/F,
Early Warning “Area Mail”, Chat Mail, SMS, Web Mail,
etc.
i-mode/i-motion/
i-Channel/i-concier
193
i-mode, iMenu, My Menu,
Change i-mode Password, Enter URL, Bookmark,
Screen Memo, Download, Upload, Certificate, i-motion,
i-Channel, i-concier, etc.
Full Browser/
PC Movie
219
Full Browser, Full Browser Settings, PC Movie,
Downloading PC Movies, PC Movie Player
Camera
235
Before Using Camera, Still Image Shoot, Movie Shoot,
Settings for Shooting, Setting Image Size/Image Quality,
Bar Code Reader
1Seg
251
1Seg, Before Using 1Seg, Channel Setting,
Activate 1Seg, i-αppli Program Guide,
Data Broadcasting, TVlink, Recording 1Seg,
TV Timer/Timer Recording, User Settings
Music
271
Music&Video Channel, Set Program,
Playing/Operating Programs, Playing Music,
Saving Music Files, MUSIC Player, Playlist
7
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
i-αppli/i-Widget
291
i-αppli, i-αppli Download, i-αppli Run, iαppli Settings,
Starting i-αppli Automatically, iαppli Call,
i-αppli Stand-by Display, iαppli, i-Widget,
Start Widget αppli
Osaifu-Keitai/
ToruCa
315
Osaifu-Keitai, iC Transfer Service, IC Card Content,
IC Card Lock, Check IC Owner, ToruCa,
Receive ToruCa Files, ToruCa Viewer,
ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display,
ToruCa Settings
Map/GPS Function
327
Using GPS Function, Position Location,
Map/GPS Compatible i-αppli, Provide Location,
Notify of Location, Location History, GPS Settings
Data Management
343
Picture Viewer, i-motion Player, Video Player,
Chara-den, Machi-chara, Melody Player, Kisekae Tool,
microSD Card, Voice Recorder, PDF Viewer,
Document Viewer, etc.
Convenient
Functions
399
Multiaccess, Multitask, Reading Aloud,
Auto Power ON/OFF, Alarm, Schedule, ToDo,
Own Number, Voice Memo, Movie Memo, Call Data,
Calculator, Text Memo, UIM Operation,
Bluetooth Function, etc.
Character Entry
429
Character Entry, Mode 1 (5-touch), Common Phrases,
Cut/Copy/Paste, Own Dictionary, Learned Words,
Download Dictionary, Mode 2 (2-touch),
Mode 3 (NIKO-touch)
Network Services
439
Check New Messages, Voice Mail, Call Waiting,
Call Forwarding, Nuisance Call Blocking,
Caller ID Request, Dual Network, Service Numbers,
Remote Control, Multi Number, 2in1, OFFICEED, etc.
Overseas Use
459
Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING),
Available Services, Confirmation for Using,
Making a Call at the Country You Stay,
Receiving a Call, Select Networks,
Set Roaming Guidance, Network Services, etc.
PC Connection
469
Available Data Communication,
Before Using Data Communication, Preparation Flow for
Data Transfer (OBEX™ Communication),
Preparation Flow for Data Communication, AT Command,
CD-ROM, DOCOMO Keitai Datalink
Appendix/
Troubleshooting
475
Function List, Options and Related Devices,
Troubleshooting, Error Messages, Warranty and
After-sales Services, i-mode Fault Diagnosis Site,
Software Update, Scanning Function, Main Specifications,
SAR, Export Administration Regulations, etc.
Index/
Quick Manual
541
Index, Quick Manual,
Quick Manual “For Overseas Use”
8
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Main Functions of P-01A
◆i-concier P.215
i-concier is a service that you can be notified of useful information by character
(Machi-chara image) on the Stand-by display or you can download schedule events
(i-schedule events) from sites and use it.
Downloaded i-schedule events or ToruCa files are updated to the latest information
automatically, and the address information such as shops and companies are added
to Phonebook automatically.
◆i-αppli Call P.309
i-αppli call is a useful function that you can notify of the other party or Content
providers to start the compatible appointed application program such as starting the
other party’s software program to play a network game.
◆i-Widget P.312
i-Widget is a useful function that enables you to easily access any contents or tools
(Widget αppli) you often use such as a calculator, clock, TV program list, and stock
prices information.
You can check the latest information you want just by starting i-Widget display.
◆1Seg P.252
You can watch 1Seg programs of the terrestrial digital broadcasting for mobile objects.
Also, you can shoot a still image or save video while watching a 1Seg program.
◆
International Roaming
P.301, P.460
Your FOMA terminal, phone number, and mail address are available overseas (3G/GSM areas are supported).
Further, your FOMA terminal pre-installs “日英版／日中版 しゃべって翻訳 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)” which translates it into English and Chinese if I talk in
Japanese. If you talk in English and Chinese, this application program translates it into Japanese.
◆Bluetooth Function P.421
The wirelessly-connected FOMA terminal and a Bluetooth device enable you to talk or
listen to music while you are carrying the FOMA terminal in your bag.
◆Feel＊Mail P.181
Animation of 45 characters and illumination reproduce the atmosphere of mail messages.
Pleasant animation appears and illumination lights according to the contents of mail
message.
◆Wide VGA Display
You can display still images or movies in the Wide VGA (480 dots x 854 dots) display of
approx. 3.1 inches, and you can enjoy watching 1Seg programs on the impressive display.
Also, the light sensor automatically adjusts the backlight in accordance with the ambient
brightness, and the LCD AI compensates the image quality in accordance with the
brightness.
◆Horizontal Open Style P.24
You can watch 1Seg programs and videos on the horizontal full display in Horizontal
Open Style. Further, you can see the Internet web pages with Full Browser without
scrolling sideways.
9
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
◆One-push Open P.24
■One-push Answer P.67
When a call comes in, just press the one-push open button, and you can open the
FOMA terminal to answer the call.
■Recv. Mail/Call at Open P.116
When a missed call or new mail message is found, just press the one-push open
button, and you can open the FOMA terminal to display the detailed Missed Call
display or the Inbox list.
◆View Blind P.117
You can make the display hard to see from an angle. You can use the FOMA terminal
without being gazed at by others.
◆Shikkari Talk P.63
You can make the other party’s voice clear according to surrounding noise.
◆Yuttari Talk P.63
You can slow down the other party’s speaking speed during a call.
◆Face Detection P.243
You can shoot still images adjusting the camera focus on person’s face automatically.
◆Document Viewer P.394
On your FOMA terminal, you can display Microsoft Word files, Microsoft Excel files,
and Microsoft PowerPoint files created by personal computers.
◆Voice Recorder P.389
You can record your voice as a substitute for taking notes. You can repeatedly
play it back, so it is convenient to record the proceedings at a meeting, etc.
◆Chaku-moji P.56
◆Videophone P.50
◆
i-mode mail/Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictogram
P.146, P.150, P.344
◆i-αppli/Mega i-αppli/Intuitive Games P.292
◆High-Speed Area Supported P.470
◆Chaku-uta Full®/Uta-hodai/Music&Video Channel/Video Clips P.212, P.272, P.278, P.280
p“Chaku-uta Full” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.
◆MUSIC Player P.280
◆GPS P.328
◆Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa P.316, P.318
◆Kisekae Tool P.118, P.369
◆Respective Network Services P.439
◆Security Settings P.125
10
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Before using the FOMA terminal, read these safety precautions carefully so that
you can use it correctly.
After reading the precautions, keep them in a safe place.
■Be sure to observe these safety precautions because they are designed to
protect you or those around you from causing injury and to avoid unnecessary
damage to the property.
■The symbols below indicate the levels of danger or damage that can be caused
if the particular precautions are not observed.
Precautions
Danger This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
will almost certainly cause death or serious
injury.
Warning This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
poses a risk of causing death or serious
injury.
Caution This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
poses a risk of causing injury or damage to
the product or property.
ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS
■The following symbols show specific directions:
■“Safety Precautions” are divided into the following six sections:
General precautions for FOMA terminal, batteries, adapters/chargers, and
UIM ............................................................................................................. P.11
Precautions for FOMA terminal ................................................................. P.12
Precautions for batteries ............................................................................ P.14
Precautions for adapters/chargers............................................................. P.15
Precautions for UIM.................................................................................... P.16
Notes on using near electronic medical equipment .................................. P.16
Denotes things not to do. (Prohibition)
Denotes not to disassemble.
Denotes not to touch with wet hands.
Denotes not to use where it could get wet or not to wet it.
Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that must be complied
with).
Denotes to pull the power plug out of the outlet.
Don’t
Do not
disassemble
Not wet
hands
Avoid
Water
Do
Pull the
power plug
out
11
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Do not use, store or leave the
FOMA terminal and its
accessories in places with a high
temperature such as near fire or
places exposed to direct sunlight,
or in cars under the blazing sun.
The devices could be deformed or
malfunction, or the battery may leak,
overheat, burst, or catch fire, thus
resulting in the deterioration of
performance and shortening of the life of
devices. Also, part of the case could get
heated, causing bare skin burns.
Do not disassemble, modify or
solder the FOMA terminal or
accessories.
Accidents such as fire, injury, or electric
shock, or malfunction may result. The
battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not wet the FOMA terminal or
accessories.
If liquids such as water or pet urine get
onto them, overheating, electric shock,
fire, malfunction, injury or others may
result. Pay attention to the place of use
and the way of handling.
General precautions for FOMA
terminal, batteries, adapters/
chargers, and UIM
Danger
Don’t
Do not
disassemble
Avoid
Water
With your FOMA terminal, use the
batteries and adapters/chargers
specified by NTT DOCOMO, INC.
If you use any type of battery, adapter or
charger other than the specified one,
your FOMA terminal, battery or other
accessories may leak, overheat, burst,
catch fire or malfunction.
Battery Pack P19
FOMA AC Adapter 01/02
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use
FOMA DC Adapter 01/02
Desktop Holder P28
FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01
FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01
FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function
01/02
※For other compatible products,
contact a handling counter such as a
docomo shop.
Do not place the batteries, the
FOMA terminal, adapters/
chargers, or UIM in cooking
appliances such as microwave
ovens or high-pressure
containers.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. The FOMA terminal or the
adapter/charger may overheat, smoke,
or catch fire, or its circuit parts may
become damaged.
Do not throw the FOMA terminal
or accessories, or subject them
to severe shocks.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
Warning
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Be careful not to let
electroconductive materials
(metal pieces, pencil leads etc.)
contact with the charging
terminal or connector terminal.
Also, make sure that those are
not entered into the inside of the
FOMA terminal.
Short-circuit could cause fire or
malfunction of the FOMA terminal.
When you are in a place such as a
gas station where flammable gas
is generated, turn off the FOMA
terminal, and never do charging.
Otherwise, catching fire may
result.
Ensure that you use Osaifu-Keitai with
the FOMA terminal turned off when you
are in the vicinity of the gas station.
(When IC Card Lock is set, turn off the
power with the lock released.)
If odor, overheat, discoloration,
or deformation is detected during
use, battery charge, or storage,
immediately observe the
following:
1. Pull the power plug out of the
outlet or cigarette lighter
socket.
2. Turn off the power to the FOMA
terminal.
3. Remove the battery pack from
the FOMA terminal.
If you use the FOMA terminal and its
accessories as they are, overheat, burst,
or catching fire could result or the
battery could leak.
Don’t
Do
Do
12
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Do not place the FOMA terminal
or accessories on unstable
locations such as wobbly tables
or slanted locations.
The FOMA terminal or accessories may
fall, resulting in injury or malfunction.
Do not store in humid or dusty
places, or in high temperature
environments.
Malfunction may result.
If children use the FOMA terminal or
accessories, a guardian should
explain the safety precautions and
correct operations. The guardian
should also make sure that the
instructions are followed during use.
Otherwise, injury may result.
Keep out of the reach of babies
and infants.
Accidental swallowing or injury may result.
Be especially careful when you use
the FOMA terminal for a long time
with the adapter/charger
connected.
If you use i-
α
ppli programs, talk on the
videophone, watch 1Seg programs and
so on for a long time during charging,
the temperature of the FOMA terminal,
battery pack, or adapter/charger might
rise.
If you directly touch the part of high
temperature continuously, redness,
itching, rash, or low-temperature bare
skin burns may result depending on your
physical conditions or predisposition.
Caution
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
Do not directly point the infrared
data port at someone’s eyes
during transmission.
His/her eyes may possibly be affected.
Other infrared devices may operate
erroneously if the infrared data port is
pointed at them during transmission.
Do not put the FOMA terminal in
the place where it could be
affected by an expanded airbag,
e.g., on the dashboard.
If the airbag expands, the FOMA
terminal could hit you and others,
causing accidents such as injury and the
FOMA terminal could malfunction and
become damaged.
If you have any implanted
electronic medical equipment, do
not place your FOMA terminal in
a chest pocket or inner pocket.
If the FOMA terminal is positioned close
to electronic medical equipment, it may
cause that equipment to malfunction.
Do not allow liquids such as
water, or foreign materials such
as metal pieces or flammable
materials to get into the UIM or
microSD card slot of the FOMA
terminal.
Fire, electric shock or malfunction may
result.
Precautions for FOMA terminal
Warning
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Turn off the FOMA terminal in
places where use is prohibited
such as in airplanes and hospitals.
Otherwise, electronic devices and
electronic medical appliances may be
adversely affected. If the Auto Power
ON function is set, deactivate the
setting, then turn the power off.
For use inside medical facilities, make
sure that you comply with their
regulations. You may be punished for
using the FOMA terminal in airplanes,
which is prohibited by law.
When talking with the FOMA
terminal set to Hands-free, be
sure to keep the FOMA terminal
away from your ear.
Further, when you play games or
play back music with the
earphone/microphone
connected, adjust the sound
volume to moderate volume.
The excessive sound volume impairs
your hearing.
Further, accidents may result due to the
hardness of hearing of surrounding
sound.
For those with weak heart
conditions, the vibrator and ring
volume must be adjusted
carefully.
Those functions may cause an effect on
the heart.
If thunder starts to rumble while
you are using the FOMA terminal
outdoors, turn off the power and
move to a safe place.
Otherwise, you could be struck by
lightning or suffer an electric shock.
Do
Do
Do
Do
13
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Turn off the FOMA terminal when
near electronic devices using
high-precision control or weak
signals.
The FOMA terminal may possibly cause
these devices to malfunction.
※
Electronic devices that may be affected:
Hearing aids, implanted cardiac
pacemakers, implanted defibrillators,
other medical electronic devices, fire
alarms, automatic doors and other
automatically controlled devices. If you
use an implanted cardiac pacemaker,
implanted defibrillator or any other
electronic medical device, consult the
manufacturer or retailer of the device for
advice regarding possible effects from
the radio waves.
If the display part or camera lens
is broken, be careful about
broken glasses or the exposed
interior of the FOMA terminal.
Plastic panels are used for the surfaces
of the display part and camera lens so
that glasses do not easily get scattered,
however, pay attention not to
erroneously touch the broken part or
interior. Otherwise, injury may result.
Do not swing the FOMA terminal
by its strap.
The FOMA terminal may hit you or
persons around you, and accidents such
as injury or malfunction and damage
may result.
Caution
Do
Do
Don’t
When using the motion tracking,
ensure that you check around
you for safety, securely take hold
of your FOMA terminal, and do
not swing to an extent more than
necessitated.
The motion tracking is the function to
incline or swing the FOMA terminal for
operation. If you excessively swing your
FOMA terminal, it might happen that it
hits against persons or objects, resulting
in critical accidents or damage.
When a metallic strap is attached
to your FOMA terminal, be careful
that it does not hit against
persons or objects when using
the motion tracking.
Accidents such as injury or malfunction
and damage may result.
Do not place magnetic cards or
similar objects near the FOMA
terminal or between phone parts.
Magnetic data on cash cards, credit
cards, telephone cards and floppy disks,
etc. may be deleted.
Do not bring magnetic
substances close to your FOMA
terminal.
Strong magnetic items might cause in
erroneous operation.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
If you erroneously break the
display part and then crystal
liquid gets leaked, never take or
suck the liquid to or into your
mouth, or apply to skin.
If the crystal liquid gets into the
eyes or mouth, immediately rinse
it out with clean water and then
seek medical attention.
When it adheres to your skin or
clothes, immediately wipe it away
with alcohol etc., and then rinse it
out with water and soap.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight or injury
to your skin may result.
Do not bring your ears close to
the speakers while a ring tone
sounds or a melody is played
back from the FOMA terminal.
Otherwise, your hearing could be
impaired.
Do not open the FOMA terminal
by pressing the one-push open
button near persons around you
or your face.
The FOMA terminal may hit you or
persons around you, causing accidents
and injuries.
Do not use the FOMA terminal
with the hook for Horizontal Open
Style protruded.
Otherwise, injury may result.
Electronic devices in some types
of cars can be affected by use of
the FOMA terminal.
For safety’s sake, make sure not to use
the FOMA terminal inside such cars.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
14
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Itching, rash or eczema may be
caused depending on your
physical conditions or
predisposition. If an abnormality
occurs, stop using the FOMA
terminal immediately, and then
seek medical attention.
Metals are used for the following parts:
Be careful not to get your finger
or a strap caught in the parts
when you close or open the
FOMA terminal.
Accidents such as injury or damage may
result.
When you watch a 1Seg program,
watch in a place bright enough
taking a certain distance from the
display.
Otherwise, your visual acuity could be
reduced.
Where it is used Material Finishing
Charging terminal Phosphor
bronze
Gold-plated finish
with nickel-plated
ground
Hook for Horizontal
Open Style
Stainless steel Chrome-plated
finish with
nickel-plated
ground
Metal part of the
one-push open
button
Aluminum Alumite
treatment
Battery pack
installation side
PC+ASA Copper-plated,
Nickel-plated
Do
Do
Do
■Check the description on the label of the
battery pack for the type of battery.
Do not let any metal object such
as a wire come in contact the
battery terminals. Also do not
carry or store the battery together
with any metal objects like a
necklace.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not use excessive force to
attach the battery to the FOMA
terminal even when you cannot
attach it successfully. Also,
check that the battery is the right
way round when you attach it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not throw the battery into fire.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not pierce it with nails, hit it
with a hammer, or step on it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Precautions for batteries
Description Type
Li-ion Lithium-ion battery
Danger
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
If the battery fluid gets into your
eyes, do not rub them. Flush your
eyes with clean water and seek
medical attention immediately.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may
result.
When any abnormality due to
external shock such as the
deformation or scratches by
dropping is found on the battery
pack, immediately stop using it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
If charging is not completed at
the end of the specified charging
time, stop charging.
Otherwise, the battery may leak,
overheat, become damaged or catch
fire.
Immediately stop using the FOMA
terminal and keep it away from
fire if the battery leaks or emits
an odor
.
The leaked battery fluid may ignite,
causing fire or burst.
Be careful that your pets do not
bite into the battery pack.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
Warning
Do
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
15
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
An exhausted battery should not
be disposed of with other waste.
The battery may catch fire or damage
the environment. After insulating the
battery terminals with tape, take the
unneeded battery to a handling counter
such as a docomo shop or dispose of it
in accordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
Do not charge the wet battery.
The battery pack may overheat, catch
fire, or burst.
If the battery fluid comes in
contact with skin or clothes,
immediately stop using, then
rinse it out thoroughly with clean
water.
Skin injury may result.
Do not use a damaged adapter/
charger cord or power cord.
Electric shock, overheating or fire may
result.
Do not use the AC adapter and
desktop holder in steamy places
such as a bathroom.
Electric shock may occur.
Caution
Precautions for adapters/chargers
Warning
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Don’t
The DC adapter is for use only in
a negative (-) grounded vehicle.
Do not use it in a positive (+)
grounded vehicle.
Fire may result.
If it starts to thunder, do not
touch the FOMA terminal and
adapter/charger.
You might be struck by lighting or suffer
an electric shock.
Never short-circuit the charging
terminal when the adapter is
plugged into the power outlet or
cigarette lighter socket. Also,
never touch the charging terminal
with fingers or other bare skin.
Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury
may result.
Place the charger and desktop
holder on a stable location during
charging. Do not cover or wrap
the charger and desktop holder in
cloth or bedding.
The FOMA terminal may drop off, or the
charger and desktop holder may
overheat, causing fire or malfunction.
Do not place something heavy on
the adapter/charger cord and
power cord.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Do not touch the power cord of
the adapter/charger, or power
outlet with wet hands.
Electric shock may result.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Not wet
hands
Use the adapter/charger at the
specified V AC.
If you use it at a wrong voltage, fire or
malfunction may result. When using the
FOMA terminal overseas, use FOMA
AC adapter available overseas.
AC adapter: 100 V AC
DC adapter: 12/24 V DC
[For negative (-) grounded vehicles only]
AC adapter available overseas: 100 V to
240 V AC
[Connect only to household AC outlet]
If a fuse of the DC adapter has
blown, replace it with a specified
fuse.
If you use an unspecified fuse, fire or
malfunction may result. For the specified
fuse, refer to each instruction manual.
Keep the power plugs dust-free.
Otherwise, fire may result.
When pulling the AC adapter into
the power outlet, firmly plug it in,
taking care not to contact with
metal straps or the like.
Otherwise, electric shock, short-circuit or
fire may result.
Do
Do
Do
Do
16
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
When removing the adapter/
charger out of the outlet or
cigarette lighter socket, do not
forcibly pull the adapter/charger
cord or power cord, instead take
hold of the power plug and then
pull.
If you pull the plug out by the cord, the
cord may be damaged, which could
result in electric shock or fire.
When the adapter/charger is not
to be used for a long period of
time, unplug the power cord from
the outlet.
Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or
malfunction may result.
If liquids such as water get in the
charger, unplug the power cord
immediately from the outlet or
cigarette lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock, smoke or fire
may result.
Before cleaning, pull the power
plug out of the outlet or cigarette
lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock may result.
Be careful not to touch the cut
surface of the UIM (IC portion)
when removing it.
You may hurt your hand or fingers.
Precautions for UIM
Caution
Do
Pull the
power plug
out
Pull the
power plug
out
Pull the
power plug
out
Do
■The description below meets “Guidelines on
the Use of Radio-communication Equipment
such as Cellular Telephones – Safeguards for
Electronic Medical Equipment” by the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference
Japan.
Comply with the following in
hospitals or health care facilities:
•Do not carry the FOMA terminal into
operating rooms, intensive care units
(ICU) or coronary care units (CCU).
•Turn off the FOMA terminal in hospital
wards.
•If there is any electronic medical
equipment near you, turn off the FOMA
terminal even when in a location such
as a lobby.
•Comply with any regulations of hospital
and health care facilities instructing you
not to use or carry in a mobile phone.
•If the Auto Power ON function is set,
deactivate the setting, then turn the
power off.
Turn off the FOMA terminal in
crowded areas such as inside
trains during rush hour, as
someone with an implanted
cardiac pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator may be near you.
Operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can
be affected by radio waves.
Notes on using near electronic
medical equipment
Warning
Do
Do
If you use an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator, use the mobile
phone 22 cm or more away from
an implanted cardiac pacemaker
or implanted defibrillator.
Operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can
be affected by radio waves.
Patients using electronic medical
equipment other than implanted
cardiac pacemakers or implanted
defibrillators (outside medical
establishments for treatment at
home, etc.) should check the
influence of radio waves upon the
equipment by consulting its
manufacturer.
Operation of electronic medical
equipment can be affected by radio
waves.
■Do not wet the equipment.
The FOMA terminal, battery, adapter/charger, and UIM
are not waterproofed. Do not use them in
environments, which are high in humidity such as in
bathrooms, and do not allow them to get wet from rain.
Furthermore, if carrying them against your body, they
become moist due to perspiration and the internal parts
may become corroded, causing malfunction. If the parts
are found to have been damaged due to exposure to
the liquids, any repairs will not be covered by warranty,
or repairs may not be possible. This may be repaired at
a cost if repairs are possible.
Handling Precautions
General notes
Do
Do
17
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for
cleaning glasses to clean the equipment.
pThe screen of the FOMA terminal sometimes has a
special coating so that they are easier to see. If you
rub it roughly with a dry cloth, it might be scratched.
Take care of the way of handling, and use only a dry,
soft cloth such as the one for cleaning glasses. If the
screen is left with water drop or stain adhered, smear
may be generated or the coating might peel off.
pDo not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or
other solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing
may be removed or discoloration may result.
■Occasionally clean the terminals of the
equipment using a dry cotton swab.
If the terminals become soiled, the connection might
deteriorate so that the power turns off or the battery
does not charge fully. Wipe the terminals with a dry
cloth or cotton swab.
■Do not place the FOMA terminal near an air
conditioner outlets.
Condensation may form due to rapid changes in
temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and
cause malfunction.
■Do not apply excessive force onto the FOMA
terminal and battery pack.
If you put the FOMA terminal in a bag along with many
other articles or sit with the FOMA terminal in a clothes
pocket, the display, internal circuitry and the battery
pack could be damaged or malfunction. Also, if an
external device is left connected to the connector
terminal or Earphone-Microphone/AV output terminal,
the connector could be damaged, or malfunction.
■Carefully read each instruction manual
attached to the FOMA terminal, adapter/
charger, or desktop holder.
■Do not rub or scratch the display part with
metals.
Doing so might cause damage to the part, resulting in
trouble or malfunction.
■Avoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
The FOMA terminal should be used within a
temperature range of 5°C to 35°C and a humidity range
of 45% to 85%.
■The FOMA terminal, if operated near landline
phones, television sets, radios or other
devices that are in use, may affect them. You
should operate your FOMA terminal as far
away from such equipment as possible.
■It is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored in the FOMA
terminal and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
■Do not insert an external device to the
connector terminal, or Earphone-Microphone/
AV output terminal at a slant when
connecting, and do not pull it out when it is
inserted.
Malfunction or damage may result.
■Make sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets
caught between the parts of the FOMA
terminal when you close it.
Otherwise, malfunction or damage may result.
■The FOMA terminal becomes warm during
use or charging but this is not an abnormality.
Use the FOMA terminal as it is.
■Do not leave the camera in places exposed to
direct sunlight.
Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.
■Usually, put the cover of the
Earphone-Microphone/AV output terminal,
connector terminal, and microSD card slot to
use the FOMA terminal.
Dust or water might enter into the FOMA terminal,
causing malfunction.
Notes on handling the FOMA terminal
■Do not use the FOMA terminal with the back
cover left removed.
The battery pack might come out, or malfunction or
damage may result.
■Do not apply an excessively thick sticker onto
the surfaces of the display, keys, or buttons.
Malfunction may result.
■While you are using the microSD card, never
take it off or turn off the power to the FOMA
terminal.
Data may be erased or malfunction may result.
■Batteries have a limited life.
Though it varies depending on the usage state, you are
advised to replace the battery if its usable time is
extremely short even when you fully charge it. Make
sure that you buy the specified battery.
■Charge the battery in a place with an
appropriate ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C.
■Make sure that the battery is charged when
you use the FOMA terminal for the first time
or have not used it for a long period of time.
■The usable time of the battery differs
depending on the usage environment or its
remaining life.
■Depending on how the battery pack is used, it
might swell as its operating life becomes
short, but this is not a problem.
■Do not store or leave the empty battery pack.
The performance and operating life of the battery pack
might be lowered or shortened.
Notes on handling batteries
18
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Charge the battery in a place with an
appropriate ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C.
■Charge the battery where:
•There is very little humidity, vibration, and dust.
•There are no landline phones, television sets or radios
nearby.
■During charging, the adapter/charger may
become warm. This is not an abnormality, so
continue charging.
■Do not use the DC adapter for charging the
battery when the car engine is not running.
The car battery could go flat.
■When using the power outlet having the
disengaging prevention mechanism, observe
the instructions given in that instruction
manual.
■Do not give a strong shock. Also, do not
deform the charging terminal.
Malfunction may result.
■Never use more force than necessary when
inserting/removing the UIM.
■The UIM may become warm during use, but
this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue
using it as it is.
■The warranty does not cover damage caused
by inserting the UIM into some other types of
IC card reader/writer.
■Always keep the IC portion clean.
Notes on handling chargers/adapters
Notes on handling the UIM
■Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for
cleaning glasses to clean the equipment.
■It is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored on the UIM
and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
■For the environmental protection, bring any
unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as
a docomo shop.
■Avoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
■Do not damage, carelessly touch, or
short-circuit the IC.
Data might be lost or malfunction may result.
■Do not drop the UIM or subject it to strong
impacts.
Malfunction may result.
■Do not bend the UIM or place something
heavy on it.
Malfunction may result.
■Into the FOMA terminal, do not insert the UIM
with a label or sticker pasted.
Malfunction may result.
■As the security for communication using the
Bluetooth function, the FOMA terminal
supports the security function that meets the
Bluetooth Specification. However, the
security may not be sufficient depending on
the configuration. Take care of the security
for communication using the Bluetooth
function.
Notes on using Bluetooth function
■Note that even if any leak of data or
information occurs while making connection
using the Bluetooth function, we take no
responsibility.
■With the FOMA terminal, you can use the
following: Headset, Hands-Free, Audio,
Dial-up Communication, Object Push, and
Serial Port. With Audio, you might be able to
use Audio Video Remote Control. (Only with
the compatible Bluetooth devices)
■Radio frequencies
The radio frequencies the Bluetooth function
of the FOMA terminal uses are as follows:
2.4 FH 1
2.4 : Indicates radio facilities that use 2400 MHz
frequencies.
FH : Indicates the modulation system is the FH-SS
system.
1 : Indicates that a supposed coverage distance is
10 meters or less.
: Indicates that all radio frequencies 2400 MHz
through 2483.5 MHz are used, and that the
frequencies for mobile object identifiers shall
not be avoided.
19
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■The FeliCa reader/writer function on the
FOMA terminal uses very weak radio waves
which do not require to be licensed as radio
stations.
■The FeliCa reader/writer is operated on the
13.56 MHz frequencies. When you use
another reader/writer nearby, take enough
distance between your FOMA terminal and
the reader/writer. Further, ensure that there
are no radio stations that use the same
frequencies.
■Cautions on Using Bluetooth Devices
Bluetooth operates at radio frequencies assigned to
the in-house radio stations for mobile object
identifiers that have to be licensed and are used in
production lines of a factory, specific unlicensed low
power radio stations, and amateur radio stations
(hereafter, referred to “another radio station”) in
addition to scientific, medical, industrial devices, or
home electric appliances such as microwave ovens.
1. Before using this product, make sure that
“another radio station” is not operating nearby.
2. If radio interference between this product and
“another radio station” occurs, move immediately
to another place or turn off power to avoid
interference.
3. For further details, contact “docomo Information
Center” on the back page of this manual.
Notes on handling the FeliCa reader/
writer
■Do not use the modified FOMA terminal.
Using a modified FOMA terminal infringes the
Radio Law.
The FOMA terminals are granted technical regulations
conformity certification as the specified radio equipment
under the Radio Law and bear a “technical conformity
mark ” on the nameplate as evidence of conformity.
Unscrewing the FOMA terminal and modifying internal
components void the technical regulations conformity
certification. Do not use the FOMA terminal in this state,
which infringes the Radio Law.
■Be especially careful not to operate the FOMA
terminal while driving.
You will be imposed punishment if you use the mobile
phone in your hand while driving. If you answer a call
out of necessity, tell the caller with Hands-free that you
will call him/her back, park your car to somewhere safe,
and then dial.
■Use the Bluetooth functions in Japan only.
The Bluetooth functions on the FOMA terminal have
been authorized in compliance with the radio
transmission standards in Japan.
You might be imposed punishment if you use them
overseas.
■Use the FeliCa reader/writer functions in
Japan only.
The FeliCa reader/writer functions on the FOMA
terminal have been authorized in compliance with the
radio transmission standards in Japan.
You might be imposed punishment if you use them
overseas.
Caution
20
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Other Options → See page 508
Accessories and Main Options
<Accessories> <Main Options>
pP-01A Handset
(With Warranty and Back Cover P29)
pP-01A CD-ROM
The PDF versions of “Manual for PC Connection”
and “Kuten Code List” are included.
pFOMA AC Adapter 01/02
(With Warranty and Instruction Manual)
pInstruction Manual
Quick Manual included (See page 550)
pBattery Pack P19 pDesktop Holder P28
(With Instruction Manual)
NTT ドコモ
21
Before Using the Handset
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Navigation Displays and Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Main Key Operations from the Stand-by Display . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Viewing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using Icons on Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Desktop Icon> 30
i-Widget Display and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Displaying Description of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Icons> 33
Private Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
When You Forget Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Guide> 38
Using UIM (FOMA Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Attaching/Removing Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Checking Battery Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Battery Level> 44
Turning Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Power ON/OFF> 45
Switching Display to English . . . . . . . . . . .<Select Language> 45
Configuring Initial Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Initial Setting> 46
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Set Time> 46
Displaying World Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <World Time Watch> 47
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Caller ID Notification> 48
Checking Your Own Phone Number . . . . . . . . <Own Number> 48
Before Using the Handset
22
Part Names and Functions
■For inserting or pulling the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option)
Take hold of the plug and insert or pull it straight into or out. Be careful not to take
hold of the cover and plug together when you pull it out.
Plug
!
"
#
$
'
&
%
pThe key design in Normal style differs from the one in
Horizontal Open Menu.
23
Before Using the Handset
Light sensor
・For sensing brightness (See page 116)
pDo not cover the light sensor with your hands or do
not put a sticker on it. Doing so might disable you to
detect the brightness.
・For shooting photos of yourself (See page 236)
・For catching sight of yourself during a videophone call
Earpiece
・For listening to the other party’s voice
Display
(See page 28)
l Mail key/f Full Browser key
m Menu key
r Clear key/i-Widget key
・For returning to the previous operation
・For clearing entered text or a phone number
d Start key, Hands-free key
・For making/receiving calls (See page 50 and page 64)
・For talking with Hands-free (See page 63)
Microphone
・For speaking to the other party
Inside camera
o Command navigation key
i i-mode key/i-αppli key
c Camera key/1Seg key
h Power/End key
・For ending calls
・For ending respective functions
・For turning on the power (for at least one second)/
For turning off the power (for at least two seconds)
(See page 45)
Numeric keys
・For entering phone numbers and text
x Multi key
Hook for Horizontal Open Style
Connector terminal
・For connecting the AC adapter (option), DC adapter
(option), or FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function
01/02 (option)
Private window
(See page 33)
Call/Charging indicator
・Flickers for incoming calls/mail and during a call.
(See page 120)
・Lights in red during charging.
・Lights/Flickers when you shoot with the camera.
pThe flickering pattern and color tone of the illumination
might look different depending on the type of the
FOMA terminal you use.
Outside camera
・For shooting portraits and/or landscapes
(See page 236)
・For catching sight of persons and/or landscapes
during a videophone call
Infrared data port
・Used for infrared communication and the infrared
remote control. (See page 384 and page 388)
FeliCa mark
・The IC card is mounted.
pUse the IC card function placing this mark over the
scanning device. You cannot dismount the IC card.
(See page 317)
FOMA antenna/1Seg antenna
pThe antenna is embedded in the FOMA terminal. Do
not cover the antenna with your hand for better
communication/receiving.
Speakers
・For sounding ring tones
・For listening to the other party’s voice when
Hands-free is activated (See page 63)
microSD card slot
・For inserting microSD card (See page 370)
Back cover
・Remove this when attaching/removing the battery
pack and UIM. (See page 39 and page 41)
pDo not peel off the sticker on the back of the back
cover. If you peel it off, you might not be able to read
and write the IC card.
Charging terminal
!Strap hole
"Earphone-Microphone/AV output terminal
(See page 396 and page 419)
#p PushTalk key
・For making/receiving PushTalk calls
(See page 80 and page 83)
$One-push open button
(See page 24)
%< Side ▲ key
・For scrolling up page by page
&> Side ▼ key
・For scrolling down page by page
・For checking for missed calls and new mail
(See page 121)
<Press and hold for at least one second with the
FOMA terminal closed>
・For activating Manner Mode (See page 110)
'Horizontal open lever
(See page 24)
24
Before Using the Handset
The P-01A comes with two styles.
■Normal Style
You can open the FOMA terminal easily by one-push key operation.
(One-push Open)
pYou can open it also manually without using the button.
pYou need to close the FOMA terminal manually. If it does not close, open it fully and
then close it.
■Horizontal Open Style
Hold down the part A and open the display part with the horizontal open
lever slid into the direction B. From the horizontal display, you can use
1Seg, Full Browser, and others.
pIf the latch is not in a state of C when you open the display, re-open the FOMA terminal
after closing it once.
Styles
One-push open button
Horizontal open lever
Information
pWhen you open the FOMA terminal by pressing the one-push open button, it might
not open fully depending on its direction.
You can set which operation starts for when you switch to Horizontal
Open Style from the Stand-by display.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsWork with style
Select an item.
Horizontal open menu . . .Shows Horizontal Open Menu. (See page 36)
1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Activates 1Seg. (See page 255)
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Activates the camera in Photo Mode. (See page 239)
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Shows the Stand-by display (wide). (See page 113)
pWhen you open the FOMA terminal by pressing the one-push open button, be careful
not to drop it by its rebound.
pWhen you press the one-push open button in Horizontal Open Style, the FOMA
terminal will open in Normal Style after it is closed.
pBefore switching the styles, be sure to completely close the FOMA terminal. If you
operate the horizontal open lever in Normal Style or with the display part unlatched,
malfunction or damage may result.
pWhen the confirmation display to select “YES/NO” is shown and you switch the style,
the confirmation display may be cleared.
Work with Style
Information
Information
pWhen you switch styles from Main Menu or Horizontal Open Menu, the Stand-by
display appears regardless of the setting of this function.
25
Before Using the Handset
When you want to execute the operation shown on the display in Normal
Style, press the corresponding key as below.
■Basic display examples and key assignments
Navigation Displays and Key Operations
Key Operations in Normal Style
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the l key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the m key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the Oo key.
Indicates the direction in which you can scroll
and select items with the Mo key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the c key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the i key.
■Operating command navigation key
While the vertical display is shown, you
can operate in the same way as in
Normal Style.
While the horizontal display is shown,
press the corresponding key on the
right.
Key Operations in Horizontal Open Style
Zo
・Moves the cursor or highlighted
display up. (Press and hold to scroll
continuously.)
・Scrolls the page up.
Vo
・Moves the cursor to the right.
・Scrolls forward page by page.
(Press and hold to scroll
continuously.)
Oo
・Fixes the operation.
Co
・Moves the cursor to the left.
・Scrolls back page by page. (Press
and hold to scroll continuously.)
Xo
・Moves the cursor or highlighted
display down. (Press and hold to
scroll continuously.)
・Scrolls the page down.
26
Before Using the Handset
From the vertical Stand-by display in Normal Style or the horizontal
Stand-by display in Horizontal Open Style, you can execute the following
actions by operating the each key:
Main Key Operations from the Stand-by
Display
Key operation Action in Normal Style
(on the vertical display)
Action in Horizontal Open Style
(on the horizontal display)
+Oo
for a short time
Shows the display for selecting
the icons on the Stand-by
display, etc. (See page 32,
page 70, page 113)
Shows the display for selecting
the notification icons.
(See page 32, page 70)
for at least one
second Sets/Releases Key Lock. (See page 135)
+Zo
for a short time Shows the Channel list.
(See page 214) —
for at least one
second —
+Xo
for a short time Shows the Search Phonebook
display. (See page 96) —
for at least one
second
Shows the registration display
for the Phonebook entries.
(See page 90)
—
+Co
for a short time Shows the Received Call list.
(See page 55) —
for at least one
second
Shows the Received Address
list. (See page 175) —
+Vo
for a short time Shows the Redial list.
(See page 54) —
for at least one
second
Shows the Sent Address list.
(See page 175) —
+l
+f
※
for a short time Shows the Mail menu.
(See page 166)
Shows the Full Browser
Function Selection display.
(See page 220)
for at least one
second
Executes Check New
Message. (See page 161)
Shows the Internet web page
set as Home URL by Full
Browser. (See page 220)
+i
+=
※
for a short time Shows the i-mode menu.
(See page 194)
Shows the Software list.
(See page 293)
for at least one
second Shows the Software list. (See page 293)
+m
+~
※
for a short time Shows Main Menu.
(See page 34)
Shows Horizontal Open Menu.
(See page 36)
for at least one
second Sets/Releases IC Card Lock. (See page 318)
+c
for a short time Activates the camera in Photo Mode. (See page 239)
for at least one
second Starts 1Seg. (See page 255)
-d
for a short time Makes a call. (See page 50) —
for at least one
second
Accesses a voice dial entry.
(See page 102) —
-h
for a short time Sets whether to display the icons on the Stand-by display.
(See page 114)
for at least two
seconds Turns off the power. (See page 45)
+r
+|
※
for a short time Executes i-Widget.
(See page 312) —
for at least one
second
Resets Main Menu.
(See page 119) —
Key operation Action in Normal Style
(on the vertical display)
Action in Horizontal Open Style
(on the horizontal display)
27
Before Using the Handset
-0
for a short time Enters “0”. —
for at least one
second Enters “+”. —
-1
for a short time Enters “1”. —
for at least one
second
Measures your current location
and executes the GPS
function. (See page 328)
—
-2
for a short time
Enters “2”. —
for at least one
second
-3
for a short time
Enters “3”. —
for at least one
second
-4
for a short time
Enters “4”. —
for at least one
second
-5
for a short time Enters “5”. —
for at least one
second Switches the backlight on/off. (See page 116)
-6
for a short time
Enters “6”. —
for at least one
second
-7
for a short time
Enters “7”. —
for at least one
second
-8
for a short time Enters “8”. —
for at least one
second Switches View Blind on/off. (See page 117)
-9
for a short time
Enters “9”. —
for at least one
second
Key operation Action in Normal Style
(on the vertical display)
Action in Horizontal Open Style
(on the horizontal display)
※In this manual, each key is described with l, i, m, and r regardless of the
style.
-a
for a short time Enters “:”. —
for at least one
second
Activates/Deactivates Public Mode (Drive Mode).
(See page 69)
-s
for a short time Enters “#”. —
for at least one
second Activates/Deactivates Manner Mode. (See page 110)
-x
for a short time Shows the Multitask Menu. (See page 402)
for at least one
second
Shows the display for setting
Select Networks.
(See page 465) Switches menu functions.
(See page 402)
Switches menu functions.
(See page 402)
.<
for a short time
Switches between the i-αppli
Stand-by display and normal
i-αppli program.
(See page 311)
—
for at least one
second Activates 2in1. (See page 450) —
.>
for a short time Plays back a record message/
voice memo. (See page 72) —
for at least one
second
Plays back a videophone
record message/movie memo.
(See page 73)
—
.p
for a short time Shows the PushTalk
Phonebook list. (See page 84) —
for at least one
second Activates MUSIC Player (See page 281)
Key operation Action in Normal Style
(on the vertical display)
Action in Horizontal Open Style
(on the horizontal display)
Before Using the Handset
28
Viewing Display
<Private window>
%
&
!
"
#
$
!
Battery level (estimate) (See page 44)
Radio waves reception level (estimate)
Strong Weak
You are out of the FOMA service area or
radio waves do not reach.
During Self Mode (See page 130)
During i-mode (See page 194)
During i-mode communication (See page 194)
During packet communication (The icon differs
depending on the communication status.)
During PushTalk communication (See page 80)
You get out of the service area while
Network Search Mode is set to “Manual”.
(See page 465)
During SSL communication (See page 195)
(pink) Unread i-mode mail or an SMS message
exists. (See page 159 and page 191)
(dark blue)
The area for i-mode mail and SMS
messages in the FOMA terminal is full.
(See page 159 and page 191)
The area for SMS messages on the UIM
(FOMA card) is full.
(pink) Unread mail exists, and the area for SMS
messages on the UIM (FOMA card) is full.
(dark blue)
Both the FOMA terminal and UIM (FOMA
card) are full.
Area Mail exists. (See page 184)
(yellow)
Unread Messages R/F exist.
(See page 181)
(dark blue)
The area for Messages R/F in the FOMA
terminal is full. (See page 182)
(pink) i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center.
(See page 161)
(dark blue)
The box for i-mode mail at the i-mode
Center is full. (See page 159)
(yellow)
Messages R/F are held at the i-mode
Center. (See page 182)
(dark blue)
The box for Messages R/F at the i-mode
Center is full. (See page 182)
i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center
while Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”.
(See page 160)
New i-concier information exists.
(See page 216)
Not replied i-αppli call exists.
(See page 309)
During a voice call
During a videophone call
During 64K data communication
During measuring the current location
(See page 328)
Location Request Menu is set to “ON” or
“Reject numbers unset”, and it is within the
validity period. (See page 340)
Location Request Menu is set to “ON” or
“Reject numbers unset” and it is out of the
validity period. (See page 340)
A microSD card is inserted.(See page 371)
Data is being read to/written from the
microSD card.
A write-protected microSD card is inserted.
(See page 371)
The inserted microSD card cannot be used.
(See page 371)
A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in microSD Mode.
(See page 379)
A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in MTP Mode.
(See page 379)
(blue) A Bluetooth device is connected.
(See page 424 and page 426)
(black) A Bluetooth device is connected and power
consumption is low. (See page 424)
29
Before Using the Handset
pFor the horizontal display, icons appear at the lower right
of the display.
pThe clock at the upper right of the display (at the lower
right of the horizontal display) does not appear when the
icon or is displayed.
During Lock All (See page 128)
During Personal Data Lock (See page 131)
During Keypad Dial Lock (See page 135)
During Secret Mode or Secret Data Only
(See page 136)
During IC Card Lock (See page 318)
Both Keypad Dial Lock and Personal Data
Lock are set.
Both Keypad Dial Lock and Secret Mode/
Secret Data Only are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Lock All are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Personal Data Lock
are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Keypad Dial Lock
are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Secret Mode/Secret
Data Only are set.
IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and
Personal Data Lock are simultaneously set.
IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and Secret
Mode/Secret Data Only are simultaneously
set.
Type of in-use network (See page 461)
You are in the OFFICEED area.
(See page 456)
Timer Lock ON At Close is set.
(See page 131)
During Key Lock. (See page 135)
During Multitask (See page 401)
Multiple functions are activated.
(See page 401)
While watching a 1Seg program
(See page 255)
During recording of a 1Seg program
(See page 262)
During recording of a 1Seg program by
Timer Recording (See page 266)
During pause of 1Seg program recording
(See page 263)
During music playback (See page 281)
During music pause (See page 281)
During infrared communication
(See page 384 and page 388)
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (option) is connected in
Communication Mode.
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (option) is connected in
microSD Mode. (See page 379)
During talk or communication through a
USB Hands-free compatible device
(See page 63)
A USB Hands-free compatible device is
connected. (See page 63)
A USB Hands-free compatible device is
connected in microSD Mode. (See page 63)
Vibrator is set. (See page 108)
Ring Volume is set to “Silent” or
Mail/Msg. Ring Time is set to “OFF”.
(See page 68 and page 109)
During Manner Mode (See page 110)
Remote Monitoring is set to “ON”.
(See page 79)
During Public Mode (Drive Mode)
(See page 69)
The call cost has exceeded the specified
limit. (See page 417)
An alarm is set.
(See page 266 and page 405)
A Music&Video Channel program is booked.
(See page 272)
Backlight is set to “OFF”. (See page 116)
View Blind is set to “ON”. (See page 117)
Backlight is set to “OFF” and View Blind is
set to “ON”.
!Side Keys Guard is set to “ON”.
(See page 135)
"
USB Mode Setting is set to “microSD
mode”. (See page 379)
USB Mode Setting is set to “MTP mode”.
(See page 379)
#
∼・
Voice mail messages for Number B are held
at the Voice Mail Center in Dual Mode of
2in1. (See page 455)
$∼・
Voice mail messages are held at the Voice
Mail Center. (See page 440)
%∼The number of record messages
(See page 71)
&∼The number of videophone record
messages (See page 71)
Information
pSome characters and symbols on the display and
Private window might be modified or abbreviated. In
addition, the Private window is displayed in
monochrome.
pThe color liquid crystal display uses high-precision
production technology. The slightest change in the
environment or other factors may result in unlit or
permanently lit pixels, but this is not a manufacturing
defect.
30
Before Using the Handset
■Operation when a status icon is selected
■Operation when a notification icon is selected
<Desktop Icon>
Using Icons on Desktop
Status icon Notification icon
Desktop icon
Shows the display for Vibrator. (See page 108)
Shows the display for Ring Volume. (See page 68)
Shows the display for Manner Mode Set. (See page 112)
Shows the display for Remoto Monitoring. (See
page 79
)
Shows the display for releasing Public Mode (Drive Mode). (See page 69)
Shows the display for Notice Call Cost. (See page 417)
Shows the list of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, TV Timer, or Timer Recording.
(See page 263, page 264, page 404, page 407 or page 411)
Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 272)
Shows the display for Backlight. (See page 116)
Shows the display for View Blind. (See page 117)
Shows the display for “Set./Service” → “Display”.
Shows the display for Side Key Guard. (See page 135)
Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 379)
∼・ Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages.
(See page 441)
∼・ Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages.
(See page 441)
∼Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 71, page 72, page 108 and page 415)
∼Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 71, page 72, page 108 and page 415)
Missed call
Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 55)
Missed call to Number B of 2in1
Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 55)
Record message
Shows the Record Message list. (See page 72)
Videophone record message
Shows the Videophone Record Message list. (See page 73)
New i-mode mail or SMS
Shows the Inbox list. (See page 164)
New chat mail
Starts Chat Mail. (See page 188)
New Message R/F
Shows the Message R/F list. (See page 182)
i-αppli did not start automatically
Shows the i-αppli Auto Start Info. (See page 308)
Not replied i-αppli call
Shows the i-αppli Call Logs diaplay. (Seepage 310 )
A ToruCa file is received from a scanning device
Shows the ToruCa File list. (See page 322)
A security error occurred on the i-αppli Stand-by display
Shows the Security Error History. (See page 295)
Success in downloading a Music&Video Channel program
Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 272)
Failure in downloading a Music&Video Channel program
Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 273)
Missed alarm
Shows the contents of the alarm that could not be notified. (See page 407)
Missed TV timer
Shows the contents of the TV timer that could not be notified.
(See page 267)
Timer recording was completed
Shows the contents and results of the timer recording. (See page 267)
Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center
Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages. (See page 441)
31
Before Using the Handset
■Operation when a desktop icon is selected
The Phonebook could not be updated by Data Security Service
Shows the update display for Data Security Service. (See page 141)
Provide Location was executed automatically
Shows Location History. (See page 337)
Provide Location could not be executed automatically
Shows Location History. (See page 337)
You did not respond to a location provision request
Shows Location History. (See page 337)
Software Update is needed
Starts Software Update. (See page 524)
Software Update was executed
Shows the Update Completion display or the reason for not completing.
(See page 523)
Software rewriting is possible
Shows the rewriting confirmation display. (See page 522)
Pattern data was updated automatically
Shows the updated result. (See page 528)
The FOMA terminal and a personal computer are connected by the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 379)
Shows the dialing display with the phone number entered.
(See page 50 and page 80)
Shows the site of that URL. (See page 194)
Shows the site of that URL by Full Browser. (See page 220)
Shows the Message Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 146)
Shows the SMS Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 190)
Starts the i-αppli program.※ (See page 293)
Shows it on the Picture viewer.※ (See page 346)
Plays it back by the i-motion player.※ (See page 353)
Plays it back by the Video player.※ (See page 360)
Plays it back by the Chara-den player.※ (See page 363)
Plays it back by the Melody player.※ (See page 366)
※ When the original data is deleted or overwritten, the desktop icon is disabled.
You can paste up to 15 desktop icons of such as phone numbers, mail
addresses, etc.
1The display for an item to be pasted i()
Add desktop iconYES
pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are
found or the multiple destination addresses are found, select a mail address or
phone number to be pasted.
Shows it on the PDF viewer.※ (See page 390)
Shows it on the ToruCa viewer.※ (See page 320)
Shows the Private menu. (See page 413)
Shows the Bar Code Reader menu. (See page 248)
Shows the Ir Data Receiving display. (See page 386 and page 387)
Shows the Camera menu. (See page 239 and page 241)
Shows the Bluetooth Function Selection display.
(See page 424, page 426, and page 428)
Starts Voice Recorder. (See page 389)
Shows the i-concier menu display. (See page 216)
Shows the list of Alarm. (See page 404)
Shows the Calendar display. (See page 408)
Shows the ToDo list. (See page 411)
Shows the list of Text Memo. (See page 417)
Shows the calculator. (See page 417)
Shows the display for 使いかたナビ (Guide). (See page 38)
Starts MUSIC Player. (See page 280)
Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 274)
Shows the Viewer display. (See page 255)
Starts i-αppli Program Guide. (See page 260)
Paste Icons to Desktop
32
Before Using the Handset
1PressOo.
pDesktop icons are not displayed on the horizontal
Stand-by display. Further, you cannot select status
icons by pressing Oo.
2Use Mo to highlight an icon, and press Oo().
pUp to five “Desktop icons”
are displayed. If there are
six or more icons, “ ” and
“ ” are displayed.
pA “Notification icon” is
deleted when each function
is executed. To delete all
“Notification icons”, press
and hold r for at least one second from the display in step 1.
Information
pYou may not be able to paste the URL to the desktop depending on the site.
pYou can store the title for URL of up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters. When the
number of characters for the title exceeds that much, the characters in excess are
deleted. If no title exists for a site, up to 22 half-pitch characters of the URL excluding
“http://” or “https://” is displayed.
pSome files and data might not be pasted to the desktop.
Proceed to Respective Functions from Icons on Desktop
When a record message
icon is selected
Information
pWhen the notification icon of “Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center” ( )
appears while you are overseas, you cannot operate the Voice Mail function from the
notification icon. Follow the steps of “Operate Voice Mail Service at the Country You
Stay” on page 468.
1mSet./ServiceDisplay
Desktop icon
The list of desktop icons pasted to the desktop is
displayed.
2Select the icon whose details are to be displayed.
pYou can show the Function menu also by pressing i( ), while highlighting an
icon from the Stand-by display.
+m-6-3
Check Details of Desktop Icon
Desktop Icon list
Function Menu of the Desktop Icon List
Add to desktop Put a check mark for the function to be added
l()
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
However, the number of characters for the title displayed when
you highlight the icon is up to 11 full-pitch/ 22 half-pitch
characters from the beginning of the title.
Sort Select a desktop iconUse Bo to change the order
Oo()
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
l()YES
Reset desktop The desktop icons are reset to the default.
YES
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
33
Before Using the Handset
You can simultaneously start multiple Widget αppli programs, and can
display as Widget αppli list on the i-Widget display.
1Widget αppli
Widget αppli that is already starting is displayed.
If you select a Widget αppli program, you can display it
individually.
2Navigation displays
Navigation that corresponds to the button operation is
displayed.
≥If you press i[シャッフル (Shuffle)] on the i-Widget
display, you can randomly change the indication order
of Widgt αppli.
≥See P.312 for detailed operations of i-Widget.
The symbols on the display (such as , , and ) are called icons. You
can check the meanings of them on the display.
1m1Set./Service1Display1Icons
1Use Mo to highlight an icon.
Various information is displayed on the Private window like the following
examples:
Information is displayed for about 15 seconds in cases such as when you
press </> or p with the FOMA terminal closed.
i-Widget Display and Operations
+m-3-6
<Icons>
Displaying Description of Icons
i-Widget display
1
2
Private Window
Clock Receiving a call During a voice call
Dialing
When the FOMA terminal is closed, “Missed call” appears.
Press < to display the missed call record. The name is
displayed for the missed call coming from the party stored in the
Phonebook. When there are multiple missed calls, up to three
missed call records are displayed each time you press <.
≥If you have received 30 or more incoming calls after a missed
call, the missed call record disappears.
≥Missed call records might not be displayed while another function is activated.
≥After you display a missed call record, “Missed call” disappears.
When the FOMA terminal is closed, a Feel＊Mail image is played
back, and then “New mail” appears.
When you press <, the latest Feel＊Mail image is played back.
(For Messages R/F, the Feel＊Mail image is not played back.)
When “Mail” on page 115 is set to “ON”, the received date/time,
sender’s address (name), and subject of the mail or the received
date/time and subject of the Message R/F are displayed. The
sender’s name is displayed for the mail coming from the party
stored in the Phonebook. When multiple mail messages or
Messages R/F are received, up to three mail messages or
Messages R/F appear each time you press < with “New mail”
displayed.
≥Press < to end the playback of the Feel＊Mail image or to clear the received date/
time, and others.
≥For the mail messages and Messages R/F sorted to the box or folder with security set,
the Feel＊Mail images, received date/time, and others are not played back/displayed.
≥When a mail message or Message R/F comes in while “Receiving display” is set to
“Operation preferred” and a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, “New
mail” appears without showing any information.
≥Depending on the setting of “Auto-display”, “New mail” appears without showing any
information when a Message R/F comes in.
≥After you display the received date/time and others of the received mail or Message
R/F, “New mail” disappears.
≥When a mail message or Message R/F comes in during a voice call or a videophone
call, information is not displayed even when “Receiving display” is set to “Alarm
preferred”.
≥When you set “Secret mail display” to “OFF” and you receive a secret mail message in
Normal Mode, a Feel＊Mail image is not played back.
When a missed call is found
When a new mail message or Message R/F is received
34
Before Using the Handset
When “i-Channel ticker” on page 115 is set to “ON” and the
FOMA terminal is closed, tickers flow on the Private window.
pPress </> or p to end the tickers’ flow.
You can change displayed contents by pressing < while clock is shown.
Press m of the FOMA terminal to show Main Menu and then execute,
set, or check respective functions.
pSome functions can be selected also by the operation other than pressing m. In this
manual, the operation by the easier way is described.
pYou can also switch to Simple Menu focusing on only basic functions for easy
operation. (See page 118)
pThis FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (see page 118). If you use Kisekae Tool to
change the design of the Menu display, some menu configurations change according
to the usage frequency depending on the type of the menu.
Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply.
■Scroll Selection
Main Menu is composed of 12 main menu icons indicating each function.
pIf you select a main menu icon, the Sub-menu Item Selection display appears. If you
further select a sub-menu item, the Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display appears.
pBy repeating selecting, you can set and check the function.
■Menu Number Selection
You can display some functions by pressing m + menu number (see page 476).
■Multitask is Supported
pYou can simultaneously use some functions in Main Menu. (See page 401)
When i-Channel is received
Change Clock Display
Selecting Menu
Time only Icons and Date/time
In this manual, the description of the command navigation key operation
(selection of top/bottom/left/right, and press of Oo after selecting/
entering a function item) is omitted. Scroll selection is explained below
using the example of selecting the function “Quality alarm”:
Scroll Selection
Description Example of Steps
1
Main menu icon Sub-menu item Function name of lower sub-menu item
Items which appear on the display
No tone . . . . . . . . .
Does not sound.
High tone
. . . . . . . .
High alarm sounds.
Low tone
. . . . . . . .
Low alarm sounds.
m
Set./Service
Talk
Quality alarm
Select an alarm.
35
Before Using the Handset
Select “Set./Service” from Main Menu. Main Menu at purchase differs depending on the
body color. (See page 481)
Select a main menu icon from the menu function
1
pPress +Mo to highlight the icon. Press and hold +Mo to scroll
the icons continuously.
pIf you have not touched any key for 15 seconds, the
Stand-by display returns.
+m
+Mo
+Oo
Main Menu
Select “Talk” from “Set/Service”.
Select “Quality alarm” from “Talk”.
Select a sub-menu item from the menu function
2
Select a desired lower sub-menu item (function)
+Oo
pThe highlighted item is the currently
selected one.
pPress +Xo to highlight the item
below, and +Zo to highlight the item
above.
pPress and hold +Bo to scroll the
items continuously.
pPress +No to scroll page by page.
3
+Oo
p
Press
+Xo
to highlight the item below,
and
+Zo
to highlight the item above.
p
Press and hold
+Bo
to scroll the items
continuously.
p
When the items are listed over
multiple pages, the total number of
pages and the current page number
are shown at the upper right of the
display.
36
Before Using the Handset
Some menu items have even more detailed menus.
The example below shows how to set “Low tone” for “Quality alarm”.
Menu Number Selection is explained below using the following example:
Set or check the function
4
Menu Number Selection
Description Example of Menu Number
+Oo
pThe highlighted item is the currently
selected one.
pPress +Xo to highlight the item
below, and +Zo to highlight the item
above.
pPress and hold +Bo to scroll the
items continuously.
Menu number
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly Disconnecting
+m-7-5
From the Stand-by display, press m75.
Horizontal Open Menu enables you to quickly access the functions that
are available for the horizontal display. To show Horizontal Open Menu,
press m from the horizontal Stand-by display.
pHorizontal Open Menu at purchase differs
depending on the body color.
(See page 481)
pWhen “Work with style” is set to “Horizontal
Open Menu”, Horizontal Open Menu
automatically appears just by switching to
Horizontal Open Style.
pIf you have not touched any key for 15
seconds, the Stand-by display returns.
pSome operating procedures or items which
appears on the display in Horizontal Open
Menu differ from the ones described in this
manual.
Call up the function using the menu number
1
Horizontal Open Menu
+m-7-5
+m
37
Before Using the Handset
If you press i when “ ” is shown at the lower right of the display,
the Function menu including selectable items such as “Save”, “Edit”,
and “Delete” appears in each operation. The contents of the Function
menu depend on the display from which you show the Function menu.
pWhen the items are listed
over multiple pages, the total
number of pages and the
current page number are
shown at the upper right of
the Function Menu display.
In this manual, the operation of the Function menu is described as
follows:
Function Menu
Description Example for Function Menu
+i
Delete all You can delete all files.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
YES
Item displayed in the Function menu
Operating procedures after selecting
an item in the Function menu
An actual operation is done as follows:
Press the numeric key corresponding to the
displayed item number.
When menu items are listed over multiple pages, you can show the previous/next page
by pressing Bo with the uppermost/lowermost item highlighted. You can press No to
scroll through page by page. When / is displayed on the display, you can
scroll through page by page also by pressing m()/c().
pDepending on the display being shown, such as lower sub-menu items, you might be
able to scroll through page by page also by pressing </> instead of No.
To select an item quickly <Direct selection>
Item scroll
Press +i().
Use +Mo to highlight
“Delete all” and press
+Oo().
Enter your Terminal
Security Code and press
+Oo().
Use +Bo to highlight
“YES” and press
+Oo().
Item number
38
Before Using the Handset
With the functions you can select multiple items, put a check
mark for check boxes to select them. Each time you press
Oo( ), you can switch
“”
and
“”
.
With some functions, you can put or clear check marks at a
time by pressing i() and selecting “Select all/Release all” or by pressing
m(/).
p
“”
is placed to the selected item depending on the function.
The Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display is shown. When you press h, the
Stand-by display returns (except during Multitask). The Stand-by display or the former
display automatically returns depending on the function.
Press h. The contents of the setting are abandoned and the Stand-by display or the
former display returns. The confirmation display appears asking whether to abandon the
setting contents depending on the function. You can press r to return to the previous
operation.
Press Bo to highlight “YES” or “NO”, then press Oo().
Check box
After finishing the operation
To cancel the operation midway
When the “YES/NO” selection display appears
For Reset Settings
You can search for the functions you want to know and use, and then
check the operating methods. You can execute some functions from
“
使いかたナビ
(Guide)”. This function is available in Japanese Mode only.
1mステーショナリー
(Stationery)
使いかたナビ
(Guide)
Select an item.
おすすめ機能 (Recommendable functions)
. . . Displays the recommendable functions. Go to step 3.
キーワード検索 (From keywords)
. . . Enter keywords and retrieve. Go to step 2
機能一覧検索 (From Function list)
. . . Retrieves from the function list. Go to step 3.
検索履歴 (Search history)
. . . Displays up to 30 search histories. Go to step 3.
pHighlight each item and press l( ); then the
detailed operating methods are displayed.
pThe 使いかたナビ
(Guide) display appears also by selecting the 使いかたナビ
(Guide) icon “ ” pasted on the desktop at purchase.
2Enter a keyword.
Up to 50 search results are displayed.
pYou can enter up to 24 full-pitch/48 half-pitch characters.
3Select a functionSelect an item.
機能の説明 (Description) . . . . . . . . Displays explanations for the function.
操作のしかた (How to operate) . . . Displays the operating method.
この機能を使う (Operate function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes the function. Operate each function.
pFor some functions, press Oo( ) several times for selection.
pYou can display explanations about the function also by pressing l()
while highlighting the function.
pTo delete search history, press i( ) and select “1件削除 (Delete this)” or
“全削除 (Delete all)”, then select “YES”.
<Guide>
When You Forget Key Operation
39
Before Using the Handset
The UIM is an IC card that holds your information such as phone
numbers. It can hold data such as Phonebook entries and SMS
messages as well. By sharing a UIM, you can operate multiple FOMA
terminals for multiple purposes.
You cannot use the FOMA terminal for communication such as voice and
videophone calls, i-mode, sending/receiving mail, or packet
communication unless the UIM is inserted.
For details on how to use the UIM, refer to the UIM instruction manual.
When inserting or removing the UIM, take care not to accidentally touch
or scratch the IC.
You need to turn off the power and then remove the battery before you
insert the UIM. (See page 41)
■Inserting
1With the golden IC surface
downward, push the UIM slowly
to the end while pressing the
surface of it.
■Removing
1While sliding the UIM, pull it out
slowly.
Using UIM (FOMA Card)
Insert/Remove
Cut
You can set two security codes, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM. (See page 126)
The FOMA terminal has the UIM security function (UIM restriction
function) as a security function to protect your data files.
If you obtain data files by the method below with the UIM inserted, UIM
security function is automatically set to them.
・When downloading images or melodies and so on, from sites or
Internet web pages
・When receiving i-mode mail with file attachments
The data files with the UIM security can be browsed, played back, started,
edited, attached to mail, or transferred via infrared rays only when the
UIM used for obtaining is inserted. When the UIM used for obtaining the
data or files is not inserted, or when another UIM is inserted, these
functions are not operable.
pIn the explanation hereafter, the UIM used to obtain data and files is referred to
as “your UIM” and other UIMs as “another person’s UIM”.
Information
pMake sure that you insert/remove the UIM with the FOMA terminal closed and held in
your hand.
pTake care not to force the UIM into place because this can break it.
pTake care not to lose the UIM once you remove it.
pWhen you replace your UIM (except during Omakase Lock), you need to enter the
four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When you enter
the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter the
incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.)
Security Code
Security Function of UIM
40
Before Using the Handset
pWhen the UIM is not inserted or when another person’s UIM is inserted, the following
types of data and files are displayed with the restrictions symbol, “ ”:
・Videophone record messages ・Movie memos ・Screen memos
・Templates ・i-αppli programs ・Images
・i-motion movies ・Chara-den images ・Melodies
・Machi-chara images ・Kisekae Tool files ・PDF files
・Chaku-uta®/Chaku-uta Full® music files
・Downloaded dictionaries
・Files attached or pasted to i-mode mail in the Inbox
・Files attached to i-mode mail in the Outbox/Draft (except the data shot or edited
with the FOMA terminal)
・Messages R/F with files (melodies or images) attached or pasted
・Images inserted into Deco-mail text
※This function applies to the pre-installed i-αppli programs, Chara-den images,
Deco-mail pictograms, etc. if they are reinstalled (upgraded) from a site.
※“Chaku-uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.
pThe preview image for the data file with the UIM security appears as
shown on the right.
♪
♪
♪
♪
♪
If the UIM used for
obtaining data files
or mail messages is
inserted, you can
browse/play back the
data files with the UIM
security.
♪
♪
♪
♪
♪
Unless the UIM used
for obtaining data files
or mail messages is
inserted, you cannot
browse/play back the
data files with the UIM
security.
Your UIM
Another
person’s UIM
Replacing UIMs
If you use the blue UIM with your FOMA terminal, note that following
specifications differ from those of the green/white UIM:
Information
pWhen the UIM security is set for data files, you cannot set them for the functions such
as “Display setting” and “Select ring tone” when another person’s UIM is inserted.
pWhen the data files with the UIM security is set for “Display setting” or “Select ring
tone”, the FOMA terminal works with their default settings if you replace your UIM with
another person’s UIM. If you insert your UIM again, your settings are enabled again.
pThe UIM security function is not set for the data files received using the infrared
communication function or data transmission (OBEX™ communication) function and
the still images/movies shot or edited with the FOMA terminal.
pEven when another person’s UIM is inserted, you can move/delete data files with the
UIM security.
pThe settings of the following functions are stored on the UIM:
・SMS validity period ・SMS center selection ・Select language
・PLMN setting ・PIN1 code, PIN2 code ・PIN1 code entry set
・Validating/Invalidating DOCOMO Certificate 1 and user certificate
Types of UIM (FOMA Card)
Functions UIM Reference
(blue)
(green/white)
Number of digits of the phone number
that can be stored in the UIM Phonebook 20 max. 26 max. 91
Operation of user certificate to use
FirstPass Not available Available 210
Use of WORLD WING Not available Available 460
Use of Service Numbers for “DOCOMO
repair counter” and “General inquiries
<docomo Information Center>”
Not available Available 447
41
Before Using the Handset
Use the FOMA terminal’s dedicated Battery Pack P19.
■Attaching
1While pressing the “ ” part of
the back cover in the direction A,
slide the back cover (2 mm or
more) in the direction B to
unlock.
2
With the arrow mark facing up, fit
the tab side of the battery pack to
the FOMA terminal securely, and
then push the battery pack into
the direction B while pressing it
against the direction A.
■WORLD WING
WORLD WING is the DOCOMO FOMA international roaming service that enables
you to use the current phone number overseas for making and receiving calls using
the UIM (green/white) and service compatible mobile phone.
pYou do not need to subscribe to WORLD WING if you have subscribed to the FOMA
service after September 1, 2005. If you offered that you did not need WORLD WING
at the time you signed up for the FOMA service, or when you have midway canceled
WORLD WING, you are required to take the procedures to newly subscribe to
WORLD WING.
pIf you have signed up for the FOMA service before August 31, 2005, and have not
yet subscribed to WORLD WING, you are required to subscribe to it.
pThis service is not available with some billing plans.
pIf you lose your UIM (green/white) or have it stolen overseas, immediately contact
DOCOMO to take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the UIM. For
inquiries, see “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual. Note
that you are still charged the call and communication fees incurred after you lose it or
have it stolen.
Attaching/Removing Battery Pack
Arrow mark
3Slide the back cover in the
direction of the arrow and attach
it in place.
■Removing
1Remove the back cover
following step 1 of
“■Attaching”, and take hold of
the projection of the battery pack
to lift it up.
Projection
Information
pMake sure that you attach/remove the battery with the FOMA terminal closed and
held in your hand after you turn off the power. Also, make sure not to press the
one-push open button when you attach/remove the battery.
pIf you try to force the battery into place, you could damage the UIM or the charging
terminal of the FOMA terminal.
42
Before Using the Handset
Use the FOMA terminal’s dedicated Battery Pack P19.
Life of battery pack
pBattery packs are consumables. The usable time shortens slightly each time they are
charged.
pWhen the usable time of the battery pack becomes half the time it was purchased,
replacing is recommended because the battery pack is nearing the end of its life.
Depending on the use conditions, the battery pack may swell as it nears the end of its
life, but this is not a problem.
pThe life of the battery pack may shorten if you use i-αppli programs, talk on the
videophone, watch 1Seg programs and so on for a long time during charging.
Charging
pFor details, refer to the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (option),
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use (option), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (option).
pThe FOMA AC Adapter 01 supports 100 V AC only. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 and
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use support from 100 V AC through 240 V AC.
pThe shape of the plug for the AC adapter is for 100 V AC (for domestic use). To use the
AC adapter that supports from 100 V AC through 240 V AC overseas, you need to
have a conversion plug adapter that is compatible with the voltage of the country you
stay. Do not use a transformer for overseas travel to charge the battery pack.
pEven during charging, you can still answer calls if the FOMA terminal is turned on. This
will consume the charged amount so that charging will take longer. Also, the standby
time or talk time might be shorter if you charge the battery pack with your FOMA
terminal open.
pIf you have a long time videophone call during charging, the temperature in the FOMA
terminal may rise and charging may be suspended. In such a case, wait for a while and
try charging again.
pRemove and insert the connector slowly and carefully, without using unnecessary
force.
pDo not remove the battery pack during charging.
Charging
For environmental protection, bring the unneeded battery
pack to an NTT docomo shop, dealer, or recycle shop.
Li-ion 00
Do not charge for long periods of time (several days) with the FOMA
terminal turned on.
pIf you leave the FOMA terminal powered on for long periods of time during charging,
you may not be able to use the FOMA terminal for long duration as expected and the
low battery alarm may sound soon, because the FOMA terminal receives the power
from the battery pack after charging is completed. If this happens, charge the battery
pack correctly. When charging the battery pack again, first remove the FOMA terminal
from the AC adapter (or desktop holder) or DC adapter and then set it again.
Estimated usable time for battery pack (The usable time for the battery pack
varies with the charging time and the remaining life of the battery pack.)
※The continuous talk time is the estimated time that the FOMA terminal can be used for
calls when radio waves can be sent and received normally.
※The continuous standby time is the estimated time when radio waves can be received
normally. The standby time could be about half of this estimate depending on the
charge level of the battery pack, function settings, other ambient conditions such as
temperature, and the status of radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for
instance). When you use i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and
standby time will be shorter. Further, even if you do not make calls or not execute
i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and standby time will be shorter if
you watch 1Seg programs, compose i-mode mail, start up a downloaded i-αppli
program or the i-αppli Stand-by display, execute data communication or Multiaccess,
use the camera, play back music, or use Bluetooth connections.
※The continuous talk time and the continuous standby time may be shortened
depending on the network environment in the country you stay.
※
The continuous standby time for standstill is the average number of hours you can use the
FOMA terminal in standstill status when it is closed and can receive radio waves normally.
※The continuous standby time for in motion is the average number of hours you can
use the FOMA terminal in the combined status of “standstill” “moving” and “out of the
service area” when it is closed, in an area where it can receive radio waves normally.
Continuous
standby time
FOMA/3G
Select networks
[3G]
In motion: Approx. 410 hours
Select networks
[Auto]
Standstill: Approx. 580 hours
In motion: Approx. 400 hours
GSM
Select networks
[Auto]
Standstill: Approx. 260 hours
Continuous
talk time
FOMA/3G Voice call: Approx. 200 minutes
Videophone call: Approx. 110 minutes
GSM Voice call: Approx. 190 minutes
1Seg watching time
Approx. 200 minutes
(Mobile W-Speed is OFF: Approx. 260 minutes)
(In ECO Mode: Approx. 360 minutes)
43
Before Using the Handset
※The 1Seg watching time is the estimated time for when radio waves can be received
normally with the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 (option) connected. The
watching time might be shortened depending on the charge level of the battery pack,
function settings, other ambient conditions such as temperature, and the status of
radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for instance).
Estimated time for charging battery pack
※The charging time is an estimate of time for when empty battery pack is charged with
the FOMA terminal turned off. The charging time will be longer if you charge the
battery pack with the power of the FOMA terminal turned on.
AC adapter Approx. 130 minutes DC adapter Approx. 130 minutes
Charge with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder
1Plug in horizontally with
engraved side of connector
of AC Adapter (option) facing
down.
2Up to AC Adapter’s plug into a
power socket of 100 V AC such
as the family use.
Call/Charging
indicator
Desktop Holder
Engraved surface
(down side)
AC Adapter
Stopper
Power
socket
Lock claw
AC Adapter’s
plug
Connector
3Put the bottom of the FOMA terminal into the stopper of
the desktop holder (A) to fit the head to the lock claw,
and then depress the FOMA terminal until it clicks (B).
Check that the Call/Charging indicator lights in red.
When the Call/Charging indicator flickers, dismount the AC adapter and battery
pack from the FOMA terminal and then re-mount them for charging.
If the symptom persists, troubles with the AC adapter, desktop holder or battery
pack may be involved, so consult a handling counter such as a docomo shop.
pBe sure to charge the FOMA terminal with the FOMA terminal closed.
pThe charging confirmation tone (see page 109) sounds when charging starts and
ends. However, it does not sound when the power is off or during Manner Mode
or Public Mode (Drive Mode).
pBe sure to set the FOMA terminal firmly onto the desktop holder. Also, be careful
that the connector cover or a commercial strap is not caught between the FOMA
terminal and desktop holder.
4When charging is completed, hold the desktop holder
with fingers and lift up the head of FOMA terminal to
remove.
pUnplug the AC adapter from the power socket when you are not going to use it for
a long time.
■Indicator and display during charging and when charging is completed
pWhen the FOMA terminal is turned off, “ ” does not appear.
If you start charging with the battery flat, the Call/Charging indicator might not light
immediately; however, charging itself has started.
Call/Charging indicator “ ” display
Charging Lights in red Blinks
Charging completed Off Lights
44
Before Using the Handset
Insert the connector with the engraved
surface facing up until it clicks. Pull straight
the connector out while pressing the
release buttons.
pTo charge the battery, place the cover of
the connector terminal as illustrated. Pull
out the cover of the connector terminal to
direction A, and turn it as direction B.
※Check the facing direction (front or rear)
of the AC adapter plug and then insert
or pull it horizontally into or out of the
FOMA terminal.
Malfunction could result if you try to pull
it forcibly.
■DC adapter (option)
With the DC adapter, you can use a cigarette lighter socket (12 V/24 V) of cars to
charge the FOMA terminal with the battery pack attached.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02.
When charging only with the AC adapter
Cover
Release
buttons
Engraved
surface
Information
pIf the fuse blows off when charging with the DC adapter, be sure to use a 2A fuse. The
2A fuse is consumables, so purchase at auto parts stores in your neighborhood.
When the FOMA terminal is turned on, an estimate of the battery level is
indicated by the icon.
・Almost full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
・Getting low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
・Almost empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pCharge the battery when it is almost empty.
You can check an estimate of the battery level by the display and sound.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsBattery
Battery level
pThe pictograph disappears in about three seconds.
The display on the right appears and the low battery alarm
sounds for about 10 seconds. To stop this alarm, press any
key other than < and >. About one minute later, the FOMA
terminal will be turned off.
pDuring a call, a beeping tone from the earpiece notifies you of
the low battery. About 20 seconds later your call will be cut
and then one minute later the FOMA terminal will be turned
off.
<Battery Level>
Checking Battery Level
Check by Display and Tone
Almost full Getting low Almost empty
※Almost empty.
Charge the battery.
Three beeps Two beeps One beep
When the battery is running out
Recharge Battery
display
45
Before Using the Handset
1Press and hold h for at least one
second.
After the Wake-up display (see page 114) is displayed,
the Stand-by display appears.
pIf you have stored many Phonebook entries or mail
messages, it may take a while for the display to appear.
pIf Set Time is set, the current date and time are shown.
pWhen “ ” is displayed, the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area or in the place where the radio waves
do not reach. Move to a location where “ ”
disappears.
pIf “Starting System Wait a minute” is displayed when
you turn on the power, wait for a while and then
proceed.
Enter the four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When
you enter the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter
the incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.)
Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN1 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the
correct PIN1 code, the Stand-by display appears. See page 126 for PIN1 code.
Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN2 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the
correct PIN2 code, the Stand-by display appears. If you press r or h without
entering the correct PIN2 code, “Auto reset setting” is set to “OFF” and the Stand-by
display appears. See page 126 for PIN2 code.
<Power ON/OFF>
Turning Power On/Off
Turn Power On
Stand-by display
When your UIM is replaced (except during Omakase Lock)
When “PIN1 code entry set” of “UIM setting” is set to “ON”
When “Auto reset setting” of “Notice call cost” is set to “ON”
(except during Omakase Lock)
Welcome mail messages have been saved by default. Press +Oo twice or perform the
operation of “Display Mail from Inbox” on page 164 to show the mail message.
1Press and hold h for at least two seconds.
The exit display appears and the power turns off.
pYou cannot turn on the power immediately after turning off the power. Wait a few
seconds.
1m
設定／サービス
(Set./Service)
ディスプレイ
(Display)
バイリンガル
(Select language)
Japanese (
日本語
) or English (
英語
)
pThe following functions are different between Japanese display and English
display:
Check Welcome Mail
Information
pEach entry display appears in the order of “PIN1 code” → “Terminal Security Code”
→ “PIN2 code”.
Turn Power Off
+m-1-5
<Select Language>
Switching Display to English
Functions Japanese English
Info Notice Setting 電子音 (Electrical tone)
ボイス (Voice)
OFF
ON
Not available
OFF
“Clock” of Display Setting
→ “Stand-by clock/Stand-by clock Wide”
→ “Day of week”
Available Not available
使いかたナビ (Guide) Available Not available
Voice Guidance Available Not available
Information
pWhen you insert the UIM, the “バイリンガル (Select language)” setting is stored on
the UIM.
46
Before Using the Handset
If the date and time, Terminal Security Code, Keypad Sound, Location
Request Menu, or Character Size is not set, the Initial Setting display
appears when you turn on the power. You can set the initial settings also
from each menu function separately.
1Turn on the powerYES
pWhen the display for entering your Terminal Security
Code, PIN1 code, or PIN2 code appears, follow the
operation on page 45.
2Set the date and time.
You can select “Auto time adjust ON” or “Auto time adjust OFF” for setting the time.
(See page 46)
3Set your Terminal Security Code.
You can set your Terminal Security Code required for setting functions.
(See page 126)
1. Enter “0000”Enter your new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)
YES
4Set Keypad Sound.
You can set whether to make a keypad sound. (See page 109)
5Set Location Request Menu.
You can set whether to notify your current location for when a GPS location
provision request arrives. (See page 340)
6Set the size of characters.
You can set the size of characters on the display at a time. (See page 123)
<Initial Setting>
Configuring Initial Setting
You can select whether to correct the time automatically or set it
manually. The time is set/displayed on the 24-hour basis.
1mSet./ServiceClockSet time
Auto time adjust ON or Auto time adjust OFF
Auto time adjust ON
. . . . Corrects the date/time automatically. The setting is completed.
When the time cannot be corrected automatically such as when “ ” is
displayed and the date/time has not been set, the Manual Time Setting
display appears. Follow step 2 to set the date/time.
Auto time adjust OFF
. . . . Sets the date/time manually.
pWhen “Notice call cost” is set to “ON”, you need to enter your Terminal Security
Code.
Information
pWhen an unset function is found, the Initial Setting display for the unset function
appears each time you turn on the power.
pThe completed settings are valid even when total setting is interrupted by an incoming
call or canceled by pressing -h or -r midway.
pWhen the power is automatically turned on by alarm notification, the Initial Setting
display does not appear even if there is any unset function.
pWhen you finish the initial settings, the confirmation display appears telling that
updating software is executed automatically. This display appears only at the first
time, and after that, does not appear until you execute Reset Settings or Initialize.
+m-3-1
<Set Time>
Setting Date and Time
47
Before Using the Handset
2Enter year, month, date and time.
Use Mo to move the cursor and enter numbers by the
numeric keys.
pTo enter one-digit numeral for the date and time, enter
two digits beginning with “0” as in “01” through “09”.
pHighlight “Time zone” and press l( ) to set the
time zone. Use Mo to select a region and press Oo().
The time displayed on the FOMA terminal is corrected according to the clock information
obtained from the network when the power is turned on.
The time is corrected when you show the Stand-by display with “Auto time adjust ON”
set.
If the time is not corrected for a while even after turning on the power, turn off and on the
FOMA terminal.
p
Some few second errors might occur. You might not be able to correct the time depending
on the radio wave conditions, or the i-
α
ppli program set for the i-
α
ppli Stand-by display.
pWhen you receive the clock information overseas and the time difference correction
information differs from the previously received one, “Time is adjusted” is displayed and
the time difference is corrected automatically. Press “OK” to update the time and show
Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, sent/received mail messages and others in local
time.
pDepending on the networks overseas, the time difference might not be corrected.
About date/time correction function
Information
pUnless Set Time is set, the functions which use the clock such as Schedule do not
work correctly. Further, the date/time for redial items and received call records are not
stored.
pThe set time is retained even when the battery pack is replaced, however, it might be
reset if the battery pack is left removed for a long time. In that case, charge the FOMA
terminal and then perform the clock setting.
pWhen “Time zone” is set to other than “GMT +9” or the time difference is corrected
overseas, the sub clock (Japanese date/time, etc.) is displayed on the Stand-by
display.
pThis function supports clock settings from 00:00 on January 1, 2008 through 23:59 on
December 31, 2037.
You can display the time of the specified area on the Stand-by display.
1mSet./ServiceClockWorld time watch
ON or OFF
Use Mo to select an area and press Oo().
You can advance the time displayed for the overseas country you stay
and for a region of World Time Watch by one hour.
1mSet./ServiceClockSummer timeON or OFF
<World Time Watch>
Displaying World Time
Information
pWorld Time Watch does not appear when “Display setting” → “Clock” → “Stand-by
clock/Stand-by clock Wide” → “Position” is set to “OFF”, or when you use the FOMA
terminal overseas.
Summer Time
48
Before Using the Handset
You can set the FOMA terminal to send your phone number to the called
party’s phone when dialing. Your phone number is important
information, so take utmost care when notifying your phone number.
This function is available only when the other party’s phone supports
Caller ID.
You can set whether to notify your caller ID on the network.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesCaller ID notification
Do the following operations.
<Caller ID Notification>
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone
Number
+m-1-7
Set Caller ID Notification to Network
Activate ON or OFF
Check setting You can check the setting contents of “Activate”.
pYour phone number (own number) is stored on the UIM.
1mPhonebookOwn number
You can press No to switch the tabs.
pSee page 414 for storing/displaying personal data.
+m-0
<Own Number>
Checking Your Own Phone Number
Own Number display
Phone number tab
List tab
Information
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can switch between Number A and Number B by pressing
+Oo( ) from the Own Number display. “ ” appears for Number A, and “ ”
appears for Number B.
pWhen you replace a UIM with another one (2in1 contractor → 2in1 contractor) while
using 2in1, perform “2in1 function OFF” (see page 451) and then set “2in1 setting” to
“YES”, or perform “Auto acquire No. B” (see page 415), to acquire the correct Number
B.
When you replace a UIM with another one (
2in1 contractor
→
2in1 non-contractor
),
perform “2in1 function OFF” as well to update the owner’s information to the correct
one.
49
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Making Calls/Videophone Calls
Videophone Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Making a Call/Videophone Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Switching a Voice/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using Call Records . . . . . .<Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls> 54
Using Chaku-moji. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chaku-moji> 56
Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for Each Call . . . . . . .<186/184> 58
Sending Touch-tone Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Pause Dial> 59
Making International Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <WORLD CALL> 60
Setting for International Calls. . . . . . . . . . .<International Dial Assist> 61
Storing Numbers to be Added to the Beginning of a Phone Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Prefix Setting> 62
Making a Call Specifying a Sub-address . . . . .<Sub-address Setting> 62
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reconnect Signal> 62
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear . . <Shikkari Talk> 63
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear . . . <Noise Reduction> 63
Slowing Down the Other Party’s Speaking Speed . . . . <Yuttari Talk> 63
Switching to Hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Hands-free> 63
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices . . . . . . . . <In-Car Hands-free> 63
Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls
Receiving a Call/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Switched between a Call and a Videophone Call by the Other Party. . . 65
Setting Response of Key Operation for Answering Incoming Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Answer Setting> 66
Setting Response for when Opening FOMA Terminal during Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Setting when Opened> 67
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Setting when Closed> 67
Adjusting Earpiece Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Volume> 67
Adjusting Ring Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Ring Volume> 68
When You cannot/could not Answer a Voice/Videophone Call
Putting a Call on Hold when You cannot Answer Immediately
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <On Hold> 68
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Holding> 68
Setting Hold Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Set Hold Tone> 69
Using Public Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
If You could not Answer an Incoming Call. . . . . . . . . . <Missed Calls> 70
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Record Message Setting> 71
Recording a Message when You cannot Answer Incoming Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Quick Record Message> 72
Playing/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice Memo/Videophone Record
Messages/Movie Memos
. . . . . . <Play/Erase Messages> <Play/Erase Videophone Messages> 72
Making Full Use of Videophone Calls
Using Chara-den. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Useful Functions for Videophone Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting Hands-free Videophone . . . . .<Hands-free with Videophone> 76
Setting Image Quality for Videophone Calls . . . . <Visual Preference> 76
Changing Image Displays for Videophone Calls . . . . . <Select Image> 77
Redialing as a Voice Call when a Videophone Call cannot be Connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Voice Call Auto Redial> 77
Setting for Switching a Voice/Videophone Call during a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Notify Switchable Mode> 78
Setting Answer Method of a Videophone Call during i-mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Videophone while Packet> 78
Using Videophone Calls by Interfacing to External Devices . . . . . . . . 78
Checking inside of a Room when You are Out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Remote Monitoring> 79
PushTalk
PushTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Making a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding a Member during a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Receiving a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Adding Entries to PushTalk Phonebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Store in PushTalk Phonebook> 84
Making a Call from PushTalk Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Deleting PushTalk Phonebook Entries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Delete from PushTalk Phonebook> 86
Setting for Making/Receiving a PushTalk Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
50
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You and the other party can talk viewing each other’s images.
DOCOMO videophones conform to 3G-324M, standardized by the international
standard 3GPP. You cannot connect to the videophone that uses a different format.
p3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project):
This is the regional standards organization for developing common technical
specifications for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000).
p3G-324M:
This is the international standard for the third generation of mobile videophones.
pP-01A supports only 64 kbps communication speed of the videophone.
You cannot talk on the videophone at 32 kbps communication speed.
■Display during videophone calls
…Received image (The other party’s image through the
camera or substitute image)
…Sent image (Image through your camera or substitute
image)
…Call duration
※1 When voice sending fails, the other party cannot hear your voice.
When voice receiving fails, you cannot hear the other party’s voice.
※2 When image sending fails, the sent image is not displayed at the other end.
When image receiving fails, the received image is not displayed.
When voice or image sending/receiving fails, it does not recover automatically. You need
to make a videophone call again.
Videophone Calls
…Status
: Voice sending/receiving
(gray): Voice sending/
receiving failed※1
: Image sending/receiving
(gray): Image sending/
receiving failed※2
: Camera image sending
: Still image sending
: Chara-den talking
: Hands-free activated
: AV output
: Bluetooth
communicating
: Portrait
: Close-up
: Landscape
: Night Mode
: Chara-den Whole
Action Mode
: Chara-den Parts Action
Mode
: DTMF Transmission
Mode
1Enter the other party’s phone number,
starting with the city code.
pWhen 27 or more digits are entered, the lower 26 digits
only are displayed.
pTo store an entered phone number in the Phonebook,
press m( ). Go to step 2 of “Storing Displayed
Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook” on
page 95.
pEven when you are dialing within the same area, you
need to enter the city code before the phone number.
2
Press d or Oo().
p“ ” blinks during dialing, and lights during a call.
Making a Call/Videophone Call
When Making a Voice Call
51
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Press l().
p“ ” blinks during dialing and lights during the call.
pPress m during a videophone call to switch between
the image through your camera and substitute image
for sending to the other party.
3Press h to end the call after talking.
When Making a Videophone Call
The digital communication
charging starts from this
display.
Information
pIf you hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see page 446), follow the steps of
“To notify your caller ID” on page 59 to enter “186” and redial.
pWhen the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can
hear the other party’s voice from the earphone. (See page 419)
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a call, the FOMA terminal works in accordance
with the setting of “Setting when closed”. (See page 67)
pIf you switch to Horizontal Open Style during a call, the FOMA terminal is set to “No
tone”. (See page 67)
pYou can press numeric keys to send touch-tone signals during a call. During a
Chara-den call, you need to switch to DTMF Transmission Mode. (See page 75)
pYou cannot make a call in Horizontal Open Style. However, when the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can make a voice call in
Horizontal Open Style.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can make a call after selecting Number A or Number B.
(See page 452)
The other party’s name and icon are displayed if the party’s phone number and name
are stored in the Phonebook. However, the image is not displayed even if it is stored in
the Phonebook.
pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name
that comes first in the search order (see page 96) is displayed.
pThe phone number instead of the name is displayed when you make a call during
Personal Data Lock or to the party stored as secret data in the Phonebook.
Each time you press r, the digit on the far right is cleared. If you press and hold r
for at least one second, all the digits are cleared and the Stand-by display returns.
pPress No to move the cursor to the digit you want to clear, and then press r to clear
it. To clear all the digits on and to the right of the cursor, press and hold r for at least
one second.
<For Voice Calls>
pYou can make a voice call also by pressing -d and then entering the party’s phone
number. If you enter a wrong number, press -h to clear the display and then redial.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free
w/ V. phone” (see page 76). However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode
regardless of “Hands-free w/ V. phone”.
pWhen you make a videophone call with substitute image, note that you will still be
charged for the digital communication, not the voice calls.
pIf you make a videophone call at 110/119/118 from the FOMA terminal, it is
automatically dialed out as a voice call.
pDuring a videophone call, you can send a Chara-den image to the other party instead
of the image through your camera. (See page 73)
pThe international videophone call is available using the DOCOMO international call
service “WORLD CALL”. (See page 60)
Display during dialing
If you entered a wrong phone number
Information
52
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The reason why it could not be connected is displayed. (The displayed reason might not
be the same as the actual reason depending on the type of the other party’s phone and
contract for network services.)
If a videophone call could not be connected
Messages Reasons
Check number, then
redial
You have dialed a non-existent phone number.
Busy The other party is busy. (Depending on the receiver’s
phone, this message might be displayed during packet
communication as well.)
Busy with packet
transmission
The packet communication is progress at the other end.
Out of service area/power
off
The other party’s phone is out of the service area or turned
off.
Set caller ID to ON Your caller ID is not notified. (when dialing “visualnet”, etc.)
Your call is being
forwarded
During forwarding
Redial using voice call The other party activates Call Forwarding Service but the
forwarding destination phone does not support videophone
calls.
Upper limit has been
exceeded
Connection failed
The upper limit for the plan with the limit function (Type
Limit, Family Wide Limit) is exceeded.
Please make your call
from the i-mode web page
You did not make a videophone call from the IP (Information
Provider) site among i-mode official sites (at dialing to
V-live).
Connection failed Redial after setting “Activate” of “Caller ID notification” to
“ON”.
pThis may appear in the case other than above.
If “Voice call auto redial” is set to “ON”, and a videophone call is not connected, a voice
call is automatically made.
pVideophone calls cannot be connected to the phones that do not support the
videophone function, or to the phones that are out of the service area or turned off even
if they are videophones. If you have set “Voice call auto redial” to “ON” and attempt to
dial a phone that does not have the videophone function, the number will be redialed
as a voice call. However, this operation might not work if you call the phone connected
with ISDN-synchronous 64K or the ISDN videophone that does not support 3G-324M
(as of October 2008), or if you dial the wrong number. Note that you could be charged
for the communication.
Auto-redialing
Function Menu while Entering Phone Number
Notify caller ID See page 58.
Prefix numbers See page 62.
Int’l dial assist See page 61.
Select image See page 77.
Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other party.
(See page 449.)
Add to phonebook See page 94.
Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone number
set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 146.
Chaku-moji See page 57.
53
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You (caller) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call. This
function is available for the mobile phones that can switch between a
voice call and a videophone call.
When the other party’s phone has a function to switch between the calls,
“ ” is displayed on your phone and you can switch from the voice
call to videophone call.
1During a voice callc()Change
pWhen you select an image
to be sent to the other
party, select “Select
image”. Go to step 2 of “Set
by Call” on page 77.
pWhen “Cancel” is selected,
the FOMA terminal cancels
switching and returns to the
voice call.
pWhile switching, the voice
guidance is played back.
Switching a Voice/Videophone Call
Switch from a Voice Call to a Videophone Call
When the other party’s phone has a function to switch between calls, you
can switch from a videophone call to a voice call by selecting “CHG to
voice call” from the Function menu.
1During a videophone calli()
CHG to voice callYES
pSelect “NO” on the
confirmation display to stop
switching and to resume
the videophone call.
pWhile switching, the voice
guidance is played back.
Switch from a Videophone Call to a Voice Call
Information
pYou can switch between a voice call and a videophone call repeatedly.
pWhen i-mode or packet communication is in progress, the communication is
disconnected and then the voice call is switched to the videophone call.
pWhen packet communication is in progress at the other end, the message to the
effect that the communication cannot be switched is displayed and the voice call
continues without switching to the videophone call.
pYou cannot switch from a voice call to a videophone call while “Multi calling” is
displayed during a call if you have signed up for Call Waiting Service.
pIt takes about five seconds to switch. Switching may take a longer time depending on
the radio wave conditions.
p
Depending on how the caller’s phone is working or on the radio wave conditions, switching
between a voice call and a videophone call may fail and the connection may be cut off.
pIf you switch between a voice call and a videophone call during a call, the call duration
and call cost are counted respectively for each call. You are not charged while
“Changing” is displayed.
pYou cannot switch between a videophone call and a voice call unless “Notify
switchable mode” on page 78 is set to “Indication ON” at the other end.
pWhen you switch from a videophone call to a voice call, Hands-free is deactivated.
54
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The FOMA terminal can store the other party’s phone number and date/
time you have dialed or received. You can call back to the other party.
■Redial
Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in
total, and the older record of dialing to the same phone number is deleted. However, the
dialing by PushTalk is retained in Redial separately from that of the voice call or
videophone call even if you dial to the same phone number.
■Dialed Calls
Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in
total, and up to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total as
well. The older records of dialing to the same phone number are also retained.
■Received Calls
Up to 30 records of incoming voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored
in total, and up to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total
as well. The older records coming from the same phone number are also retained.
pWhen a call is switched between a voice call and a videophone call, the call that is
dialed/received first is stored.
pWhen more than 30 calls are dialed, the older records are automatically deleted. Even
if you turn off the FOMA terminal, call records are not deleted.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 60 redial items, 120 dialed call records, and 120 received
call records for Number A and Number B are stored in total.
■Icons for Redial, Dialed Calls, and Received Calls
<Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls>
Using Call Records
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of voice call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of videophone call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of PushTalk
/※Dialed and received group calls/missed group calls of PushTalk
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of PushTalk via server’s
phonebook
Voice/Video messages are recorded on Record Message
Incoming calls of Remote Monitoring
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international videophone
call
Dialed calls of 64K data communication
※ The unchecked missed call icons are highlighted.
1
Press Vo.
mPhonebookDialed/recv. calls
Dialed calls
The list for call records is displayed.
pFor redial items of PushTalk, press Oo() to
show the Redial list of the group. Highlight a party and press p to make a
PushTalk call. If you do not highlight any party and press p, you can make a
group call.
pPress m( ) to display the Sent Address list.
pYou cannot show the Redial list even by pressing Vo from the horizontal
Stand-by display.
2Select a call record.
The detailed display for the call record is displayed.
pWhen the other party is stored in the Phonebook, the
phone number, name, and icon are displayed. If the
same phone number is stored with multiple names in
the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in the
search order (see page 96) are displayed.
/※Received calls/missed calls of 64K data communication
Dialed calls of packet communication
/※Received calls/missed calls of packet communication
Received calls of 64K data communication and packet
communication when no external device is connected
Received Chaku-moji message
Records with time difference corrected
Records for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
Use Redial/Dialed Calls
When Using Redial
When Using Dialed Calls
For Redial
For Redial
55
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1Press Co.
pYou can display the Received Call list also by
mPhonebookDialed/recv. callsReceived calls
All calls or Missed calls.
All calls . . . . . . All the records including missed calls
Missed calls. . . The records of missed calls only
In Dual Mode of 2in1, the number of missed calls for
Number A and Number B is displayed respectively.
(If unchecked missed calls are found, the number of them is displayed.)
pFor received call records of PushTalk, press Oo( ) to show the Received
Call list of the group with “★” mark added to the caller. Highlight a party and
press p to make a PushTalk call. If you do not highlight any party and press p,
you can make a group call.
pPress m( ) to display the Received Address list.
pYou cannot show the Received Call list even by pressing Co from the horizontal
Stand-by display.
2Select a received call record.
pThe other party’s phone number is displayed if it is
provided. If this caller is stored in the Phonebook, the
phone number, name, and icon are displayed.
If the same phone number is stored with multiple names
in the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in
search order (see page 96) are displayed. If there is a
call for packet communication, the sender’s access
point name (APN) is displayed.
When the other party’s phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID is
displayed.
pFor missed calls, the ring time is displayed on the right of the received date/time.
pWhen a Chaku-moji message is received, it is displayed.
+m-2-4
Use Received Calls
Received Call list
Detailed Received
Call display
Press d to make a voice call. You can make a voice call also by pressing
Oo( ) from the detailed display. Press l( ) to make a videophone call
and press p to make a PushTalk call.
To make a call to a displayed redial item, dialed call record, or
received call record
Information
pYou can make a voice call to the most recently dialed or received number by pressing
-d from the Stand-by display and then +No.
pWhen you make/receive a call with an additional number of Multi Number, the stored
name for the additional number is displayed below the phone number on the detailed
display. If you store a phone number for “Number setting” of “Multi number”, the
phone number is displayed as well.
pDialed call records of 64K data communication are not stored when you use a
Bluetooth device.
pEven if you make a voice call (or videophone call) to the phone number in a received
call record with a Chaku-moji message displayed, the received message is not sent.
pWhen a call comes in from a party who uses a dial-in phone number, a different
phone number might be displayed.
Function Menu while Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls is Displayed
Notify caller ID See page 58.
Prefix numbers See page 62.
Int’l dial assist See page 61.
Select image See page 77.
2in1 dial You can select a phone number to be notified to the other
party in Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 452)
Multi number You can select a phone number to notify the other party. (See
page 449)
Chaku-moji See page 57.
Search location You can connect to a site for “imadocokantan search”.
YES
56
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Add to phonebook See page 94.
pYou can store the phone number in the Phonebook also by
pressing m( ) from the detailed display. Go to
step 2 of “Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in
Phonebook” on page 95.
Add to PushTalk
Store in P-Talk PB YES
Store P-Talk group Select a group.
pWhen members who are not stored in the PushTalk
Phonebook are found, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to store them.
Enter a group name.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
Mail
Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 146.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 190.
Ring time
[Received Call list only]
You can display the ring time for missed calls. Even if you
have set “Missed calls display” of “Ring time” to “Not display”,
the missed calls which stopped ringing within the ring start
time and their ring times are displayed.
Character size You can switch the character size for Redial, Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, Sent Address, and Received Address. (See
“Dialed/recv. calls” on page 123)
Add desktop icon See page 31.
Sent address
[Redial/Dialed Calls only]
See page 175.
Received address
[Received Calls only]
See page 175.
Delete
When making a voice call or videophone call, you can send your text
message to tell the subject during calling.
pFor details on Chaku-moji or compatible models, refer to DOCOMO website or “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
pThe sending end is charged, but the receiving end is not charged.
A Chaku-moji message is displayed below a caller. The
Chaku-moji message is stored in Received Calls as well.
pThe Chaku-moji message is displayed only during ringing. It
is not displayed during a call.
pEven when a Chaku-moji message comes in within the ring
start time set by “Ring time”, it is received and recorded in
Received Calls.
pThe Chaku-moji message is displayed on the Private window when “Chaku-moji” of
“Called” on page 115 is set to “ON”.
pThe Chaku-moji message is not displayed during Lock All, Omakase Lock, or Personal
Data Lock. However, you can check the Chaku-moji message from Received Calls
after the lock is released.
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for redial items, dialed call records, or
received call records to be deletedl()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Store in P-Talk PB>
pYou cannot store from the call record for the party who is not stored in the Phonebook.
<Store P-Talk group>
pYou cannot store in a PushTalk group unless all the members are stored in the FOMA
terminal’s Phonebook.
<Delete this> <Delete selected> <Delete all>
pIf you execute “Delete all” from the Function menu of Redial/Dialed Calls, all records
in both Redial and Dialed Calls are deleted. Even if you execute “Delete this” or
“Delete selected” of Redial, the records are not deleted from Dialed Calls and they are
retained. To delete the dialed call records, delete them from the Function menu while
“Dialed calls” is displayed.
<Chaku-moji>
Using Chaku-moji
When a message is received
57
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can store up to 10 Chaku-moji messages in the Message list.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Create message
Highlight <Not stored> and press l()
Enter a message.
pTo edit a stored message, highlight it and press l().
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they are pictographs,
symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i
()
Chaku-moji
Do the following operations.
3Press d or Oo().
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
pThe Chaku-moji message being sent is displayed during dialing.
Store Messages
Make a Call with a Message
Create message You can create a Chaku-moji message just before dialing.
Enter a message.
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they
are pictographs, symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters.
pThe Chaku-moji message created using this function is not
stored in the Message list.
Select message From the Message list, you can select a stored message.
Select a message.
Sent messages From the Sent Message list, you can select a Chaku-moji
message to be sent. Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages only
are stored in the Sent Message list. If you send the same
Chaku-moji message, the older one is deleted. When the number
of sent Chaku-moji messages exceeds 10, the messages are
deleted from the oldest one.
Select a sent message.
Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages are stored in Sent Messages, and
you can check for the other party’s phone number and the date/time the
Chaku-moji messages were sent. Older messages sent to the same
phone number are also retained.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 10 records for Number A and Number B can be displayed
in total.
1mSet./ServiceNW services
Chaku-mojiSent messages
. . . . Chaku-moji message successfully sent
. . . . Chaku-moji message unsuccessfully sent
. . . . . . . Chaku-moji message for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pWhen the transmission result is not displayed, “ ” or “ ” is not
displayed.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result might not be
displayed correctly.
Information
pWhen a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other party’s phone, “Transmission
completed” is displayed, and you are charged a transmission fee.
pWhen a Chaku-moji message does not arrive at the other party’s phone such as when
the other party’s phone is not a Chaku-moji compatible mobile phone or the call is not
allowed by “Message disp. settings” at the receiving end, “Transmission failed” is
displayed. In this case, you are not charged a transmission fee.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result may not be
displayed at the sending end even if a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other
party’s phone. In this case, you are charged a transmission fee.
pEven if you make a call sending a Chaku-moji message, the Chaku-moji message is
not displayed and you are not charged a transmission fee (the call is not recorded in
Received Calls at the receiving end) when the other party’s phone is out of the service
area, turned off, during Public Mode (Drive Mode), or the ring time for Record
Message Setting is set to zero seconds. Also, the transmission result is not displayed
at the sending end.
pWhen a videophone call is not connected and automatically dialed as a voice call, the
Chaku-moji message is resent as well.
pChaku-moji does not support PushTalk.
pYou cannot send/receive Chaku-moji messages overseas.
Detailed Sent Message
58
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
2Select a sent message.
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the phone number, name, and icon are
displayed.
You can set how incoming Chaku-moji messages are displayed.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Message disp. settingsSelect an item.
Display all messages . . . . Displays Chaku-moji messages from all callers.
Numbers stored in PB . . .Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the callers
stored in the Phonebook.
Calls with callerID. . . . . . .Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the caller
notifying his/her phone number.
Hide all messages. . . . . . .Does not display Chaku-moji messages.
Function Menu while Detailed Sent Message is Displayed
Store You can store a sent Chaku-moji message in the Message list.
<Not stored>
pYou can store also by pressing l().
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Message Display Settings
Information
pWhen you set to “Numbers stored in PB”, you cannot receive Chaku-moji messages
from the callers stored in the Phonebook B in A Mode of 2in1 (and vice versa).
You can set how your FOMA terminal works for incoming Chaku-moji
messages for when “Setting when opened” is set to “Answer”.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Prefer Chaku-mojiON or OFF
ON . . . . Does not answer by opening the FOMA terminal during ringing, so you
can check a Chaku-moji message.
OFF . . . Answers by opening the FOMA terminal during ringing.
Each time you dial out, you can set whether to notify your caller ID.
1Enter a phone number
or
bring up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry,
redial item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i()Notify caller ID
Don’t notify or Notify caller
pTo release “Notify caller ID”, select “Cancel prefix”. Whether to notify or not
follows the setting for “Activate” of “Caller ID notification”.
Prefer Chaku-moji
<186/184>
Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for
Each Call
Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call
59
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can select whether to notify the other party of your phone number
also by entering “186”/“184” before the other party’s phone number.
1186→Destination phone numberd or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
1184→Destination phone numberd or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
Set “Notify/Not Notify” by Entering “186/184”
To notify your caller ID
Not to notify your caller ID
Information
pWhen you make a call and hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see
page 446), follow the steps of “To notify your caller ID” to enter “186” and redial.
pWhen you make a PushTalk call, “Activate” of “Caller ID notification” or “Notify caller
ID” is valid, but “notify/not notify” by adding “186”/ “184” is invalid.
pYou cannot set “Caller ID notification” while “ ” is displayed.
You can send touch-tone signals from your FOMA terminal to use
services such as reserving tickets, checking bank balance, etc.
You need to store a number string to be sent as a touch-tone signal in the
Pause Dial list. If you have inserted a pause (p), you can send a number
string breaking at the point where the pause is inserted.
1mSet./Service
Other settings
Pause dial
l
()
pWhen a number string is already stored, it is displayed.
pTo delete a stored pause dial, press i( ) and select “Delete”, then select
“YES”.
2Enter a number string.
pEnter the pause (p) by pressing and holding a for at least one second.
pYou can use only 0 through 9, s, a to enter a number string and the
pause (p).
pYou can enter up to 128 digits.
pYou cannot enter a pause (p) at the beginning and end of a number string, or
enter it consecutively.
1mSet./Service
Other settings
Pause dial
Oo
()
Enter a phone number
d
or
Oo
()
A voice call is made. Once the line is connected, a number string stored in Pause
Dial is displayed up to the first pause (p).
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can
retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo.
pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co
or from Redial by pressing Vo.
+m-8-4
<Pause Dial>
Sending Touch-tone Signals
Store Pause Dial
Send Pause Dial
60
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
2Check that the line is connectedd or Oo()
A number string up to the first pause (p) is sent, and a number string up to the next
pause (p) is displayed.
A number string up to the pause (p) is sent each time you press d or
Oo().
When you have finished sending the last number, the “Talking” display appears.
pTo send multiple pieces of a number string at a time, press and hold Vo for at
least one second, and select “Send at one time”.
WORLD CALL is the international call service available from DOCOMO
mobile phones.
When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have contracted to use
“WORLD CALL” (except those who have applied not to use it).
pYou can call about 240 countries and regions.
pThe WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly FOMA bill.
pThe application/monthly fee is free of charge.
pThe service is not available with some billing plans.
pContact “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual for inquiries
about WORLD CALL.
pWhen using international carriers other than DOCOMO, contact them.
pEven if the other party makes a call with the setting notifies his/her phone number, the
caller ID might not be notified, or might not be displayed correctly depending on the
caller’s network. In this case, you cannot call by using the Received Call.
Information
pDuring a call, you can send a number string also by displaying the Function menu of
the Pause Dial display.
pSome devices on the receiving end cannot receive signals.
pYou cannot send a number string with pauses during a videophone call.
<WORLD CALL>
Making International Calls
You can make international videophone calls to the other party who uses a specific 3G
mobile phone overseas. Press l( ) instead of d or Oo( ) in the steps
of “Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call”. (See page 60)
pFor the information about connectable countries and telecommunications carriers, refer
to the DOCOMO Global Service web page.
pImages sent from the other party may blur on your FOMA terminal or you may not be
able to connect, depending on the other party’s phone used for the international
videophone call.
1Enter numbers in order of 010→country/area code
→area code (city code)→destination phone number
d or Oo()
pYou can make an international call also by entering 009130→010
→country code/area code→area code (city code)→destination phone number.
p
When the area code (city code) begins with “0”, enter it except for the “0”. However,
include “0” when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy.
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
When you enter a phone number for dialing or storing it in the
Phonebook, press and hold 0 for at least one second to enter “+”. You
can use “+” to make international calls without entering an international
call access code.
pIf you set “Auto assist setting” of “Int’l dial assist” to “ON”, an international call access
code of “IDD prefix setting” is automatically entered.
10(for at least one second)
Enter numbers in order of country/area code
→area code (city code)→destination phone number
d or Oo()Dial
p
When the area code (city code) begins with “0”, enter it except for the “0”. However,
include “0” when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy.
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
pWhen you select “Dial with orig. No.”, you can make a call without adding an
international call access code.
About international videophone calls
Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call
Use “+” to Make an International Call
61
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can make a call adding a country/area code or international call
access code to a phone number. (Except for some countries and regions,
if the phone number starts with “0”, the “0” at the beginning is
automatically deleted.)
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i()Int’l dial assist
Select a country/area nameSelect a name
d or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
pWhen the beginning of the phone number is “+”, you can select only an
international call access code.
pWhen “Japan” is selected as a country/area name, the display for selecting a
name is not displayed.
You can set whether to replace “+” at the beginning of a phone number
with an international call access code for when you make an international
call from Japan.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
Auto assist settingON or OFF
Select a country/area nameSelect a name.
pWhen no country/area code or international call access code is stored, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to store it. Select “YES” and go to
step 2 of “Country/Area Code” on page 61 for a country/area code, and go to
step 2 of “IDD Prefix Setting” on page 61 for an international call access code.
International Dial Assist
<International Dial Assist>
Setting for International Calls
Auto Assist Setting
You can store up to 27 country/area codes to be added for making
international calls from overseas.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
Country/Area Code
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select a stored country/area name, you can check the stored contents.
2Enter a country/area name Enter a country/area code.
pYou can enter a country/area name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter a country/area code of up to 5 digits. But you cannot use #, :, and
+.
You can store up to three international call access codes to be added to
the beginning of a phone number for making an international call.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
IDD prefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select the stored item, you can check the stored contents.
2Enter a nameEnter an international call access code.
pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter an international call access code of up to 16 digits.
Country/Area Code
IDD Prefix Setting
Function Menu while Country/Area Code /IDD Prefix
Setting is Displayed
Edit Go to step 2 of “Country/Area Code” on page 61 for Country/Area
Code, and go to step 2 of “IDD Prefix Setting” on page 61 for IDD
Prefix Setting.
pYou can edit the item also by pressing l().
Delete this YES
62
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can store prefix numbers such as international call access codes or
“186”/“184” and add them to the phone number for dialing. You can store
up to seven prefix numbers.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingPrefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select a stored prefix, you can check the stored contents.
pTo delete a stored prefix, press i( ) and select “Delete this” or “Delete
all” then select “YES”. If you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
2Enter a nameEnter a prefix number.
pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter a prefix number of up to 16 digits. The keys for entry are limited to
0 through 9, s and a.
You can add a prefix number to the beginning of phone number when
you make a call.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pYou cannot delete the country/area code or international call access code set by
“Auto assist setting”.
<Prefix Setting>
Storing Numbers to be Added to the
Beginning of a Phone Number
Prefix Numbers
2i()Prefix numbersSelect a name
d or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk
call.
pFor making a PushTalk call, adding a prefix number such as “186” or “184” to the
beginning of the phone number is disabled.
You can set whether to regard the numbers after “:” of a phone number
as a sub-address to access the specified phones or data terminals.
pThe sub-address is a number assigned to identify each ISDN terminal connected to an
ISDN line. It is also used for selecting contents on “V-live”.
1mSet./ServiceOther settings
Sub-address settingON or OFF
You can set an alarm that sounds until a voice call, videophone call, or
PushTalk communication is reconnected after disconnected owing to
bad radio wave conditions.
1mSet./ServiceTalkReconnect signal
Select an alarm.
<Sub-address Setting>
Making a Call Specifying a Sub-address
Information
pEven if you set “Sub-address setting” to “ON”, “:” at the top of phone numbers and
“:” immediately after the prefix number or “186”/“184” are not regarded as
sub-address mark-off symbols.
+m-7-7
<Reconnect Signal>
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting
63
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The volume of the other party’s voice is turned up according to the
surrounding noise during a call. This setting is effective only when the
other party's voice is output from the earpiece.
1mSet./ServiceTalkShikkari TalkON or OFF
The noise sent to the other party is reduced according to the surrounding
noise during a call.
1mSet./ServiceTalkNoise reductionON or OFF
1During a voice callm()
When Yuttari Talk is activated, “ ” is displayed.
pPress m( ) again to return to the normal speed.
Information
p
The reconnectable time differs depending on the usage status and radio wave conditions.
An estimate is about 10 seconds and the call charge is applied also for that duration.
pWhile you are disconnected, no sound is transmitted to the other party.
<Shikkari Talk>
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make
Voice Clear
+m-7-6
<Noise Reduction>
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make
Voice Clear
<Yuttari Talk>
Slowing Down the Other Party’s Speaking
Speed
Information
pYuttari Talk is effective only during a current voice call. The speaking speed returns to
normal one when you end the call, switch calling parties during Multi calling, or switch
from the voice call to a videophone call.
When you switch to Hands-free, sound such as the other party’s voice is
audible over the speaker.
1During a call, dialing, or connectingd
When Hands-free is activated, “ ” is displayed.
pPress d again to deactivate Hands-free.
pThe sound volume during a Hands-free call follows the setting specified by
“Volume” (earpiece volume).
pYou can switch to Hands-free even during Manner Mode. Also, you will still hear
voice through the speaker even when you activate Manner Mode during a
Hands-free call.
You can make or receive voice calls from a Hands-free compatible device
such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option) or a car navigation system by
connecting with your FOMA terminal.
You can connect your FOMA terminal to a Hands-free compatible device
using two ways of connections as follows:
pConnect using a cable (USB connection):
To use/charge via the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option), you need to have the FOMA
In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 (option).
pConnect using Bluetooth (wireless):
To connect to a Bluetooth communication compatible Hands-free device, you need to
register and connect it to the FOMA terminal.
※For how to operate Hands-free compatible devices, refer to the respective instruction
manuals.
<Hands-free>
Switching to Hands-free
Information
pWhile the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you
cannot hear voice through the speaker even if you switch to Hands-free.
pKeep the FOMA terminal well away from your ear during a Hands-free call. Otherwise
you could affect or damage your hearing.
pTalk into the FOMA terminal within a distance of about 50 cm.
<In-Car Hands-free>
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices
64
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1When you receive a call, the ring tone
sounds and the Call/Charging indicator
flickers.
pTo vibrate the FOMA terminal for incoming calls, set
“Phone” or “Videophone” of “Vibrator” to other than
“OFF”.
pDuring ringing a videophone call, “Incoming V.phone” is
displayed. However, during ringing a voice call, nothing
is displayed in particular.
p“ ” is displayed at the upper left of the phone
number for incoming international calls.
Information
pTo connect using a cable (USB connection), set “USB mode setting” to
“Communication mode”.
p“ ” appears while you are talking or communicating using a USB Hands-free
compatible device.
p“ ” might appear while the FOMA terminal is connected to a USB Hands-free
compatible device, and “ ” while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD mode”,
depending on the Hands-free device connected.
pThe display or ring tone for incoming calls follows the settings of the FOMA terminal.
pWhen the sound is set to output from a Hands-free compatible device, the ring tone
sounds from that device even when Manner Mode is activated or “Ring volume” of the
FOMA terminal is set to “Silent”.
pThe receiving operation in Public Mode (Drive Mode) following the setting of “Public
(Drive) mode”.
pThe receiving operation while Record Message is activated follows the setting of
“Record message setting”.
pWhen the sound is set to output from the FOMA terminal, the operation for when the
FOMA terminal is closed during a call follows the setting of “Setting when closed”.
When the sound is set to output from a Hands-free device, the communication state
does not change regardless of “Setting when closed” even if you close the FOMA
terminal.
Receiving a Call/Videophone Call
Chaku-moji message
(See page 56)
2
Press d or Oo( ) to answer
the call.
Press d
or
Oo
()
to answer
the videophone call.
You can send the image through your camera to the
other party. When you press m( ) to answer the
videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other
party. (Substitute image answering)
pPress m during a videophone call to switch between
the image through your camera and substitute image
for sending to the other party.
3Press h to end the call after talking.
For Answering a Voice Call
For Answering a Videophone Call
Information
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a call, the FOMA terminal works in accordance
with the setting of “Setting when closed”. (See page 67)
65
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
pYou might hear beeps (in-call ring tone) during a call.
If you have signed up for any of Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, or Call
Forwarding Service and set “Arrival call act” to “Answer”, the beeps (in-call ring tone)
will sound for another incoming call, enabling you to do the following operations:
Voice Mail Service
. . . . Transfer the call to the Voice Mail Service Center. (See page 442)
Call Waiting Service
. . . . Put your current call on hold and answer the incoming call. (See page 442)
Call Forwarding Service
. . . . Transfer the call to the registered forwarding destination. (See page 445)
pYou can set “Reject unknown” not to accept calls from the phone numbers that are not
stored in the Phonebook.
pYou cannot answer a call in Horizontal Open Style. However, when the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can answer a call in
Horizontal Open Style.
<For Voice Calls>
pWhen “Answer setting” is set to “Any key answer”, the call is placed on hold if you
answer the call by pressing .< with the FOMA terminal closed. If you have set
“Setting when closed” to “No tone” or “End the call”, the other party hears nothing, and
if you have set “Setting when closed” to “Hold”, the call hold tone is played back. You
can start talking by opening the FOMA terminal.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated during a videophone call as
“Hands-free w/ V. phone” has been set to “ON”. (See page 76) However, Hands-free
is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of “Hands-free w/ V. phone”.
pEven if Call Forwarding Service is set to “Activate”, the call is not forwarded unless the
forwarding destination is a phone compatible with the videophone conforming to
3G-324M (see page 50). Check the phone you are forwarding the call to and then
activate the service. The videophone caller does not hear the guidance to the effect
that the call is forwarded. (The message to the effect that the call is to be forwarded
appears, depending on the receiver’s FOMA terminal.)
pIf a videophone call comes in from the phone number to be rejected by Nuisance Call
Blocking Service, the video guidance for Call Rejection is played back and the call is
disconnected.
pYou can send a Chara-den image to the other party instead of the image through your
camera. (See page 73)
Information
When a caller’s phone number is provided
If you store the caller’s name, phone number, and image in the Phonebook, the name,
phone number, and icon (or image) are displayed.
pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name
that comes first in the search order (see page 96) is displayed.
pThe phone number but not the name is displayed during Personal Data Lock.
pFor a forwarded call, the forwarder’s phone number is displayed below the caller. (It
might not be displayed in the case of some forwarders.)
pWhen you receive a call to an additional number of Multi Number, the stored name for
the additional number is displayed below the caller. (With a forwarded call, you can
press c( ) to switch to display of the forwarder.)
When a caller’s phone number is not provided
The reason for no caller ID is displayed. (See page 139)
When you have set “Notify switchable mode” to “Indication ON”, a caller
(the other party) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
pYou (receiving end) cannot switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
Display for incoming calls
Function Menu while a Call is Ringing
Call rejection You can disconnect the call without answering.
Call forwarding See page 445.
Voice mail See page 442.
Switched between a Call and a
Videophone Call by the Other Party
66
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1The display for switching to a
videophone call appears during a voice
call.
YES . . . Sends the image through your camera to the
caller.
NO . . . . Sends a pre-installed substitute image to the
caller.
pWhile switching, the message to that effect is displayed
and the voice guidance is played back.
When the caller (the other party) switches a videophone call to a voice
call, the message telling that the call is being switched appears, the voice
guidance is played back, and then the call is switched to a voice call.
You can set to start talking (Any key answer) or to stop the ring tone
(Quick silent) by pressing a key besides d, Oo, m (for videophone
call), or p (for PushTalk call) for when a call or PushTalk call comes in.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callAnswer setting
Select a key operation.
Any key answer
You can start talking by pressing any key shown below:
pWhen receiving a videophone call, you can start talking by pressing d, Oo or
m.
Switched from a Voice Call to Videophone Call by the
Other Party
Switched from a Videophone Call to Voice Call by the
Other Party
+m-5-8
<Answer Setting>
Setting Response of Key Operation for
Answering Incoming Calls
Voice call※1d, Oo, 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c※2, No,
<
PushTalk call d, Oo, p, 0 through 9, a, r, l, c, Bo, <
Quick silent
The following are the keys you can press to stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice
guidance:
When “Setting when opened” is set to “Keep ringing”, you can open the FOMA
terminal in Normal Style to stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance. Even if
you stop it, the other party still hears a ringback tone.
pAfter you stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance, you can start talking by
pressing d, Oo, m (for videophone call), or p (for PushTalk call).
OFF
You can start talking by pressing a key shown below:
※1 You can activate Any Key Answer or Quick Silent also by pressing l when
five record messages have already been recorded.
※2 While “ ” is displayed, you cannot start talking or stop the ring tone,
vibrator or voice guidance.
※3 During Key Lock, you can activate Quick Silent by pressing and holding < for
at least one second.
Voice call※1※30 through 9, a, s, r, m, c※2, No, <
Videophone call※30 through 9, a, s, r, c※2, No, <
PushTalk call 0 through 9, a, r, l, c, Bo, <
Voice call d, Oo
Videophone call d, Oo, m
PushTalk call d, Oo, p
Information
pWhile the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, you can
press the switch to start talking, regardless of “Answer setting”. (See page 420)
67
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
Setting when openedSelect an incoming type
Keep ringing or Answer
1mSet./ServiceTalkSetting when closed
Phone/VideophoneSelect an item.
No tone . . . . . . . The voice is muted. The hold tone does not sound. The setting is
completed.
Hold . . . . . . . . . .The other party hears the hold tone set for “Holding tone” of “Set
hold tone” while the FOMA terminal is closed.
End the call. . . . The call is finished. This is the same operation as pressing h
during a call. The setting is completed.
2Speaker ON or Speaker OFF
Speaker ON . . . . The hold tone sounds from the speaker.
Speaker OFF . . . The hold tone does not sound from the speaker.
<Setting when Opened>
Setting Response for when Opening
FOMA Terminal during Ringing
Information
pIf you receive a videophone call with “Answer” set, the still image set for “Substitute
image” of “Select image” is sent to the other party.
pYou cannot answer calls by opening the FOMA terminal in Horizontal Open Style
even when “Answer” is set.
+m-1-8
<Setting when Closed>
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA
Terminal during a Call
Set Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during a
Voice Call/Videophone Call
1mSet./ServiceTalkSetting when closed
PushTalkSpeaker call or End the call
1mSet./ServiceTalkVolumeUse Bo or </> to
adjust the earpiece volume.
Adjust the earpiece volume to Level 1 (minimum) through Level 6 (maximum).
pDuring a voice call, you can press Zo or </>, during a videophone call,
PushTalk call, or calling, you can press Bo or </> to adjust the volume, and
while entering phone number, you can press and hold Bo(for at least one
second) to adjust it. Press Bo or </> within two seconds to adjust it.
Set Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during
PushTalk
Information
pThis function is disabled when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(option) is connected. The communication state does not change even if you close the
FOMA terminal during a voice call or PushTalk communication. If you close the
FOMA terminal during a videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other
party with the line connected.
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a videophone call with “No tone” set, the
substitute image is sent to the other party. When “Hold” is set, the still image set for
“Holding” of “Select image” is sent.
pIf you set to “No tone” or “Hold”, “Holding” is displayed on the Private window when
the FOMA terminal is closed.
pEven when “End the call” has been set, the call does not end if you close your FOMA
terminal from Horizontal Open Style. “No tone” works for a voice call/videophone call,
and “Speaker call” works for a PushTalk call.
<Volume>
Adjusting Earpiece Volume
Information
pThe earpiece volume adjusted during a call is retained even after the call ends.
68
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can adjust the ring volume for incoming calls and mail.
1mSet./ServiceSoundRing volume
Select an incoming type
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while “Ring volume” is
set to “Silent”:
: You set “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”.
: You set “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
: You set “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”, and set “Mail”, “Chat mail”,
“MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
pIf you have set “Step”, the ring tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the
volume steps up every three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
pDuring ringing of a voice call or videophone call, you can adjust the ring volume
also by pressing Bo. However, you cannot adjust the ring volume in the
following cases:
・When “Ring volume” is set to “Step”
・When “Answer setting” is set to “Quick silent” and you stop the ring tone or
voice guidance
・During Manner Mode
・When a call is cut off within the ring start time specified by “Ring time”
pWhen you adjust the earpiece volume, the sound volume during a Hands-free call or
speaker call for PushTalk is also adjusted.
+m-5-0
<Ring Volume>
Adjusting Ring Volume
Information
1During ringingh
The FOMA terminal makes three rapid beeps for confirmation and the call is put on
answer-hold (On Hold).
pThe confirmation tone does not sound during Manner Mode or when “Ring
volume” is “Silent”.
pThe other party hears the hold tone set for “On hold tone” of “Set hold tone”. For
videophone calls, the still image set for “On hold” of “Select image” is displayed.
2Press d or Oo( ) to release hold and answer
the call.
pIf “Answer setting” is set to “Any key answer”, you can release hold of voice calls
by pressing any key of 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c, Mo, <, >,
l, or i.
pIf a videophone call is on hold, the image through your camera is sent to the other
party by pressing d or Oo( ) to release hold. If you press m()
to release hold, the substitute image is sent.
1During a callOo ()
pThe other party hears the hold tone set for “Holding tone” of “Set hold tone”. For
videophone calls, the still image set for “Holding” of “Select image” is displayed.
pYou can put the call on hold by closing the FOMA terminal during the call if you
have set “Setting when closed” to “Hold”.
<On Hold>
Putting a Call on Hold when You cannot
Answer Immediately
Information
pThe caller is charged for the call even during answer-hold (On Hold).
pIf you press -h during answer-hold (On Hold), the call will be disconnected.
<Holding>
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call
69
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
2Press d or Oo( ) to release hold and answer
the call.
pIf a videophone call is on hold, the image through your camera is sent to the other
party by pressing d or Oo( ) to release hold. If you press m()
to release hold, the substitute image is sent.
pIf you have set “Setting when closed” to “Hold” and put the call on hold by closing
the FOMA terminal, open the FOMA terminal or connect the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (option) to answer the call.
If you connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch to answer the
videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other party.
You can set the guidance the other party hears during on hold.
1mSet./ServiceTalkSet hold tone
On hold tone or Holding toneSelect a hold tone.
Tone 1/2. . .The caller hears the pre-installed guidance in Japanese.
RHAPSODY ON A THEME OF PAGANINI OP 43
. . . . . . . . . . .The caller hears the melody. You can set this for “Holding tone” only.
Voice announce
. . . . . . . . . . .The caller hears the sound recorded by “Voice announce”. If it has
not been recorded, this is not displayed.
pPress l( ) to play back a hold tone. Press r to end the demo
playback.
Information
pThe caller is charged for the call even while the call is on hold.
pIf a new call comes in while the current call is put on hold, the hold (Holding) is
released.
<Set Hold Tone>
Setting Hold Tone
Public Mode is an auto-answer service that puts importance on manners
in public spaces. Once you activate Public Mode, the guidance is played
back telling that you cannot answer the call as you are currently driving
or in a place (a train, bus, movie theater, etc.) where you should refrain
from answering the call. Then the call is disconnected.
pVoice Mail Service※1, Call Forwarding Service※1, and Caller ID Display Request
Service※2 are activated taking priority over Public Mode.
※1When you receive a voice call and the ring time is set to other than 0 seconds,
services are activated after Public Mode guidance.
※2When the other party notifies the phone number, Public Mode is activated.
pWhen a voice call comes in from the other party whose phone number is rejected by
Nuisance Call Blocking Service, Public Mode is not activated.
1Press and hold a for at least one second.
Public Mode is activated and “ ” is displayed.
When a call comes in, the guidance “The person you are calling is currently driving
or in an area where cell phone should not be used. Please try again later.” is played
back for incoming calls.
pTo deactivate Public Mode, perform the same operation. Then, Public Mode is
deactivated and “ ” disappears.
Using Public Mode
Using Public Mode (Drive Mode)
Information
pYou can activate/deactivate Public Mode only from the Stand-by display. You can
activate/deactivate Public Mode even when “ ” is displayed.
pYou can make calls as usual even during Public Mode.
pIf you make an emergency call at 110/119/118, Public Mode is released.
pWhen Public Mode and Manner Mode are activated simultaneously, Public Mode has
priority.
pIf a “User unset” call comes in while “Caller ID request” is set to “Activate”, the Caller
ID Request guidance is played back. (The Public Mode guidance is not played back.)
pYou cannot use this function during data communication.
70
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
・Even when a call comes in, the ring tone does not sound. The “Missed call” icon
appears on the display and the call is stored in “Received calls”. The guidance is
played back to the caller to the effect that you are currently driving or in an area where
mobile phones should not be used. Then the call is disconnected. When a PushTalk
call comes in, no answer is made and the message “Connection failed” appears on the
caller’s display. For the talk among three or more members, the message to the effect
that you are driving is conveyed to them.
However, when the power is off or “ ” is displayed, the caller hears the
out-of-service area guidance instead of the Public Mode guidance.
・The ring tone does not sound and the Call/Charging indicator does not flicker even
when mail or a message comes in. In addition, the set vibrator does not work.
・The ring tone for 64K data communication, alarm tone, charging confirmation tone, the
ring tone for i-αppli call and start tone for i-Widget do not sound, and a melody while an
i-αppli program is running is not played back.
・The tickers of i-Channel are not displayed.
・See page 69 for how Public Mode (Drive Mode) and each network service work for
incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated.
Public Mode (Power Off) is an auto-answer service that puts importance
on manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public Mode (Power Off),
the guidance is played back telling that you cannot answer the call as
you are currently in a place (hospital, airplane, around priority seat in a
train, etc.) where use is prohibited. Then the call is disconnected.
1Enter “:25251”d
Public Mode (Power Off) is set. (Nothing is changed on the Stand-by display.)
After setting Public Mode (Power Off) and turning off the power, the guidance “The
person you are calling is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please try
again later.” is played back for incoming calls.
pTo release Public Mode (Power Off), dial “:25250”.
pTo check the setting for Public Mode (Power Off), dial “:25259”.
When Public Mode (Drive Mode) is activated
Using Public Mode (Power Off)
The setting stays activated until you dial “:25250” to deactivate Public Mode (Power
Off). You cannot deactivate the setting just by turning on the power.
The guidance is played back to the caller telling that you are currently in a place where
you should turn off the power. Then the call is disconnected. When a PushTalk call
comes in, no answer is made and the message “Connection failed” appears on the
caller’s display. For the talk among three or more members, the message to the effect
that you do not participate is conveyed to them.
The Public Mode (Power Off) guidance is played back even when you are out of the
service area or out of reach of radio waves.
・See page 69 for how Public Mode (Power Off) and each network service work for
incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated.
When you could not answer calls (Missed calls), the “Notification icon”
appears on the Stand-by display. You can check Received Calls by
selecting the icon.
1OoOo()
pPress h or r to return
to the former display.
pWhen multiple icons are
found, use Mo to highlight
an icon and press
Oo().
pSee page 33 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
When Public Mode (Power Off) is activated
<Missed Calls>
If You could not Answer an Incoming Call
Notification icon
71
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
By activating Record Message, you can play back an answer message to
incoming calls and record callers’ voice/video messages when you
cannot answer them even if you have not signed up for Voice Mail
Service.
You can record up to five messages for voice calls and up to two
messages for videophone calls. Each message can be recorded for up to
20 seconds.
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Record message settingON or OFF
Select an answer message.
pPress l( ) to play back the answer message. Press r to end the
demo playback.
pWhen “Japanese 1”, “Japanese 2”, or “English” is set, a beep sounds after
playing back the answer message to the other party. If “Voice announce” is set,
the beep does not sound.
2Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter from “000” through “120” in three digits.
pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting
and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each.
pWhile Record Message is activated, “ ”∼“ ” (the number of recorded
messages for voice calls) and “ ”∼“ ” (the number of recorded messages
for videophone calls) are displayed.
+m-5-5
<Record Message Setting>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when
You cannot Answer a Call
Activate Record Message For videophone calls, the still image set for “Preparing” of
“Select image” is displayed on the other party’s display while
playing back the answer message, and the still image set for
“Record message” of “Select image” is displayed while
recording.
pTo answer a call while the answer message is being played
back or a voice/video message is being recorded, press
d or Oo().
For videophone calls, press d or Oo( ) to send
the image through your camera, or press m( ) to
send a substitute image.
You can answer a call also by pressing the switch on the
Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option). For videophone calls, the image
through your camera is sent to the other party.
Incoming calls when Record Message Setting is set to “ON”
Incoming Call Playing back the
answer message
Recording a voice/
video message
The ring time
elapses
Displaying an icon on the
desktop (See page 30)
Information
pRecord Message does not work when “ ” is displayed.
pWhen Public Mode (Drive Mode) and Record Message are simultaneously activated,
the former has priority and the latter does not work.
pThe priority order of answer messages is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook entry” →
“Group setting” → “Record message setting”.
pIf “Voice announce” selected as an answer message is deleted, the answer message
will be set to “Japanese 1”.
72
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Even if a call comes in while Record Message is not activated, you can
record the caller’s voice/video message just for that incoming call.
1During ringingl() or >
Manner Mode is also activated.
The caller will hear the answer message and then can leave you a voice/video
message.
pDuring Key Lock, press and hold > for at least one second.
pRecord Message does not work when five messages for voice calls and two
messages for videophone calls have already been recorded or when a PushTalk
call comes in. Only Manner Mode is set when you operate by pressing >.
pWhen “Side keys guard” is set to “ON”, you cannot activate Record Message or
Manner Mode by pressing > with the FOMA terminal closed.
pWhen Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service is set at the same time as
Record Message, the priority depends on the ring time set for Voice Mail Service or
Call Forwarding Service. To give Record Message priority, set the ring time for
Record Message Setting shorter than that for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding
Service. Even when you do this, Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service works
if there are already five record messages for voice calls and two record messages for
videophone calls.
pYou cannot receive a call from a third party while a voice/video message is being
recorded. The third party will hear the busy tone.
<Quick Record Message>
Recording a Message when You cannot
Answer Incoming Call
Information
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase msg.
Select a record message or voice
memo.
A beep sounds and playback starts.
pOn the Record Message list, recorded items are indicated by “★”.
pIt is played back at the volume set for “Volume” (earpiece volume).
pWhen playback ends, a double-beep sounds and the message “Playing” is
cleared from the display.
pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during
playback. When a caller’s phone number is provided, it is displayed. If the caller is
stored in the Phonebook, his/her name is also displayed.
However, the name is not displayed and the phone number only is displayed in
the following cases:
・When you play back a record message from the caller stored as secret data in
Normal Mode
・When you play back a record message for Number A in B Mode (or vice versa)
while using 2in1
pIf the caller’s phone number is displayed during playback, you can make a voice
call to that phone number by pressing d. Press l( ) to make a
videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk call.
From the vertical Stand-by display, press > to play back the latest record message.
When record messages are not recorded, a voice memo is played back.
+m-5-5
<Play/Erase Messages>
<Play/Erase Videophone Messages>
Playing/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice
Memo/Videophone Record Messages/
Movie Memos
Play Back/Erase Record Messages/a Voice Memo
Record Message list
To play back using .>
73
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Each time you press > during playback, messages are played back in the following
order: the next new record message → the oldest record message → a voice memo.
Press Oo() or r.
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase VP msg.
Select a videophone record message
or movie memo.
pOn the Videophone Record Message list, recorded
items are indicated by “★”.
pIt is played back at the same volume of the playback
sound of i-motion movies.
pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during
playback.
From the vertical Stand-by display, press and hold > for at least one second to play
back the latest videophone record message. When videophone record messages are
not recorded, the latest movie memo is played back.
Press Oo() or r.
To skip to next message
To cancel playback midway
Play Back/Erase Videophone Record Messages/Movie Memos
Videophone Record
Message list
To play back using .>
To cancel playback midway
Function Menu of the Record Message List/Videophone
Record Message List
Play You can play back the message.
Erase this YES
pYou can erase the message/memo also by pressing
i( ) during playback.
You can set up for sending a Chara-den image to the other party.
pSee page 363 for Chara-den images.
You can set a Chara-den image to be sent to the other party for making a
videophone call.
1Chara-den display/Chara-den listl()
Enter the destination phone number and press l( ) to make a
videophone call.
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can
retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo.
pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co
or from Redial by pressing Vo.
Erase rec. msg. You can erase all record messages from the Record Message
list, and can erase all videophone record messages from the
Videophone Record Message list.
YES
Erase movie memo
[Videophone Record
Message list only]
You can erase all movie memos.
YES
Erase all You can erase all record messages and a voice memo from the
Record Message list, and can erase all videophone record
messages and movie memos from the Videophone Record
Message list.
YES
Using Chara-den
Set by Call
Information
pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
“Setting by call” → “Setting for Phonebook entry” →“Group setting” → “Select image”.
74
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can set a Chara-den image for “Substitute image” of “Select image”.
1Chara-den display/Chara-den list/Chara-den Recording
displayi()Substitute image
pFrom the Chara-den list, you can set it also by pressing m().
You can perform settings for a Chara-den call. These settings are
effective only for during a videophone call.
1During a Chara-den calli()
Chara-den setupDo the following operations.
Substitute Image
Chara-den Setup
Switch Chara-den Select a Chara-den image.
pIf you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to
Whole Action Mode.
Action list You can display the list for actions that you can operate.
pHighlight an action and press Oo( ) to execute the
action. Press l( ) to check the details of the action.
pYou can display the Action list also by pressing a.
Change action You can switch the action mode between Whole Action Mode
( ) and Parts Action Mode ( ).
pYou can switch modes also by pressing l.
SW substitute img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to
the still image set for “Pre-installed” of “Select image”.
SW org. subst. img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to
the still image set for “Original” of “Select image”.
At videophone
start-up
Whole Action
Mode
You can switch images to be sent to the other party from through the
inside camera to through the outside camera.
1During a videophone calll()
pPress l( ) again to switch to the image through the inside camera.
pThe setting here is effective only for the current videophone call.
You can switch images to be sent to the other party from the image
through your camera to the still image or Chara-den image set as the
substitute image.
See page 363 for Chara-den.
1During a videophone callm()
The substitute image is sent to the other party.
“ ” is displayed while the still substitute image is being sent, and “ ” is
displayed if you have set a Chara-den image as a substitute image (during a
Chara-den call).
pPress m( ) again to switch from the substitute image to the image
through your camera.
Useful Functions for Videophone Calls
Switching Cameras
At videophone start-up Inside camera
Send Substitute Images
Information
pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
“Setting by call” → “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group setting” → “Select image”.
Note that “Setting for Phonebook entry” and “Group setting” are disabled when a
videophone call comes in without notifying the caller ID.
pEven when you make a videophone call sending a substitute image, you are charged
for the digital communication.
75
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can switch the display locations of the received image and the sent
image.
1During a videophone call, press c().
pEach time you press
c( ), the displays
switch.
Switch Image Display Positions
+c
c
+cc
You can adjust the magnification for the camera image to be sent to the
other party.
1During a videophone call
Use No to adjust the magnification.
pThe former zoom setting returns when the videophone call ends.
Zoom
At videophone start-up Wide
Function Menu during Videophone Call
CHG to voice call See page 53.
Talk on BT/Phone You can set whether to communicate through the FOMA
terminal or a Bluetooth device. (See page 426)
Send DTMF tone/
DTMF tone OFF
During a Chara-den call, you can switch to the DTMF
Transmission Mode that enables you to enter the data from
the numeric keys and to send DTMF (touch-tone signals). You
can operate it only during a Chara-den call.
p“Send DTMF tone” is displayed when the mode is not DTMF
Transmission Mode and “DTMF tone OFF” is displayed in
DTMF Transmission Mode.
pIn DTMF Transmission Mode, you cannot operate the action
of Chara-den images.
pThe DTMF tone may not be received depending on the
device of a receiving end.
V.phone settings
Visual preference See page 76.
Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the camera image to be sent
to other party to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
At videophone
start-up
0
76
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
White balance You can adjust the colors of the camera image to be sent to
the other party, to make the colors look more natural.
Select an item.
Fine weather . . . . . For talking outdoors in fine weather
Cloudy weather . . . For talking in cloudy weather or in the
shade
Automatic. . . . . . . . For adjusting white balance
automatically
Light bulb . . . . . . . . For talking under incandescent light
Color mode set You can switch the color tone of the camera image to be sent
to the other party.
Select a color tone.
Night mode You can lengthen the camera’s exposure time to make the
camera image to be sent clear in a dark place.
ON or OFF
Focus You can set the focus for the outside camera during a
videophone call.
Close-up or Landscape
pThe focus for the inside camera is fixed to “Portrait” (suitable
mode to shoot portraits), so you cannot change the setting.
Chara-den setup See page 74.
Backlight You can select whether to light the display constantly or light
for about 15 seconds after an operation.
Constant light or 15 seconds light
LCD AI See page 117.
Own number You can display your phone number.
Key guide You can display the guide of key operation during a
videophone call.
At videophone
start-up
Automatic
At videophone
start-up
Normal
At videophone
start-up
OFF
At videophone
start-up
Landscape
You can set whether to switch to Hands-free automatically for when a
videophone call starts.
1mSet./ServiceVideophone
Hands-free w/ V. phoneON or OFF
pSee page 63 for the operation while Hands-free is activated and how to switch to
Hands-free.
You can set the quality of both the received image and sent image on the
display.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneVisual preference
Select an image quality.
p“Prefer motion spd” is effective for moving images. When there is little motion, the
quality becomes better if you set to “Prefer img qual”.
pIf you operate from the Function menu during a videophone call, the setting is
effective only for the current videophone call.
<Hands-free with Videophone>
Setting Hands-free Videophone
<Visual Preference>
Setting Image Quality for Videophone
Calls
Information
pIf the radio wave conditions weaken during a videophone call, the image may appear
like a mosaic.
77
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can set an image to be sent to the other party.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneSelect image
Select an item.
On hold . . . . . Sets an image for during answer-hold (On hold).
Holding . . . . . Sets an image for while a call is on hold (Holding).
Substitute image
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a substitute image (still image or Chara-den) for when the
camera is off.
Record message
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an image while recording a record message.
Preparing . . . Sets an image for while playing back an answer message.
Movie memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an image for while recording a movie memo.
2Select an image.
Pre-installed . . . For sending a pre-installed still image to the other party.
Original . . . . . . . For sending an appropriate message with a still image stored
using “Set display”.
Chara-den. . . . . For sending a Chara-den image selected by “Substitute image”
from the Function menu while a Chara-den image is displayed.
(See page 74)
(Displayed only when “Substitute image” has been selected in
step 1.)
pPress l( ) to play back a demo to check the still image or Chara-den
image.
pTo change the setting of “Original” or “Chara-den”, press i( ), select
“Change setting”, then select a still image or Chara-den image. If you have
selected “Original”, select a still image after selecting a folder. See “Set display”
for settable still images.
<Select Image>
Changing Image Displays for Videophone
Calls
Information
pEven if you delete the still image selected from “Original”, that still image is displayed
to the other party. To change, set by “Change setting” or “Set display”.
You can set an image to be sent to the other party for making a
videophone call.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i()Select imageMe or Chara-den
pThe setting is completed when you select “Me”.
pTo cancel the setting by call, select “Release”. The setting is completed.
3Select a Chara-den image.
If a videophone call cannot be connected, it will be automatically redialed
as a voice call.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneVoice call auto redial
ON or OFF
Set by Call
<Voice Call Auto Redial>
Redialing as a Voice Call when a
Videophone Call cannot be Connected
Information
pThe charges for calls once switched to voice calls are billed at the rates for the voice
calls.
pVoice Call Auto Redial does not work when a videophone call cannot be connected
such as when the line is busy or the other party’s phone is in Public Mode (Drive
Mode). However, Voice Call Auto Redial works when you make a videophone call to a
phone that does not support the videophone function.
78
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can let the other party know that your FOMA terminal can switch
between a voice call and a videophone call.
This function is set to “Indication ON” at the time of contract. When
“Notify switchable mode” is set to “Indication ON”, the caller can switch
between the videophone call and voice call.
pYou cannot operate “Notify switchable mode” when you are out of the service area or
radio waves do not reach, or during a call.
1mSet./ServiceVideophone
Notify switchable modeDo the following operations.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
V-phone while packetSelect an item.
V-phone priority
. . . .Shows the Videophone Call Receiving display. When you answer the
videophone call, packet communication is disconnected.
Packet downld priority
. . . .Rejects the videophone call and continues the communication.
V-phone answerphone
. . . .Connects the incoming videophone call to the Voice Mail Service Center.
Call forwarding
. . . .Forwards the incoming videophone call to the forwarding destination.
<Notify Switchable Mode>
Setting for Switching a Voice/Videophone
Call during a Call
Indication ON YESOK
Indication OFF YESOK
Check indication You can check the setting of the function.
OK
<Videophone while Packet>
Setting Answer Method of a Videophone
Call during i-mode
You can operate your FOMA terminal from an external device such as
your personal computer for making or receiving videophone calls by
connecting them using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option).
To use this function, you need to install a videophone application
program on a dedicated external device or personal computer, and
further, you need to prepare equipment (commercial item) such as an
earphone/microphone or USB compatible web camera.
pFor operating environments for a videophone application program and how to set or
operate it, refer to the instruction manual or other literature for an external device.
pYou can use “ドコモテレビ電話ソフト (DOCOMO Videophone Software)” for the
application program that supports this function.
Download it from the DOCOMO Videophone Software website.
(For details such as operating environment for the personal computers, refer to the
support web page.)
http://videophonesoft.nttdocomo.co.jp/ (In Japanese only)
Information
pIf you have not signed up for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, “Packet
downld priority” works even if you set to “V-phone answerphone” or “Call forwarding”.
Using Videophone Calls by Interfacing to
External Devices
Information
pYou cannot make a videophone call from the external device during a voice call.
pWhen you have signed up for Call Waiting Service, an incoming videophone call from
an external device during a voice call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls.
The same applies for an incoming voice call, videophone call, and 64K data
communication during a videophone call from an external device.
79
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can use the inside camera of the FOMA terminal as a monitoring
camera to observe the remote location from a phone that has the
videophone function based on 3G-324M. While “Remote monitoring” is
set to “ON”, the FOMA terminal automatically starts Remote Monitoring
when it receives a videophone call from a phone number stored as
“Other ID” of “Remote monitoring”.
(The FOMA terminal needs to be set to Normal Style.)
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneRemote monitoring
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
pTo release Remote Monitoring, select “Set”, then select “OFF”.
2Other ID<Not recorded>
Enter a phone number.
pTo change, select the stored phone number.
pYou can store up to five phone numbers that can enter
up to 26 digits by using numerals, #, :, or +.
pTo return to the setting display for Remote Monitoring, press r from the Other
ID list after storing phone number.
3Ring timeEnter a ring time (seconds).
pYou can enter the time from “003” through “120” in three digits until Remote
Monitoring starts after receiving a videophone call.
pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting
and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each.
4SetON
pWhen receiving videophone calls from the phone numbers stored as “Other ID”,
the FOMA terminal automatically answers to start Remote Monitoring after the
ring time elapses.
p“ ” is displayed while this function is set to “ON”.
pYou cannot set to “ON” in Manner Mode.
<Remote Monitoring>
Checking inside of a Room when You are
Out
Other ID list 1Make a videophone call from a stored phone number.
After the ring time set for “Remote monitoring” elapses, Remote Monitoring
automatically starts.
pThe image through the receiving end’s camera appears on the display and the
sound comes out of the speaker.
pYou cannot set Voice-only Remote Monitoring.
pMake a videophone call notifying your caller ID. If the caller ID is not notified,
Remote Monitoring will not start and the call will be handled as an ordinary
incoming videophone call.
2Remote Monitoring ends when the calling end or
receiving end presses h.
Press d or Oo( ) before the FOMA terminal answers a videophone call
automatically. If you press m( ), the videophone call starts sending the
substitute image to the other party.
pWhen a remote monitoring call comes in, “Setting when opened” is disabled.
pIf you press h when a remote monitoring call comes in, the call will be cut and
Remote Monitoring will not start.
Function Menu of the Other ID List
Look-up address You can call up a phone number in the Phonebook, Dialed Calls,
or Received Calls to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number.
Dialed calls
. . . Highlight a phone number and press Oo().
Received calls
. . . Highlight a phone number and press Oo().
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
Information
<Delete this> <Delete all>
p
If you delete all phone numbers stored as “Other ID”, “Remote monitoring” is set to “OFF”.
Perform Remote Monitoring
For answering a videophone call without starting Remote
Monitoring at the receiving end
80
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
pYou may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as the
nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA terminal to give a
remarkable nuisance and misdeed to the public.
Information
pWhen your FOMA terminal is used for the receiving end, an image through the caller’s
camera appears, and sound comes out. (You cannot switch to a substitute image.)
pRemote Monitoring does not start during Manner Mode and Public Mode (Drive
Mode). However, it starts even during Lock All.
pWhen Remote Monitoring is set to “ON” and a videophone call comes in from the
phone number set as “Other ID”, Remote Monitoring starts after the set ring time,
even when “Ring time”, “Auto answer setting”, or “Record message setting” is set and
regardless of their ring times.
pWhen Remote Monitoring is not performed, it is recorded in Received Calls as a
missed videophone call.
pIf the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected when a
remote monitoring call comes in, the ring tone will sound from both the earphone and
the speaker, even when “Headset usage setting” is set to “Headset only”.
pThe ring tone for Remote Monitoring sounds. (You cannot change the ring tone for
Remote Monitoring.)
The ring tone sounds at the volume set for “Videophone” of “Ring volume”, but at
“Level 2” if you have set “Step”, “Level 1” or below. The color is “Gradation”, and its
lighting pattern is “Standard”, regardless of the Incoming Illumination setting.
pYou cannot put incoming remote monitoring calls on answer-hold (On Hold).
pIf you set both Call Forwarding Service and Remote Monitoring, and give priority to
Remote Monitoring, set its ring time shorter than that for Call Forwarding Service.
p
To use Call Forwarding Service for Remote Monitoring, store the phone number of
dialing side as “Other ID” and set a 3G-324M videophone as the forwarding destination.
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you
when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
PushTalk is a service that enables you to enjoy communicating with
multiple persons (from two to up to five persons including yourself). You
can talk with the other party by pressing the PushTalk key respectively.
※Each time of pressing the PushTalk key (talking), the talker is charged a
communication fee.
pFor details on PushTalk or compatible models, refer to DOCOMO website or “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
■PushTalkPlus※
This service enables you to have a PushTalk call with up to 20 persons including you.
You can use the shared Phonebook on the network, and can check the members for
their status, thus PushTalk becomes more useful.
※You need to subscribe separately.
pFor details such as how to operate, refer to the booklet which is supplied at
subscription.
1Enter the other party’s phone number
p
When you are dialing, a confirmation tone for starting a
PushTalk call sounds for a few seconds, and then the
same ringback tone as the voice (videophone) call
sounds.
pYou can make a group call to multiple persons using
the PushTalk Phonebook. (See page 84 and page 85)
PushTalk
Making a PushTalk Call
81
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
2When the other party answers, talk
while pressing p.
When the other party answers, a confirmation tone for
starting communication sounds.
p“ ” blinks during dialing and lights during
communication.
pWhen you get the talker’s right, the talker’s right
obtained tone sounds. The other party hears your voice
only while you are pressing p and having the talker’s
right. When you release p, the talker’s right is
released, and a confirmation tone sounds.
pYou cannot get the talker’s right and an error tone
sounds even if you press p when another member has
it.
pPress l( ) or press i( ) and select “Add member” to add a
member. Go to step 1 on page 82.
3Press h to end the communication after talking.
A tone to notify the disconnection of communication sounds at the other end.
pWhen the call you made is a group call, the PushTalk communication itself
continues even if you press h, and the icon indicating that you are not
participating appears on each member’s display and a confirmation tone sounds.
However, when all the members exit, the PushTalk communication itself ends.
Information
pThe talker is charged a communication fee from when he/she presses .p and the
talker’s right obtained tone sounds.
pYou cannot make emergency calls at 110/119/118 from PushTalk.
pThe duration you can talk per talker’s right is limited. The talker’s right release notice
tone sounds before the limited time arrives, and the talker’s right is released. In
addition, the PushTalk communication itself ends when no one gets the talker’s right
in a certain period of time.
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free w/
PushTalk”. (See page 87) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode
regardless of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk”.
pThe FOMA terminal works according to “Setting when closed” if you close it during
communication. You can set also by pressing +i( ) and selecting “Set. when
closed”. (See page 67)
You can use the PushTalk Phonebook or Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls to
communicate with multiple members.
While making or receiving a PushTalk group call, the group name and the members in
the group are displayed. Press No to confirm other members. When a call is received
with the other party’s phone number not provided, “User unset” is displayed.
Use Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls to make a PushTalk call while the PushTalk
communication continues among other members.
pIf the PushTalk communication has already been finished, your call is dialed as a new
PushTalk call.
pWhether to notify others of your phone number when you make PushTalk calls follows
the setting for “Activate” of “Caller ID notification” (see page 48). However, when you
set “Notify caller ID” from the Function menu for dialing, or when “Notify”/“Not notify” is
displayed in the detailed Redial/Dialed Call/Received Call display, each of those
settings will work.
pWhen you make a PushTalk call with your phone number notified, your phone
number as well as all members’ phone numbers are notified to all members including
added members. When you make a PushTalk call without notifying your phone
number, “User unset” appears in the caller’s and member’s fields on the displays of all
the members including added members. Your phone number is very important
information, so take the utmost care to notify others of it.
pIf you make a PushTalk call during i-mode communication, the i-mode communication
is disconnected.
pYou cannot use PushTalk by Number B of 2in1.
Making/Receiving a PushTalk group call
Re-participating or participating midway in PushTalk
communication
Information
82
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
■Display while dialing/communicating
The phone number of the member who has the talker’s
right is displayed, and the state of the talker’s right is
displayed in color of the round icon at the upper left.
When the name of that member, phone number, and
image are stored in the Phonebook, his/her name and
image are displayed. However, when you cannot receive
a member’s information correctly, “?” is displayed.
When the FOMA terminal is closed, the phone number
(name) of the member who has the talker’s right is
displayed on the Private window.
The state of members is shown by icons during dialing or communicating.
(Characters other than shown below might appear.)
※
Displayed only for the PushTalk communication among three or more members.
The number of times you have got the talker’s right is the total of the number of “ ”
and the number shown in “ ”. When 999 times are exceeded, the counting is reset
to 0.
During group
communication
Color of the
round icon at the
upper left
State of the talker’s rights
Blue Calling
Green You can get the talker’s right.
Blinking in green You have the talker’s right.
Blinking in yellow Another member has the talker’s right.
Blinking in green
and red
The talker’s right will be released automatically in a few seconds
because it has long been retained (A release notice tone
sounds).
Icon State of members
※Calling
Has participated in the PushTalk call.
※Does not answer, has ended the PushTalk call, out of the service
area, or the power is off.
※Has activated Public Mode (Drive Mode).
You can make a PushTalk call to another member during PushTalk
communication and add that member to the communication.
You can add a person to the members by accessing the PushTalk
Phonebook, Phonebook, or Dialed Calls/Received Calls, or by directly
entering a phone number.
You can add up to five members (including yourself), and can repeat
adding up to that number.
pMembers can be added from the calling end only.
pYou can add even the members who use the PushTalk compatible models which do
not have this function.
pIf you have already made a call to four members, you cannot add a new member
though you can call up a member who has exited the call again.
pThe added members are not stored in Redial/Dialed Calls.
1During PushTalk communicationl()
Do the following operations.
Adding a Member during a PushTalk Call
View PushTalk PB You can call up a PushTalk Phonebook entry to make a PushTalk
call. (See page 85)
Instead of pressing p, press l( ) to call.
pPress c to switch between the PushTalk Phonebook list and
PushTalk Group list.
View phonebook You can call up a Phonebook entry to make a PushTalk call.
Call up a Phonebook entryHighlight a phone number
and press l().
Direct input You can enter a phone number to make a PushTalk call.
Enter a phone numberl()
View call records You can call up Dialed Calls/Received Calls to make a PushTalk
call.
Dialed calls or Received callsSelect a record
Select a phone numberl()
Information
pThe caller cannot add members if he/she uses a PushTalk compatible model which
does not have this function.
83
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1When a PushTalk call comes in,
“PushTalk call” is displayed, the ring
tone sounds, and the Call/Charging
indicator flickers.
p“PushTalk group call” is displayed for an incoming
group call.
pTo reject a call, press i( ) during ringing and
select “Call rejection”. You can reject the call also by
pressing h.
2Press p to answer a PushTalk call
Talk while pressing p.
pYou can answer also by pressing d or Oo()
instead of p. You can answer also by pressing p with
the FOMA terminal closed.
pWhen you get talker’s right, the talker’s right obtained
tone is played back. The other party hears your voice
only while you are pressing p and having the talker’s
right. When you release p, the talker’s right is released
and a confirmation tone sounds.
pYou cannot get the talker’s right and an error tone
sounds, even if you press p when another member
has it.
p“Setting when opened” and “Record message setting” become invalid.
pFor a member who uses a PushTalk compatible model which does not have this
function, the members added during PushTalk communication are not shown and a
confirmation tone does not sound.
Receiving a PushTalk Call
Information
3Press h to end the communication after talking.
A tone for confirming the end of communication sounds at the other end.
pWhen the call you received is a group call, the PushTalk communication itself
continues even if you press h, and the icon indicating that you are not
participating appears on each member’s display and a confirmation tone sounds.
However, when all the members exit, the PushTalk communication itself ends.
Information
pThe talker is charged a communication fee from when he/she presses .p and the
talker’s right obtained tone sounds.
pThe duration you can talk per talker’s right is limited. The talker’s right release notice
tone sounds before the limited time arrives, and the talker’s right is released. In
addition, the PushTalk communication itself ends when no one gets the talker’s right
in a certain period of time.
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free w/
PushTalk”. (See page 87) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode
regardless of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk”.
pThe FOMA terminal works according to “Setting when closed” if you close it during
communication. You can set also by pressing +i( ) and selecting “Set. when
closed”. (See page 67)
pYou cannot use “On hold” or “Holding” function for PushTalk.
pA PushTalk call that comes in during a voice call, a PushTalk call that comes in during
Public Mode (Drive Mode), and a voice call (when “PushTalk arrival act” is set to other
than “Answer”), a videophone call, data communication, or a PushTalk call that
comes in during PushTalk communication are recorded as missed calls in Received
Calls.
pA PushTalk call that comes in during a videophone call or during data communication
does not work and is not recorded in Received Calls.
pAfter you finish PushTalk communication or when you cannot answer to a PushTalk
call, you can use a received call record to make a PushTalk call and to re-participate
or participate midway in the communication so long as the PushTalk communication
continues among other members. If the PushTalk communication among other
members has already been finished, your call is dialed as a new PushTalk call.
pWhen a caller adds members during PushTalk communication, the added members
are not stored in Received Calls.
pSee page 87 for how to respond to the PushTalk call during i-mode communication.
pWhen the caller is defined as the one to be rejected, the call is rejected. The setting of
call rejection applies to the setting for both voice calls and videophone calls.
84
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
From the items stored in a FOMA terminal’s Phonebook entry, you need
to store a name (reading) and a phone number in the PushTalk
Phonebook. You can store up to 1,000 entries in the PushTalk
Phonebook.
1pm()
Do the following operations.
pYou can store also by selecting <New>.
pIf you store multiple phone numbers from a Phonebook
entry, the phone number previously stored in the
PushTalk Phonebook is overwritten.
pYou cannot show the PushTalk Phonebook list even by pressing p from the
horizontal Stand-by display.
pWhen a PushTalk call comes in during Lock All or Omakase Lock, “ ” appears
after the lock is released.
<Store in PushTalk Phonebook>
Adding Entries to PushTalk Phonebook
Information
PushTalk
Phonebook list
View phonebook You can access an entry already stored in the FOMA terminal’s
Phonebook and store it in the PushTalk Phonebook.
Call up a Phonebook entrySelect a phone numberYES
Direct input You can store the entry in the PushTalk Phonebook after storing it
in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
PhoneSelect a storing method.
New. . . Go to step 2 on page 90.
Add . . . Go to step 3 of “Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail
Address in Phonebook” on page 95.
pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook
entry, press l( ) and select the phone number you
want to store in the PushTalk Phonebook. The “★” mark is
added to the phone number that has already been stored in the
PushTalk Phonebook.
You can store PushTalk Phonebook entries in groups. You can store up
to 19 members per group and create up to 10 groups.
1PushTalk Phonebook list
c()
pPress c( ) to show the PushTalk Phonebook
list.
2Select a groupm
()
Put a check mark for members to be stored
l()
pYou can store also by
selecting <Edit group
members> from the Group
Member list.
View call records You can access a dialed call record or received call record to
store it in the PushTalk Phonebook. You cannot store in the
PushTalk Phonebook from the dialed/received call record of the
party who is not stored in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
Dialed calls or Received callsSelect a record
Select a phone numberYES
Information
pIn the PushTalk Phonebook, you cannot store the Phonebook entries set to B by
Phonebook 2in1 Setting.
Store in Group
PushTalk Group list
Group Member list Group Member
Selection display
Function Menu of the Group Member Selection Display
Members to store You can display only members applied with a check mark.
pPress Oo( ) to store the members to the group.
85
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can make a group call to up to four members using the PushTalk
Phonebook or PushTalk group.
1PushTalk Phonebook list
Put a check mark for members you
want to make a call to
p or l()
pPress c( ) to show the PushTalk Group list.
pWhen you do not check any members, the call is made
to the highlighted member.
1PushTalk Group listSelect a group.
pSelect a group and press p or l() to make a
call to all the members in the group.
pPress c( ) to show the PushTalk Phonebook
list.
2Put a check mark for members you
want to make a call to
p or l()
pWhen you do not check any members, the call is made
to the highlighted member.
Search Select a search method.
Reading? . . .See page 96.
Group? . . . . .See page 96.
Select a member.
You can display the Group Member Selection display with the
searched members selected.
Making a Call from PushTalk Phonebook
PushTalk
Phonebook list
Make a Call from PushTalk Group
PushTalk Group list
Group Member list
Information
pWhen five or more members are stored in a group, you cannot make a call to all the
members by selecting the group.
Function Menu of the PushTalk Phonebook List/PushTalk
Group List/Group Member List
Members to call When the PushTalk Phonebook list or Group Member list is
displayed, you can display the checked members only.
pPress p or Oo( ) to make a PushTalk call.
pPress i( ) to select “Notify caller ID” and then you can
select whether to notify your phone number. When “Cancel
prefix” is selected, the FOMA terminal works according to the
setting by “Caller ID notification”.
Search PushTalk
PB
[Phonebook list only]
Select a search method.
Reading? . . . See page 96.
Group? . . . . . See page 96.
Select a member.
You can display the PushTalk Phonebook list with the searched
members selected.
Store in P-Talk PB
[Phonebook list only]
See page 84.
DEL from P-Talk PB
[Phonebook list only]
See page 86.
Edit group members
[Group list/Member
list]
You can edit the members in the group.
Go to step 2 on page 84.
Edit group name
[Group list only]
Enter a group name.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
86
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
DEL from PT group
[Group list only]
See page 86.
DEL group
members
[Member list only]
See page 86.
Sound setting See page 87.
Vibration setting See page 87.
Auto answer set. See page 87.
Ring time setting See page 87.
Hands-Free See page 87.
Set. when closed See page 67.
i-mode arrival act See page 87.
P-Talk arrival act See page 87.
Network connection You can connect to the network to use PushTalkPlus. This is
available only when you have singed up for PushTalkPlus.
(See page 80)
1PushTalk Phonebook listi()
DEL from P-Talk PBDo the following operations.
1PushTalk Group listi()DEL from PT group
YES
1Group Member listi()DEL group members
Do the following operations.
<Delete from PushTalk Phonebook>
Deleting PushTalk Phonebook Entries
Delete this Select a deleting method.
DEL from P-Talk PB
. . . .Deletes an entry in the PushTalk Phonebook only. Does not
delete the entry in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
DEL from all PBs
. . . .Deletes an entry in both the PushTalk Phonebook and
FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pThe FOMA terminal’s Phonebook entries are not deleted.
Delete from PushTalk Group
Delete Group Members
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pEven when you delete PushTalk groups or group members, the PushTalk Phonebook
entries and FOMA terminal’s Phonebook entries are not deleted.
87
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1mSet./ServicePushTalk
Do the following operations.
Setting for Making/Receiving a PushTalk
Call
Auto answer setting
Select an item.
ON . . . . . Automatically answers immediately after receiving
regardless of “Ring time setting”.
OFF . . . . Does not answer automatically.
Ring time setting Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter two digits from “01” through “60”.
p“Disconnected” is displayed at the other end after the ring time
has elapsed.
Hands-free w/
PushTalk
You can set whether to hear the other party’s voice from the
speaker or from the earpiece for when PushTalk communication
starts.
ON or OFF
pSee page 63 for how the FOMA terminal works while
Hands-free is activated and how to switch to Hands-free during
communication.
PushTalk arrival act Select an item.
Voice mail. . . . . . . . Connects an incoming voice call to the
Voice Mail Service Center.
Call forwarding . . . Forwards an incoming voice call to the
forwarding destination.
Call rejection . . . . . Rejects an incoming voice call and does not
answer.
Answer . . . . . . . . . . Shows the Voice Call Receiving display.
Sound setting You can set a pattern for the confirmation tones which sound
during PushTalk communication.
Select a pattern.
Vibration setting You can set whether to be notified by vibration for when you try to
get the talker’s right or when a member’s state changes to
“Connected”.
ON or OFF
You can set whether to show the PushTalk Call Receiving display for
when a PushTalk call comes in during i-mode communication.
1i
i-mode settings
i-mode arrival act
Select an item.
PushTalk preferred . . . Ends i-mode communication and brings up the PushTalk
Call Receiving display.
i-mode preferred . . . . . Rejects receiving a PushTalk call and continues i-mode
communication. The call is not recorded in Received
Calls.
Information
<Auto answer setting>
pWhen you set to “ON”, calls are automatically answered even when the FOMA
terminal is closed regardless of “Setting when closed”.
pWhen you set to “ON”, calls are automatically answered after switching to Hands-free
regardless of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk”. However, the FOMA terminal works
according to the setting of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk” if you open the FOMA terminal
after you answer a call with the FOMA terminal closed.
pWhen you set to “ON”, the ring tone, vibrator, Call/Charging indicator, and backlight
do not work. Calls are not automatically answered during Manner Mode.
<PushTalk arrival act>
pIf you press -h for an incoming voice call while “Answer” is set, the Call Receiving
display appears after you finish the PushTalk communication, and then you can
answer the voice call. To continue the PushTalk communication, press +i()
and select “Call rejection”, “Call forwarding”, or “Voice mail”.
<Sound setting>
pIn the “Simple” mode, some confirmation tones (talking right obtained tone, etc.)
during PushTalk communication become silent.
i-mode Arrival Act
88
89
Phonebook
Phonebook Available for the FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Storing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . .<Add to Phonebook> 90
Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Group Setting> 95
Dialing from Phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . <Search Phonebook> 96
Editing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Edit Phonebook> 100
Deleting Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Delete Data> 101
Checking Phonebook Storage Status . . . . <No. of Phonebook> 101
Making a Call with a Few Keys Operation . . . . . <2-touch Dial> 101
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice . . . . . . . . <Voice Dial> 102
90
Phonebook
You can use two types of Phonebook, namely the Phonebook in the
FOMA terminal itself, and the Phonebook on the UIM.
Phonebook Available for the FOMA
Terminal
FOMA terminal UIM
Number of entries 1,000 entries 50 entries
Contents of Phonebook
Basic item
Name (Reading) ○○
Group 19 groups 10 groups
Phone number 4 phone numbers 1 phone number
Phone number icon ○—
Mail address 3 mail addresses 1 mail address
Mail address icon ○—
Address ○—
Location information ○—
Birthday ○—
Memo ○—
Image 100 images —
Memory No. From 000 to 999 —
Setting item
Ring tone ○
—
Vibrator ○
Illumination ○
Picture ○
Chara-den 100 Chara-den
images
Mail ring tone ○
Mail vibrator ○
Mail illumination ○
Answer message ○
Restrictions
Restrict dialing
○—
Call rejection
Call acceptance
Call forwarding
Voice mail
Secret code ○—
Storage in Secret Mode or
Secret Data Only ○—
○: Can be stored. —: Cannot be stored.
pYou can set your UIM into another FOMA terminal and use the UIM Phonebook
entries.
You can store Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal (Phone) or on the
UIM.
1Xo(for at least one second)Phone or UIM
The Edit Name display appears. Go to step 2 and enter a name.
pYou cannot show the registration display for the Phonebook entries even by
pressing and holding Xo for at least one second from the horizontal Stand-by
display.
2Do the following
operations.
pYou can press No to switch
between the “Basic item” tab and
“Settings” tab for the FOMA
terminal’s Phonebook.
Contents of Group
Name ○○
Ring tone
○—
Vibrator
Illumination
Picture
Chara-den
Mail ring tone
Mail vibrator
Mail illumination
Answer message
<Add to Phonebook>
Storing Phonebook Entries
FOMA terminal UIM
For the FOMA
terminal
For the UIM
91
Phonebook
Name You can enter the name of the person or company in kanji,
hiragana, katakana, alphabetic characters, or numerals.
Enter a name.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32
half-pitch characters. You can enter pictographs and symbols
as well.
pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 10 full-pitch characters/21
half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana
characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 10
characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or
half-pitch characters.
Reading You can enter the reading in half-pitch katakana, alphabetic
characters, or numerals.
Enter a reading.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 32 half-pitch
characters. You can enter half-pitch symbols as well.
pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 12 full-pitch characters/25
half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana
characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 12
characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or
half-pitch characters.
pIf the displayed reading is acceptable, you do not need to edit it.
However, depending on the characters entered for names or
entering method, they are not reflected in the reading.
p
If you enter “
ゎ
(reduced size)” or “
ヮ
(reduced size)” for a name,
“
ワ
(half-pitch, regular size)” (for the FOMA terminal) and “
ワ
(regular size)” (for the UIM) are displayed in the reading field.
Group In the FOMA terminal, 19 groups are available. On the UIM, 10
groups are available.
Select a group.
pWhen the storage is completed with no group selected, the
Phonebook entry is stored in “No setting”.
Phone number You can store up to four phone numbers per Phonebook entry in
the FOMA terminal. You can set an icon for each phone number
to categorize mobile phone numbers, office phone numbers, and
so on.
You can store only one phone number per Phonebook entry on
the UIM.
Enter a phone number.
pEnter from the city code for the phone numbers.
pYou can enter up to 26 digits. However, you can enter up to 20
digits for blue UIMs.
pPress and hold a for at least one second to insert a pause (p)
into the phone number you store. However, you cannot insert
the pause (p) to the beginning of phone number or insert it
consecutively. The pause (p) inserted to the end of phone
number is not stored.
pIf you insert “:” in the middle of a phone number, you cannot
make a call. However, the phone number is recorded in Redial
or Dialed Calls.
pYou can store the phone number which includes “#” such as
that for information service as well.
Select an icon.
pIf you have stored a phone number in the FOMA terminal,
another “ <Phone number>” will appear in the
Add-to-Phonebook display. To store another phone number,
select “ <Phone number>”.
92
Phonebook
Mail address You can store up to three mail addresses per Phonebook entry in
the FOMA terminal. You can set an icon for each mail address to
categorize mobile phone addresses, home addresses, and so on.
You can store only one mail address per Phonebook entry on the
UIM.
Enter a mail address.
pThe mail address can consist of up to 50 half-pitch alphabets,
numerals or symbol characters.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”,
store the phone number only.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can set a secret code as well. (See
page 100)
Select an icon.
pIf you have stored a mail address in the FOMA terminal, another
“ <Mail address>” will appear in the Add-to-Phonebook
display. To store another mail address, select “ <Mail
address>”.
Address Enter a ZIP codeEnter a postal address.
pYou can enter up to 7 digits for the zip code.
pYou can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100 half-pitch characters for the
postal address. Further, you can enter pictographs as well.
pYou cannot enter “〒” or “-” (hyphen) in the zip code.
Location
information
Select an item.
By position loc.
. . . .Measures the current location (see page 328) and store the
location information. After checking the location information,
press Oo().
From loc. history
. . . .Select a piece of location information from Location History
(see page 337) and store it.
Attach from image
. . . .Stores the location information from an image. Select a
folder, then the image.
From own number
. . . .Stores the location information from “Own number”. Enter
your Terminal Security Code and press Oo().
pTo delete the stored location information, select “Delete location
info”.
Birthday Enter a birthday
pYou can enter the birthday from January 1, 1800 through
December 31, 2099.
pYou can check the birthday from Schedule. (See page 408)
Memo Enter a memo.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Further, you can enter pictographs as well.
93
Phonebook
Image The stored still image is displayed when you call up the
Phonebook entry.
Select an item.
Select image . . . You can store a still image in Data Box.
Shoot image. . . . You can store the shot still image.
Perform step 2 through step 3 on page 239.
pTo release the stored still image, select “Release image”.
pThe size of a still image you can store is Stand-by (480 x 854) or
smaller and up to 300 Kbytes in JPEG format or GIF format.
pIf you store a still image larger than 72 x 54 dots, it is displayed
shrunk on the detailed Phonebook display.
pIf you store a still image larger than 240 x 180 dots, it is
displayed shrunk on the Call Receiving display.
pWhen “Disp. PH-book image” is set to “ON”, the stored still
image is displayed for an incoming call. However, when another
image is stored in the “Picture” field, that image is preferentially
displayed for the incoming call.
Memory No. Enter a memory number.
pEnter a three-digit number of “000” through “999”.
pThe lowest empty memory number “010” through “999” is
entered in advance.
If “010” through “999” are all occupied, the lowest empty
memory number from “000” through “009” is entered.
Ring tone You can set a ring tone for when a voice call or videophone call
comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone
Go to step 2 on page 106.
pTo release the stored ring tone, select “Release ring tone”.
Vibrator You can set a vibration pattern for when a voice call or
videophone call comes in from the person stored in the
Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern.
pTo release the stored vibrator, select “Release vibrator”.
Illumination You can set an illumination pattern for when a voice call or
videophone call comes in from the person stored in the
Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect an item.
pTo release the stored illumination, select “Release illumination”.
Picture You can set an image to be displayed for when a call comes in
from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select pictureSelect a type of imageSelect a folder
Select an image.
pTo release the stored image, select “Release picture”.
Chara-den The stored Chara-den image is displayed as a substitute image
for videophone calls with the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select Chara-denSelect a Chara-den image.
pTo release the stored Chara-den image, select “Release
Chara-den”.
Mail ring tone You can set a ring tone for when a mail message comes in from
the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone
Go to step 2 on page 106.
pTo release the stored mail ring tone, select “Release ring tone”.
Mail vibrator You can set a vibration pattern for when a mail message comes
in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern.
pTo release the stored mail vibrator, select “Release vibrator”.
Mail illumination You can set an illumination pattern for when a mail message
comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect an item.
pTo release the stored mail illumination, select “Release
illumination”.
94
Phonebook
3Press l().
pIf you have not entered any name, “ ” is not displayed and you cannot
store the entry.
When the low battery alarm sounds
The Phonebook entry you are editing is saved automatically. The confirmation display
appears asking whether to resume editing when you continue editing after charging the
battery or when you operate step 1 on page 90 and select the storage location for the
interrupted Phonebook entry after changing to a charged battery.
Recall . . . You can resume editing the Phonebook entry.
New . . . . You can edit a new Phonebook entry. In this case, the interrupted data is
retained. If you execute “Add to phonebook” after storing the new Phonebook
entry, the confirmation display appears again.
pOnly the most recently interrupted entry is retained.
pIf you resume editing the data but then cancel editing without storing it, that data will be
abandoned. Once you recall the data, be sure to store it.
If you receive a call or mail
You can respond it leaving the edited data as it is, thanks to the Multitask function.
To return to the Phonebook Edit display, press and hold x for at least one second to
switch the menu. You can return to the Phonebook Edit display also by ending the call or
mail function.
Answer
message
You can set an answer message for Record Message by
Phonebook entry.
Select answer messageSelect an answer message.
pTo release the stored answer message, select “Release answer
message”.
Phonebook entries while editing
You can store the displayed or selected phone number, mail address,
and still image in the FOMA terminal’s or UIM’s Phonebook.
1Call up/Select an item to be storedi()
Add to phonebook
pTo store the address of the sender (or of another recipient of simultaneous mail)
of the received mail or the destination address of the sent mail into the
Phonebook, select “Store address”.
When the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are
found or the multiple destination addresses are found, the display for selecting an
address appears. Use Bo to select the mail address or phone number you want
to store.
pTo store a still image in the Phonebook, select “Phonebook” from “Set display”.
pWhen “Add to phonebook” is displayed on the Scanned Code Result display for
Bar Code Reader, select “Add to phonebook”; then other information in the
scanned code besides the phone number or mail address is entered into each
field.
Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail
Address in Phonebook
Operation Storable items
While a phone number is entered Phone number
While a redial item, dialed call record, or received call
record is displayed Phone number
While Sent Address or Received Address is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While a site or screen memo is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While the text of Message R/F or mail is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While the data scanned by Bar Code Reader is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While a ToruCa file is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While your current location is displayed Location information
While the location history is displayed Location information/
Phone number/Mail address
While a registered LCS client is displayed Name/Phone number
While the Still Image list or a still image is displayed Still image
95
Phonebook
2Phone or UIMSelect a storing method.
New . . . Go to step 2 on page 90.
Add . . . Adds data to the existing Phonebook entry. When storing data on the
UIM, “Overwrite” is displayed.
3Select a search methodSearch the Phonebook
Select a Phonebook entry to be storedOo()
The phone number or mail address is entered automatically.
pSee step 2 on page 90 to edit other items in the Phonebook entry.
pWhen you store into the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, you can remain the
original entry and store a new entry into a different location by changing the
memory number.
4l()YES
pIf you store the entry in the UIM Phonebook, select “Overwrite” to overwrite the
original entry, or select “Add” to store it as a new entry.
Information
pThe Phonebook entry does not store the information of “Notify caller ID” included in
Redial/Dialed Calls. To set Caller ID Notification, add “186”/“184” to the phone
number and store it.
pCharacters that cannot be stored may be replaced by spaces or deleted, and then
stored.
pYou may not be able to store the information from some sites into the Phonebook.
You can utilize the Phonebook by sorting the entries by group such as
“Company” or “Friend”, or by your interest such as “Baseball” or
“Ceramic art”. You can set a ring tone, vibration pattern, or illumination
by group.
1mPhonebookGroup setting
pThe groups on the UIM are indicated by “ ”.
pTo reset the group names and respective settings by group, which have already
been stored, press i( ), select “Reset group”, and then select “YES”.
2Highlight a group and press l()
Select an item to be setSet the contents.
pWhen you select “ Group name”, enter a group name. You can store up to 10
full-pitch/21 half-pitch characters. However, you can store only up to 10
characters (regardless of full-pitch or half-pitch characters) when you enter both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters for a UIM group name.
pSee step 2 on page 90 for the operations of the other items. However, you cannot
set for groups on the UIM.
pSelect a stored group, or press i( ) and select “Check setting” to check
its settings. However, you cannot check the settings of the groups on the UIM.
3Press l().
<Group Setting>
Setting Groups
96
Phonebook
You can retrieve stored Phonebook entries by eight search methods.
1XoDo the following operations.
pThe display for the same search method as the
previous one appears once you have carried out a
search. Press r to show the Search Phonebook
display.
pYou cannot show the Search Phonebook display even
by pressing Xo from the horizontal Stand-by display.
<Search Phonebook>
Dialing from Phonebooks
Search Phonebook
display
All? You can show all Phonebook entries.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 97)
Reading? You can enter the reading of the other party’s name from the first
character and search. You do not need to enter the full reading.
Enter a part of the readingBo
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 97)
Group? You can show Phonebook entries stored in a specified group.
Select a group.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 97)
pIf you press i( ) on the Group list, the Function menu
for “Group setting” is displayed.
Memory No.?
[FOMA terminal only]
You can search for the entry by the memory number assigned
when it was stored in the Phonebook.
Enter the memory number.
pEnter from “000” through “999” in three digits.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 97)
pFrom the Stand-by display, you can press d and then press
Bo to display the Memory No. Dial display. From there you can
make a voice call by entering the memory number of the phone
number.
Name? You can enter the other party’s name from the first character and
search. You do not need to enter the full name.
Enter a part of the nameBo
2Select an entryd or Oo()
pWhen the entry contains multiple phone numbers, or when you searched by “Mail
address?”, press Mo from the detailed display to select a phone number.
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l( ) or PushTalk call by
pressing p.
The Phonebook entries are searched in the order of readings you entered for storing, as
follows:
“Space at the beginning of the reading”
→
“Japanese syllabary (
ア、イ、ウ、エ、オ、... ン
)”
→
“Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z)”
→
“Numerals (0 through 9)”
→
“Symbols”
→
“No reading”.
For “All?” and “Reading?”, searching is done in the following order:
“Japanese syllabary (
ア、イ、ウ、エ、オ、... ン
)”
→
“Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z)”
→
“Space
at the beginning of the reading”
→
“Numerals (0 through 9)”
→
“Symbols”
→
“No reading”.
※The Memory No. Search searches in the order of the memory numbers.
Phone number? You can enter a part of the other party’s phone number and
search. You can search for the entry even from the middle of
phone number.
Enter a part of the phone numberBo
pYou can display the Phonebook list also by entering a part of
the phone number from the Stand-by display or the “Talking”
display, and pressing Bo.
Mail address?
You can enter a part of the other party’s mail address and search.
You can search for the entry even from the middle of mail address.
Enter a part of the mail addressBo
2-touch dial?
[FOMA terminal only]
You can show the list of Phonebook entries in memory number
000 through 009.
pPhonebook entries not yet stored or being set with secret are
displayed as ＜−−−＞.
Information
pIn a search method other than “Group?” and “2-touch dial?”, enter nothing and press
+Bo; then you can search all through the Phonebook.
p
When no Phonebook entry is found that matches the condition you entered by
“Reading?” or “Memory No.?”, the entry that is the closest to the condition is displayed.
Search order
97
Phonebook
When you search from “All?”, “Reading?”, “Group?”, or
“Memory No.?”, the tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook
list. With “All?” and “Reading?”, the entries are sorted by every
column of reading, with “Memory No.?” by every 100 of the
memory number, and with “Group?” by every group.
Press No to display the Phonebook entries in the tab at left or
right. However, when there are 12 or more Phonebook entries
in a tab, pressing m(), c(), or <> brings up the previous or next
page.
pAfter you search by “Reading?”, you can move the cursor to the “ア” through “ワ”, “英”,
and “他” tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press
the same numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to display the “ナ” tab. Each time you press 5, the cursor
moves to the top of “ニ” “ヌ” and so on.
pAfter you search by “Group?”, you can move the cursor to the top of each column in the
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press the same
numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the top of the “ナ” column. Each time you
press 5, the cursor moves to the top of “ニ” “ヌ” and so on.
pAfter you search by “Memory No.?”, you can move the cursor to the “000~” to “900~”
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the “500~” tab.
pYou can make a voice call to the phone number stored for the name highlighted on the
Phonebook list, by pressing d. Also, press l( ) to make a videophone call
and press p to make a PushTalk call. When multiple phone numbers are stored for
the name, the one stored first will be dialed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored on the UIM, “ ” is displayed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored with i-concier information, “ ” is displayed.
p“ ” appears for the Phonebook entries set to A by Phonebook 2in1 Setting, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook entries set to B, and “ ” appears for the Phonebook
entries set to common data. (Only in Dual Mode)
pWhen you refer to the Phonebook from a GPS compatible i-αppli program, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook entries which contain the location information.
About Phonebook List
Phonebook list
Use No to highlight a tab, then the detailed contents are displayed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored
on the UIM, “ ” is displayed on
the memory number field.
pWhen Notify Caller ID is set to
“Notify caller”, “ ” appears,
and when set to “Don’t notify”,
“ ” appears.
pUnder the still image, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook
entries set to A by Phonebook
2in1 Setting, “ ” appears for
the Phonebook entries set to B,
and “ ” appears for the
Phonebook entries set to
common data. (Only in Dual
Mode)
pWhen a Phonebook entry contains the setting for Multi Number or Chaku-moji, the set
contents are displayed in the Item list/Phone Number display.
Item list
The first stored phone number, mail address, postal address, birthday, and memo are
displayed. When i-concier information is stored, a postal address, URL, and memo
obtained from i-concier are displayed instead of a postal address, birthday, and memo.
Phone number
Mail address
pWhen you select the item, you can compose an i-mode mail message with that mail
address entered into the address field.
Personal information
pWhen you select a postal address and select “YES”, you can start a GPS compatible
i-αppli program set by “Select map” of “GPS settings”, and a map is displayed. When
you highlight a postal address and press l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select the location information, the Function menu of the location information
appears. (See page 329)
pWhen you select a memo or still image, the full display appears.
About the detailed display
Detailed Phonebook
display (Item list)
Group
Reading
Name
Memory No.
Still image
Notify caller ID
98
Phonebook
i-concier information
pWhen you select a postal address and select “YES”, you can start a GPS compatible
i-αppli program set by “Select map” of “GPS settings”, and a map is displayed. When
you highlight a postal address and press l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select an URL and select “i-mode” or “Full Browser”, and then select “YES”,
you can display a site or an Internet web page. When you highlight an URL and press
l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select a memo, the full display appears.
Settings
pWhen you select each item, a demo is played back.
Press Oo() or r to end the demo.
Function Menu of the Phonebook List
New You can store a new Phonebook entry.
Go to step 1 on page 90.
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the
Phonebook entry attached.
Go to step 2 on page 146.
Search location You can connect to a site for “imadocokantan search”.
YES
Move/copy
Copy to microSD See page 372.
Connect to Center See page 140.
Sort You can change the display order.
Select a type of order.
pYou can sort Phonebook entries in reverse order by
selecting “Ascending” or “Descending”.
pYou cannot sort on the Phonebook list with tabs
displayed.
Character size You can switch character sizes for the Phonebook and on
the displays within “Phonebook settings”, etc.
(See “Phonebook” on page 123)
Send Ir/BT/iCtrans
Send Ir data
Send phonebook See page 386.
Send all phonebook See page 387.
transmission
Send phonebook See page 388.
Send all phonebook See page 389.
Send to Bluetooth
Send phonebook You can send the Phonebook entry using Bluetooth
communication.
Select a Bluetooth device to be sentYES
pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to search.
pSee page 424 for registering and connecting Bluetooth
devices.
Send all phonebook You can send all Phonebook entries using Bluetooth
communication.
Select a Bluetooth device to be sent
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pWhen “Session number setting” of “Bluetooth settings” is
set to “ON”, enter your Terminal Security Code and then
a session number.
pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to search.
pSee page 424 for registering and connecting Bluetooth
devices.
Delete data See page 101.
Set secret/Release secret You can activate/deactivate Secret for the Phonebook
entry.
pIf you select “Set secret” in ordinary mode (not in “Secret
mode” or “Secret data only”), enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Information
<Send to Bluetooth>
pYou cannot send Phonebook entries from the UIM.
pSee page 421 for the Bluetooth function.
99
Phonebook
Function Menu of the Detailed Phonebook Display
Notify caller ID See page 48.
Prefix numbers See page 62.
Int’l dial assist See page 61.
Select image See page 77.
2in1 dial You can select a phone number to notify the other party in
Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 452)
Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other
party. (See page 449)
Chaku-moji See page 57.
Search location See page 98.
Edit data
Edit phonebook Go to step 1 on page 100.
Sort phone number/
Sort mail address
Select a phone number or mail address
Use Bo to change the orderOo()
pFrom the detailed display, press No to highlight an
item to be sorted. The items can be selected in the
Function menu differ depending on the highlighted
item.
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above
steps.
l()
Store in P-Talk PB You can store the phone number in the PushTalk
Phonebook.
Move/copy
Copy to UIM See page 419.
Copy to microSD See page 372.
Copy to phone See page 419.
Connect to Center See page 140.
Copy item
Copy name You can copy the name of Phonebook entry.
Copy phone number/
Copy mail add./
Copy address/
Copy location info/
Copy birthday/
Copy memo/Copy URL
You can copy each item of Phonebook entry.
pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight an item
to be copied. The items can be selected in the Function
menu differ depending on the highlighted item.
Mail
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the
mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 146.
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the
Phonebook entry attached.
Go to step 2 on page 146.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 190.
Character size You can switch the character size for the Phonebook and
on the displays within “Phonebook settings”, etc.
(See “Phonebook” on page 123)
Restrictions See page 137.
100
Phonebook
Secret code You need to add the recipient’s secret code when sending
i-mode mail to anyone who has registered a secret code.
Once you set the secret code for the mail address in the
Phonebook entry, it will be added automatically whenever
you send mail to that address.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSet code
pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight a phone
number or mail address to be set with a secret code.
pTo check the secret code, select “Check code”.
pTo release the secret code, select “Release code”.
Enter a four-digit secret codeYES
pIn the Function menu, “Secret code” is indicated by “★”,
after it is set.
pEnter a four-digit number for secret code. You cannot set
“0000”.
Add desktop icon See page 31.
Send Ir/BT/iCtrans
Send Ir data
Send phonebook See page 386.
Send all phonebook See page 387.
transmission
Send phonebook See page 388.
Send all phonebook See page 389.
Send to Bluetooth
Send phonebook See page 98.
Send all phonebook See page 98.
Delete data See page 101.
1Detailed Phonebook displaym()
Select an item to be editedEdit the contents.
pSee step 2 on page 90 for how to edit the Phonebook entry.
pEven if you edit the Phonebook entry in the FOMA terminal (Phone), you can
remain the original contents in the original location and store the edited contents
in the different location by changing the memory number.
2l()YES
pIf you edited the UIM Phonebook entry, select “Overwrite” to overwrite the original
contents, or “Add” to save the contents as a new entry.
Set secret/Release secret See page 98.
Information
<Secret code>
pYou cannot set secret codes for UIM Phonebook entries.
pThe secret code can be added only when the recipient’s mail address is in the form of
“phone number” or “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”. It cannot be added to any other
form of mail address.
pIf you have stored the mail address as “phone number＋secret code@docomo.ne.jp”,
you cannot reply to mail messages from the party of that mail address. After changing
the mail address to “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, set the secret code.
<Edit Phonebook>
Editing Phonebook Entries
101
Phonebook
1Detailed Phonebook displayi()Delete data
Do the following operations.
1Phonebook listi()Delete data
Do the following operations.
<Delete Data>
Deleting Phonebook Entries
Delete from the Detailed Phonebook Display
Phone number/
This item
YES
pHighlight an item to be deleted by pressing Mo from the
detailed display.
pYou cannot delete information obtained by i-concier.
This phonebook YES
Delete from the Phonebook List
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for Phonebook entries to be deleted
l()YES
pYou can check or uncheck entries all at once by pressing
i( ) and selecting “Select all in tab/Select all/Release
all in tab/Release all”.
pPerform the same operation as that of “Delete all” when you
have selected all Phonebook entries including secret ones.
Delete all in tab You can delete all the Phonebook entries for the displayed tab.
YES
Delete all You can delete all Phonebook entries including secret entries.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
Information
pWhen you delete a Phonebook entry that is stored in the PushTalk Phonebook, the
PushTalk Phonebook entry is also deleted.
1mPhonebookNo. of phonebook
Phone
Phonebook. . . The number of Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA terminal
(Phone)
Secret. . . . . . . The number of Phonebook entries stored as secret data
(Displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only)
Image . . . . . . . The number of Phonebook entries in which still images are stored
Chara-den . . . The number of Phonebook entries in which Chara-den images are
stored
PushTalk . . . . The number of Phonebook entries stored in the PushTalk
Phonebook
Voice dial . . . . The number of Phonebook entries set as voice dial entries
Rest . . . . . . . . : The number of phone numbers that can still be stored
: The number of mail addresses that can still be stored
UIM
Phonebook. . . The number of Phonebook entries stored on the UIM
When the entry is stored in memory number “000” through “009” in the
FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, you can dial the phone number just by
pressing the lowest one digit of memory number and d.
1Numeric key (0 to 9)d or Oo()
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l( ) or a PushTalk call by
pressing p.
<No. of Phonebook>
Checking Phonebook Storage Status
Information
pWhile you are using 2in1, the number of displayable Phonebook entries for each
mode is displayed. (See page 453)
<2-touch Dial>
Making a Call with a Few Keys Operation
Information
pWhen the Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the first phone number
will be dialed.
102
Phonebook
Just vocalize the other party’s voice dial name and then the Phonebook
entry is accessed for making a call.
You can store up to 100 voice dial entries selecting from among the
Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone).
1mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Voice dial setting<New>
pYou can edit the stored voice dial name by pressing l( ). Go to step 3.
pTo delete the stored voice dial entry, press i( ) and select “Delete” or
“Delete all” and then select “YES”.
2Search the PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry.
The display for search method you used last time appears.
pThe “★” mark is added to the Phonebook entry stored in the Voice Dial list.
3Enter a voice dial name.
pYou can enter up to 22 half-pitch katakana characters.
pThe reading (katakana only) of the Phonebook entry is displayed as the voice dial
name. Correct the name to the easy-to-identify words.
pWhen you set “Restrict dialing” to a Phonebook entry of memory number 000 through
009, set it to the first phone number in the Phonebook entry.
pWhen you store a Phonebook entry of memory number from 000 through 009 as
secret data, make a call to that entry in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only.
<Voice Dial>
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice
+m-2-6
Voice Dial Setting
Information
Information
pThe voice dial name set by this function is effective only for calling up a voice dial
entry. For the voice guidance function, the reading (name) stored in the Phonebook is
read aloud.
By your voice, you can access the Phonebook entry you set in the Voice
Dial list. When “Read aloud settings” is set to “ON” and “Voice dial” is
checked, the operation is guided by the voice guidance.
1d(for at least one second)
As soon as the voice recognition start tone sounds,
vocalize the voice dial name.
Start vocalizing within four seconds after the voice recognition start tone sounds.
Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed.
pYou cannot change the volume of the voice recognition start tone. The voice
recognition start tone does not sound during Manner Mode.
pIf you say the word “ボイス設定 (Boisusettei)”, the display of “Voice settings”
appears. (See page 103)
pWhen “Auto voice dial” is set to “ON”, the display for Auto Voice Dial appears
after the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry. Then about two seconds later,
the FOMA terminal automatically dials out.
pYou cannot access a voice dial entry even by pressing and holding d for at
least one second from the horizontal Stand-by display.
2
Highlight a detected result and press
d
or
Oo
().
The first phone number in the selected Phonebook entry is dialed.
pYou can show the detailed Phonebook display by pressing l().
Highlight a phone number and press d or Oo( ) to make a voice call.
Also, you can make a videophone call by pressing l( ) or a PushTalk
call by pressing p.
pWhen multiple similar voice dial names are stored or when the voice dial name is
short, the recognition rate lowers and a wrong voice dial entry (Phonebook entry)
might be accessed. In this case, rename the existing voice dial name and store it.
pYou cannot store “ボイスセッテイ (Boisusettei)” as a voice dial name.
Dial from Phonebook by Voice
Information
Information
pWhen you vocalize, keep your mouth away from the microphone about 10 cm. If your
voice is too distant, it may be difficult to recognize your voice.
103
Phonebook
You need to set “Voice headset dial” to “ON” and open the FOMA
terminal in advance.
1Press and hold the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (option) for at least one second.
2Perform the operations of “Dial from Phonebook by
Voice” on page 102.
pYou can make a call also by pressing the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch instead of pressing d or Oo.
You can access a voice dial entry with the FOMA terminal closed as well.
You need to set “Voice headset dial” to “ON” in advance, and connect
with the Bluetooth device using the Headset service or Hands-free
service.
pFor using the Hands-free service, the Bluetooth device needs to support a voice
recognition function.
1Press the switch of the Bluetooth device.
pYou can access a voice dial entry also by pressing and holding < for at least one
second when the FOMA terminal is closed.
pPronounce the voice dial name as clearly as possible.
pBefore and after voice production, avoid making the sounds unrelated to the voice dial
name such as clearing your throat, clicking your tongue, noisy breathing or other
noise.
pVocalize in quiet, noise-free locations.
pWhile vocalizing, do not put your fingers over the microphone, or press or brush the
keys.
To access a voice dial entry using the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch
Information
To access a voice dial entry using a Bluetooth device
2Access a voice dial entry following the voice guidance.
Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed.
pThe FOMA terminal automatically dials out about two seconds after the voice
guidance informing of dialing finishes.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Do the following operations.
Voice Settings
Auto voice dial You can automatically make a call to the phone number
accessed by voice.
ON or OFF
Voice headset dial You can access the voice dial entries by using the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) or Wireless Earphone
Set 02 (option).
ON or OFF
Read aloud settings See page 402.
Read aloud volume See page 403.
Read aloud speed See page 403.
Read aloud output See page 403.
Read aloud valid
set.
See page 403.
104
105
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Sound Settings
Changing Ring Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Select Ring Tone> 106
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or Melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Melody Effect> 107
Informing You of an Incoming Call by Vibration . . .<Vibrator> 108
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone . . . <Voice Announce> 108
Changing Ringback Tone . . . . . . . . . . . <Melody Call Setting> 108
Setting Keypad Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Keypad Sound> 109
Setting Charging-start/end Tones. . . . . . . . . <Charge Sound> 109
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly Disconnecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Quality Alarm> 109
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail/Message Ring Time> 109
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Headset Usage Setting> 110
Muting Tones from FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . <Manner Mode> 110
Selecting Manner Mode Type . . . . . . . . . .<Manner Mode Set> 111
Screen/Light Settings
Changing Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Display Setting> 113
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook during Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Display Phonebook Image> 115
Setting Displays for Private Window . . . . . . <Private Window> 115
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening FOMA Terminal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Received Mail/Call at Open> 116
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . <Backlight> 116
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically . . . . . . . . .<LCD AI> 117
Making Display Hard to See from People Around
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <View Blind> 117
Setting Quality of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Image Quality> 117
Setting Color Combination for Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Color Theme Setting> 118
Setting Display of Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . <Menu Icon Setting> 118
Using Kisekae Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Kisekae Tool> 118
Setting Machi-chara image . . . . . . . . . . . .<Set to Machi-chara> 119
Setting Display of Horizontal Open Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Horizontal Open Menu> 120
Setting Color of Call/Charging Indicator and Others
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Illumination> 120
Checking Missed Calls and New Mail by Tone and Call/Charging
Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Info Notice Setting> 121
Changing Character Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Font> 122
Changing Character Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Character Size> 123
Setting Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
106
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set a ring tone for each incoming type.
If you select an i-motion movie, the i-motion movie and sound are played
back for incoming calls/messages. (Chaku-motion)
pThe ring tone is the PCM sound source, chord of 128 tones, and ADPCM compliant.
pSee “Add to Phonebook” for setting a ring tone by Phonebook entry, and see “Group
Setting” for setting it by group.
■Ring Tone List (pre-installed)
+m-1-3
<Select Ring Tone>
Changing Ring Tone
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Pattern 1 ーー
Pattern 2 ーー
Pattern 3 ーー
Pattern 4 ーー
Pattern 5 ーー
SONATINE※1SONATINE
Composer:
WOLFGANG AMADEUS
MOZART
Techno Techno ー
PARADE OF THE
WOODEN SOLDIERS※1
PARADE OF THE
WOODEN SOLDIERS
Composer:
JESSEL LEON
SUMMERTIME※1SUMMERTIME Composer:
GERSHWIN GEORGE
TRITSCH TRATSCH
POLKA OP 214※1
TRITSCH TRATSCH
POLKA OP 214
Composer:
STRAUSS JUN JOHANN
SOMEDAY MY PRINCE
WILL COME
SOMEDAY MY PRINCE
WILL COME
Composer:
CHURCHILL FRANK E
Gentle Flow※1Gentle Flow ー
PEER GYNT SUITE NR
1 OP 46/
MORGENSTEMNING※1
PEER GYNT SUITE NR
1 OP 46/
MORGENSTEMNING
Composer:
GRIEG EDVARD HAGERUP
Electrical※1ーー
Acoustic Guitar※1ーー
Minimal※1ーー
Documentary ーー
Magical Stick ーー
Smart Beep ーー
※1 3D sound is supported. See page 107 for 3D sound.
※2 i-motion movie
※3 © 2008 TOMOYASU MURATA COMPANY.
(Note) The names of lyricists and composers are described conforming to the JASRAC
web page.
Whole part of long titles may not be displayed due to restriction of the display
size.
1mSet./ServiceSoundSelect ring tone
Select an incoming type.
pSelect an item and press l( ) to check the contents actually played
back or displayed.
2Select ring toneSelect a type of ring tone.
Melody . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a melody as a ring tone.
MUSIC. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a Chaku-uta Full® music file as a ring tone.
imotion . . . . . . . . . Sets an i-motion movie as a ring tone. (Chaku-motion/
Chaku-uta®)
Voice announce . . . Sets the sound recorded by “Voice announce” as a ring
tone. The setting is completed.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a ring tone off. The setting is completed.
3Select a folderSelect a ring tone.
pIf you select “MUSIC” in step 2, select “Fullsong ring tone” or “Point ring tone”.
(See page 286)
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Ukulele ーー
Waterdrop ーー
Lemon's Road※2※3Lemon's Road TOMOYASU MURATA
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Information
pYou can set the Call Receiving display by selecting “Phone” or “Videophone”, and
then by selecting “Select calling disp.”. Go to step 2 on page 114.
pYou can set the Mail Receiving display by selecting “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR” or
“MessageF”, and then by selecting “Select receiving disp.”. Go to step 2 of “Set
Stand-by Display” on page 113.
107
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
pThe priority order of ring tones is as follows: “Read aloud settings” → “Setting for
Phonebook entry” → “Group setting” → “Select ring tone” (“Set as ring tone” of “Multi
number” when a call comes in to the additional number, “Ringtone set. for No. B” of
“2in1 setting” when a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1).
pThe ring tone or images set at purchase might be played back or displayed for
incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and
“Display setting”.
pSee “imotion info” to check whether the i-motion movie can be set for a ring tone.
pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a mail ring tone, you
can press -r or others to stop the ring tone.
pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back taking priority over “Display setting”. However, if you
set a voice-only i-motion movie for the ring tone, the image set by “Display setting” is
displayed.
pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for “Select calling disp.”,
the i-motion movie is played back taking priority over this function for incoming calls.
However, if you set an i-motion movie containing only video for “Select calling disp.”,
the ring tone selected for this function is played back for incoming calls.
pYou cannot set an i-motion movie which contains video for “PushTalk” or “i-concier”.
pWhen different types of mail — i-mode mail, SMS messages, chat mail, or Messages
R/F — are received at the same time, the priority order of ring tone as follows: “Chat
mail” → “i-mode mail/SMS” → “MessageR” → “MessageF”. If you receive the same
type of mail simultaneously, the ring tone corresponding to the mail you have received
last works.
pFor melodies downloaded, attached to mail, or prohibited from being attached to mail
or being output from the FOMA terminal, a playing part may be specified in advance.
When a play-part-specified melody is set for a ring tone, only the specified part is
played back.
Information
You can set whether to add stereophonic sound effects to the playback
tone of melodies and i-motion movies, ring tones, and effect tones.
1mSet./ServiceSoundMelody effect
Do the following operations.
3D Sound is a function that creates the stereophonic sound and the sound moving
through the space, using the stereo-earphone set. 3D Sound compatible i-αppli games,
ring tones, and i-motion movies enable you to enjoy live-like feeling of sounds.
+m-6-4
<Melody Effect>
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or
Melody
Stereo&3DSound Plays back 3-dimensional sound from the stereo-earphone set.
Effective for the i-αppli effect tones or ring tones.
ON or OFF
Position to play Sets the play start position of the melody that has been set for the
ring tone or alarm tone.
Select an item.
Play all. . . . . . . . Plays back from the beginning of the melody.
Play portion . . . Plays back from the start position set for the
melody.
3D Sound
Information
pStereognostic sense might differ depending on the person. If you feel strange, switch
“Stereo&3DSound” to “OFF”.
108
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the vibrator to notify you of incoming calls and mail.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callVibrator
Select an incoming typeSelect a vibration pattern.
Pattern 1. . . . . . . . . Alternates between vibration on (about 0.5 second) and off
(about 0.5 second).
Pattern 2. . . . . . . . . Alternates between vibration on (about 1 second) and off
(about 1 second).
Pattern 3. . . . . . . . . Alternates between vibration on (about 3 seconds) and off
(about 1 second).
Melody linkage . . . Vibrates in time with the vibration pattern stored in the melody.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .Does not vibrate.
pWhile you are selecting a pattern, the FOMA terminal vibrates by the selected
pattern for confirmation. However, it does not vibrate if you select “Melody
linkage”.
pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while “Vibrator” is set to
other than “OFF”:
: You set “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”.
: You set “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
: You set “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”, and set “Mail”, “Chat mail”,
“MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
+m-5-4
<Vibrator>
Informing You of an Incoming Call by
Vibration
Information
pThe priority order of vibrators is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group
setting” → “Vibrator”.
pEven when “Melody linkage” is set, the FOMA terminal vibrates with “Pattern 2” if an
i-motion movie or melody with no vibration pattern is set for the ring tone.
pBe careful not to leave the FOMA terminal on a desk or similar places with the vibrator
activated; when a call comes in, the FOMA terminal might move and fall by vibration.
You can set the sound recorded with the FOMA terminal for a ring tone
(including a ring tone for Number B of 2in1), On-hold tone/Holding tone,
alarm for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, and “TV timer”, and answer
message for Record Message.
You can record only one item for about 15 seconds.
1mLifeKitRec.msg/voice memoVoice announce
Record
pTo suspend recording midway, press Oo(), h, or r. The contents
recorded to that point are saved.
pThe tone beeps about 5 seconds before the recording time (for about 15
seconds) ends. When recording ends, the tone beeps twice, and the former
display returns.
pThe recording is suspended when a call comes in, when an alarm for “Alarm”,
“Schedule”, “ToDo”, “TV timer”, or “Timer recording” sounds, or when you switch
displays using Multitask during recording. (The contents recorded to that point are
saved.)
pTo play back the recorded sound, select “Play”. To suspend playback midway,
press Oo(), h, or r.
pTo erase the recorded sound, select “Erase”, then select “YES”.
Melody Call is a service that changes the ringback tone phone callers
hear, to a melody you like.
For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
pMelody call is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
1m
Set./Service
Incoming call
Melody Call setting
YES
Operate following the instructions on the display.
+m-5-5
<Voice Announce>
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone
<Melody Call Setting>
Changing Ringback Tone
109
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceSoundKeypad soundON or OFF
The confirmation tone sounds twice when charging starts/ends.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsBattery
Charge soundON or OFF
Information
pMelody Call is not available for incoming videophone calls and PushTalk calls.
pWhen you select “YES” from the confirmation display asking whether to connect to the
site, the line is connected to the i-mode site. You are not charged a packet
communication fee for connecting to the site for settings, however, you are charged
for connecting to the IP site, i-mode menu site, and free melody corner.
+m-3-0
<Keypad Sound>
Setting Keypad Sound
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for keypad sound.
pIf you set this function to “OFF”, the battery level tone (see page 44) and respective
warning tones do not sound.
pThe keypad does not make a sound when you press .<, during ringing, or during
playback of a movie or i-motion movie.
pWhen you press .> with the FOMA terminal closed, the FOMA terminal works
following “Info notice setting” on page 121.
<Charge Sound>
Setting Charging-start/end Tones
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for charge sound.
pThe charging confirmation tone does not sound when a display other than the
Stand-by display is shown or during Manner Mode or Public Mode (Drive Mode).
When a call is nearly disconnecting midway due to bad radio wave
conditions, an alarm sounds to inform you right before disconnection.
1mSet./ServiceTalkQuality alarm
Select an alarm.
No tone . . . . . Does not sound.
High tone. . . . High alarm sounds.
Low tone . . . . Low alarm sounds.
You can set the duration of the ring tone which sounds for incoming
i-mode mail, SMS messages, Chat mail, Messages R/F, and i-concier
information.
1mSet./ServiceSoundMail/Msg. ring time
Select a type of mail or messageON or OFF
Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter in two digits from “01” through “30”.
+m-7-5
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly
Disconnecting
Information
pYou might be disconnected without hearing an alarm if radio wave conditions
deteriorate suddenly.
pAn alarm for “Quality alarm” sounds only from the earpiece during a videophone call.
+m-6-8
<Mail/Message Ring Time>
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
110
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set where you make the ring tone and alarm sound from for
when you connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(option).
1mSet./ServiceSoundHeadset usage setting
Headset and speaker or Headset only
+m-5-1
<Headset Usage Setting>
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
Information
pEven when you set “Headset only”, the ring tone sounds from both the earphone and
speaker about 20 seconds after ringing starts. However, the tone does not sound from
the speaker but sounds from the earphone only even after 20 seconds have elapsed if
the tone sounds for the operations other than incoming calls, incoming mail, and
alarm notification.
pEven when you set “Headset only”, the tone sounds from the speaker when you do
not connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch or when you start
shooting still images or movies.
pIn the following cases, the tone sounds from the earphone when the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch is connected, and from the speakers when it is not
connected, regardless of this setting:
・While watching a 1Seg program
・During playback of a video file
・During playback of an i-motion movie
・During playback of a PC movie
・During playback of a melody
・While an i-αppli program is running
・During playback of a music file by MUSIC Player
・During playback of a Music&Video Channel program
pDo not wind the cord of the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch around the
FOMA terminal.
pThe FOMA terminal may pick up noise if you take the cord of the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch close to the FOMA terminal during a call.
Just by pressing a key, you can set to mute tones such as a ring tone and
keypad sound from the FOMA terminal.
You can use “Manner mode set” to select Manner Mode functions from
three types; “Manner mode”, “Super silent”, or “Original”.
While “Manner mode” or “Super silent” is activated, or while “Mic
sensitiv.” is set to “Up” in “Original”, you can talk softly on the phone but
your voice can still be heard clearly at the other end.
1During standby/During a call
s(for at least one second)
Manner mode selected in “Manner mode set” is set.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, press and hold > for at least one second to
activate Manner Mode.
pDuring Manner Mode, “ ” is displayed. The settings you selected for “Manner
mode set” are also displayed.
: Indicates that “Vibrator” will work to notify events.
/ / : Indicate that “Ring volume” has been set to “Silent”.
<Manner Mode>
Muting Tones from FOMA Terminal
Information
pIf you activate Manner Mode during a call or calling, the message to that effect
appears.
pThe recording start tone sounds even in Manner Mode when you shoot still images or
movies.
pIn Manner Mode, if you try to play back a melody, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. Select “YES” to play back the melody at the volume set
for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. If the setting is “Silent” or “Step”, the volume is Level 2.
pIn Manner Mode, if you do the following operations, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play back voice or music.
・Watching a 1Seg program
・Playing back an i-motion movie
・Playing back a video file
・Playing back a PC movie
・Playing back a music file by MUSIC Player
・Playing back a Music&Video Channel program
Select “YES” to play it back at the volume set for each player. When you change the
volume level, it is played back at the set volume for the next time.
111
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press and hold s for at least one second. During a call or calling, two beeps sound
and the message that is released appears.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, press and hold > for at least one second to
release Manner Mode.
Press l() (s for PushTalk call) or >.
Manner Mode is activated and Record Message is simultaneously activated so that the
caller can leave a voice/video message.
Even when “Record message setting” has not been set to “ON”, the Record Message
function works.
Press d or Oo( ) to answer a voice call, or press d, +Oo(), or
m( ) to answer a videophone call.
pWhen five messages for voice calls and two messages for videophone calls have
already been recorded, or when a PushTalk call comes in, Record Message does not
work. Manner Mode specified by ”Manner mode set” works.
pAfter you finish a call, Manner Mode is still activated.
pWhen a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option) is connected, the sound
comes out of the earphone. The confirmation display asking whether to play back
sound or music files during Manner Mode does not appear. Further, the playback tone
does not sound from the speakers even if you unplug the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch during playing back sound or music files by each player.
To release Manner Mode
To activate Manner Mode during ringing
Information
You can select one of three types of operations for Manner Mode.
■Operations during Manner Mode
+m-2-0
<Manner Mode Set>
Selecting Manner Mode Type
Manner
Mode
Super
Silent Original
Record message Set value of
Record message ON or OFF
Vibrator※1ON ON or OFF
Phone volume Silent Silent through Level 6 and step①
Mail volume Silent Silent through Level 6 and step②
Alarm volume※2Silent Silent through Level 6 and step
Memo tone ON OFF ON or OFF③
Keypad sound OFF ON or OFF④
Microphone sensitivity Up Normal or Up
Low voltage alarm tone
(Low battery alarm) OFF
ON or OFF
When “LV alarm tone” is set to “ON”, it
works with the same set value as
①
.
※3
Confirmation tone for
selecting ring tone Silent Works with the same set value as ①・
②.
On hold tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Holding tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※5
ToruCa-received tone and
ToruCa failed-to-receive
tone
Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
Confirmation tone for
recording voice announce ON OFF Works with the same set value as ③.
Battery level tone Silent Silent
Voice recognition start tone Silent Silent
Confirmation tone for
checking missed calls and
new mail
Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※6
Playback tones of attached
melody Silent Silent
Effect tones of
Decome-Anime Silent Silent
Warning tones Silent Works with the same set value as ④.
Schedule alarm Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
112
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
※1 Vibrator works for the following tones:
Ring tones and alarm tones for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, “TV timer” and “Timer
recording”
The vibration pattern is the same as the setting you set on page 108. However, if
the setting you set on page 108 is “OFF”, “Pattern 2” applies.
Confirmation tone for checking missed calls and new mail
The FOMA terminal vibrates for about 1 second when you have missed calls or
new mail messages and vibrates for about 0.2 second when you have no missed
calls and new mail messages.
※2 When “Prefer manner mode” on page 405 is set to “OFF”, the tone sounds at the
volume set for Alarm.
※3 The tone sounds at Level 1 when ① is “Silent”.
※4 The tone sounds at Level 2 when ① is “Step”.
※5 The tone sounds at Level 1 when ① is not “Silent”.
※6 The tone sounds at Level 6 when ① is not “Silent”.
※7 When “Prefer manner mode” on page 264 is set to “OFF”, the tone sounds at the
volume set for TV Timer.
※8 The tone does not sound when ① is “Step”.
ToDo alarm Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
TV timer alarm Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※7
Timer recording alarm Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※8
Start tones for shooting still
images and movies Level 4 Level 4
Confirmation tone for
selecting shutter sound OFF
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Switching to Hands-free by
“Hands-free w/ V. phone” or
“Hands-free w/ PushTalk”
OFF OFF
Read aloud volume Silent Silent
Effect tones of Flash movies
Silent Silent
Manner
Mode
Super
Silent Original You can select from among standard “Manner mode” to inform you of
incoming calls or mail by the vibrator, “Super silent” to erase sounds
including confirmation tones from the earpiece, or “Original” to
customize operations.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callManner mode set
Manner mode, Super silent or Original
Do the following operations.
Record msg. ON or OFF
pEven if you select “ON”, the ring time is fixed to about 13
seconds and cannot be changed when “Record message
setting” on page 71 is set to “OFF”.
pSee page 71 for Record Message Setting.
Vibrator You can set the FOMA terminal to vibrate for incoming calls and
mail.
ON or OFF
pSee page 108 for Vibrator.
Phone vol. You can adjust the ring volume for incoming voice calls,
videophone calls and PushTalk calls.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 68 for Ring Volume.
Mail vol. You can adjust the ring volume for i-mode mail, SMS messages,
Messages R/F, and i-concier information.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 68 for Ring Volume.
Alarm vol. Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 404 for Alarm.
Memo tone You can set the FOMA terminal to sound a confirmation tone
when a record message is played back, a voice memo is
recorded or played back, and a movie memo is recorded.
ON or OFF
Keypad sound ON or OFF
pSee page 109 for Keypad Sound.
Mic sensitiv. Normal or Up
113
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
2Press l().
You can set an image for the Stand-by display. You can set also i-motion
movies shot by the FOMA terminal or downloaded from sites for the
Stand-by display. You can set it for the vertical display and horizontal
display respectively.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by display or Stand-by disp. Wide
Select a type of image.
pIf you select “Calendar/schedule”, select a display format, and then select “BG
image ON” or “BG image OFF”. If you select “BG image OFF”, the setting is
completed.
You cannot select “Calendar (2 months)” and “Calendar (3 months)” for
“Stand-by disp. Wide”.
pIf you select “iαppli display”, select an i-αppli program. The setting is completed.
You cannot select “iαppli display” for “Stand-by disp. Wide”.
2Select a folderSelect an image.
pOn the Stand-by display, the image smaller than the display is shown in
equivalent dimensions or enlarged to fit to the display size, depending on the
image size.
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
LV alarm tone ON or OFF
pSee page 44 for LV Alarm Tone (low battery alarm).
+m-5-6
<Display Setting>
Changing Displays
Set Stand-by Display
You can display schedule events of the day (up to 10) or
calendar in the set format on the Stand-by display. You can
check the schedule events or calendar and can set schedule
events (see page 407) with ease.
You can access the schedule events or calendar by pressing
Oo from the vertical Stand-by display. Highlight an item to be
operated and press Oo().
pWhen you select a schedule event, you can confirm the
previous or next schedule events by pressing Bo.
You can display the detailed schedule display by pressing
Oo().
pWhen you select the calendar, you can display the previous or next calendar by
pressing Bo. If “Calendar (1 month)”, “Calendar (2 months)”, or “Calendar (3 months)”
is set, you can display the previous or next calendar also by pressing No.
You can set a schedule event by pressing Oo().
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display.
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The image stopped such as by your first operation
is displayed as the Stand-by display.
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display.
pPress Bo or </> during playback to adjust the volume.
Press Oo, l, i, m, c, No, r, d, p or h to end the playback.
pIf you play back an i-motion movie during Manner Mode, the sound is not played back.
When Calendar/Schedule is set
When an original animation or animation GIF is set
When a Flash movie is set
When an i-motion movie is set
For
“Calendar+schedule”
114
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press h from the Stand-by display.
Calendar, schedule events, status icons, notification icons, and desktop icons are
cleared. Press h again to show the icons and others.
When a Flash movie is set for the Stand-by display, however, the following operations
are performed:
・When you press h during playback of a Flash movie, the playback pauses.
Press h again to clear the icons and others.
You can set an image or message to be displayed for when the power is
turned on.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Wake-up displaySelect a type of image.
pIf you select “Message”, enter a message. You can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100
half-pitch characters.
pIf you select “My picture” or “imotion”, go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on
page 113.
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Not to display icons on the Stand-by display
Information
pThe schedule list shows the today’s schedule events whose start time has not come,
and the today’s schedule events set as “Whole day”. Holidays are not displayed.
pSome i-motion movies might not be correctly displayed.
pYou cannot set a still image larger than the Stand-by (480 x 854) size or in excess of
300 Kbytes for the Stand-by display.
pYou cannot set some images or i-motion movies for the Stand-by display.
pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back.
Set the Wake-up Display
Information
pYou cannot set some images or i-motion movies for the Wake-up display.
pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back.
You can set an image for the Dialing/Call Receiving display, Mail
Sending/Mail Receiving display, and Checking display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Select a type of display.
pWhen “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” is selected, select “Select calling
disp.”.
pWhen “Mail receiving” is selected, select “Select receiving disp.” and go to step 2
of “Set Stand-by Display” on page 113.
pIf you select “Dialing”, “Videophone dialing”, “Mail sending”, “Check new
message”, or “Mail/msg. rcpt result”, go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on
page 113.
pSelect “Incoming call”, “Videophone incoming” or “Mail receiving” and press
l( ) to check the contents actually displayed or played back.
2Select a type of image.
Go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on page 113.
Set Displays for Dialing/Calling and Others
Information
pWhen you select “Incoming call”, “Videophone incoming”, or “Mail receiving”, select
“Select ring tone” to set the ring tone. Go to step 2 on page 106.
pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook
entry” → “Group setting” → “Disp. PH-book image” → “Display setting”. However,
when “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” of “Read aloud settings” is set to
“ON”, the default image is displayed.
The same order applies if a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1. However,
when you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion) by “Ringtone set. for No. B”, it is played back as Chaku-motion, taking
priority over this function.
pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back for incoming calls, taking priority over this function.
However, if you set a voice-only i-motion movie, the image set by this function is
displayed.
pWhen you set an i-motion movie containing video and sound for “Select calling disp.”,
the i-motion movie is played back taking priority over “Select ring tone” of “Incoming
call” for incoming calls. However, if you set an i-motion movie containing only video for
“Select calling disp.”, the ring tone selected for “Select ring tone” of “Incoming call” is
played back.
115
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the icons for battery level and radio wave reception level that
appear on the display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Battery icon or Antenna iconSelect a folder
Select an image.
pYou cannot change icons such as “ ” or “ ”.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Icon colorColor or Monochrome
pYou cannot change the battery icon and antenna icon.
If the caller ID notified by the caller matches the phone number stored in
the Phonebook, the still image stored in the Phonebook is displayed.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
Disp. PH-book imageON or OFF
pThe images or ring tone set at purchase might be displayed or played back for
incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and
“Select ring tone”.
pYou cannot set some images for “Display setting”.
pThe sound of Flash movies is not played back.
Set Battery Icon and Antenna Icon
Information
Show Icons in Color/Monochrome
<Display Phonebook Image>
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook
during Ringing
Information
pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: “Picture for Phonebook
entry” → “Picture for group” → “Image for Phonebook entry” → “Display setting”.
However, when “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” of “Read aloud settings” is
set to “ON”, the default image is displayed.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayPrivate window
ON or OFFDo the following operations.
+m-9-3
<Private Window>
Setting Displays for Private Window
Clock You can set the display pattern of the clock.
Pattern 1, Pattern 2, Pattern 3 or Pattern 4
Orientation You can set the direction of the clock to be displayed.
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2
Brightness You can adjust the brightness to Level 1 (dark) through Level 3
(bright).
Select a brightness level.
Called You can display the phone number (name when stored in the
Phonebook) of the caller during ringing.
ON or OFF
You can set whether to display a Chaku-moji message.
ON or OFF
Mail You can display the received date/time and others of the mail
message or Message R/F. (See page 33)
ON or OFF
pThe received date/time and others of the mail messages or
Messages R/F in the box or folder with security set are not
displayed.
i-Channel ticker ON or OFF
pYou can set for each mode of 2in1. When 2in1 is deactivated, it
becomes common to the setting in A Mode.
Disp. connection You can set whether to display animations/characters during
communication.
ON or OFF
116
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
When you have a missed call, new mail message, new chat mail message,
or new Message R/F, the detailed Missed Call display/Inbox list/Chat Mail
display/Message R/F list is displayed at opening the FOMA terminal.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayRecv. mail/call at open
ON or OFF
1mSet./ServiceDisplayBacklight
Do the following operations.
<Received Mail/Call at Open>
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening
FOMA Terminal
Information
pWhen newly received messages and missed calls are found, the detailed Missed Call
display appears.
pWhen a new mail message, chat mail, Message R/F are simultaneously received, the
messages are displayed in the order of the chat mail message, i-mode message,
Message R, and Message F.
+m-7-0
<Backlight>
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad
Lighting You can set whether to light the backlight in ordinary time.
ON or OFF
pIf you set to “OFF”, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, you can set whether to activate Power Saver Mode for the
display.
ON or OFF Enter a light time (seconds).
pEnter from “060” through “999” in three digits.
Press and hold 5 for at least one second.
pWhile a Decome-Anime message is displayed, an i-αppli program is running, a Flash
movie is displayed, or entering characters, you cannot switch the backlight on/off by
pressing and holding 5 for at least one second.
Charging Standard or Constant light
Standard. . . . . . . . Lights during charging in the same setting as
it lights in ordinary time.
Constant light
. . . .When 15 seconds elapse without doing any
operations, the backlight becomes level 1. The
display does not switch to Power Saver Mode.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is connected to AC adapter (option)
and so on, lights in accordance with the setting of this function
also after charging.
Area You can set the range the backlight lights in.
LCD+Keys or LCD
Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the backlight for the display to
Level 1 (dark) through Level 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pWhen “Auto setting” is set, the backlight set by “Area” is
automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness that
has been detected by the light sensor.
Soft light You can set whether to light the backlight softly for the display.
ON or OFF
pEven if you set to “OFF”, the backlight might light softly for some
functions.
To switch the backlight on/off by pressing one key
Information
pWhen “Lighting” is set to “ON”, the backlight stays lit while a call is coming in and the
area specified by “Area” lights for about 15 seconds when you turn on the power,
touch the keys, or open the FOMA terminal. The backlight stays lit while the camera is
activated or a movie/i-motion movie is played back. When “OFF” is set, it does not
light. However, it stays lit during recording of a movie regardless of the “Lighting”
setting.
pSee page 76 for Backlight during a videophone call.
pSee page 268 for Backlight for while watching a 1Seg program.
pWhen you display the text of i-mode mail or Messages R/F, the lighting time varies
according to the length of the text.
117
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set whether to automatically adjust the brightness of the display
backlight and to compensate the image quality according to that
brightness during playback of i-motion movies, PC movies, Music&Video
Channel programs, or video files, during a videophone call, or while
watching a 1Seg program.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayLCD AION or OFF
pIf you operate the setting from the Function menu during a videophone call or
watching a 1Seg program, the setting is effective only for the current videophone
call or 1Seg program.
pIf “Power saver mode” is set to “ON” and the specified time elapses without doing any
operations, the FOMA terminal switches to Power Saver Mode and the display goes
off. However, the FOMA terminal might not switch to Power Saver Mode depending
on the function in use.
pWhen a Flash movie or an i-motion movie is set for the Stand-by display, the Stand-by
display shifts to Power Saver Mode after ending the playback and a standby time
elapses.
pThe display appears when you operate the FOMA terminal, receive a call, or receive
i-Channel tickers. However, the receiving display does not appear when you receive a
call in Public Mode (Drive Mode).
<LCD AI>
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically
Information
Information
pIf you set to “ON”, the brightness is adjusted within the level specified for “Brightness”
of “Backlight”. The brightness is adjusted also while you are selecting a menu item.
pThis function is disabled during Play Background.
You can adjust the contrast of the display so that it is hardly viewed from
a slanted angle.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayView blindON or OFF
Select a contrast.
pWhen “ON” is set, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.
pWhile a contrast level is selected, the selected contrast level appears on the
display for confirmation.
Press and hold 8 for at least one second.
pWhile a Decome-Anime message is displayed, an i-αppli program is running, a Flash
movie is displayed, a PDF file is displayed, or entering characters, you cannot switch
View Blind on/off by pressing and holding 8 for at least one second.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayImage quality
Select an item.
Normal. . . . . Normal image quality
Vivid. . . . . . . Vivid image quality
Dynamic . . . Dynamic image quality in which motion is emphasized
<View Blind>
Making Display Hard to See from People
Around
To switch View Blind on/off by pressing one key
<Image Quality>
Setting Quality of Display
118
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the display color pattern of characters, backgrounds, and so
on.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayColor theme setting
Select a color theme.
pWhile a color theme is selected, the selected color theme appears on the display
for confirmation.
You can change the icons and the background images of Main Menu.
1ml()Select a pattern.
pIf you set “Simple menu”, Main Menu switches to a menu focusing on only basic
functions for easy operation. Some operating procedures or items which appear
on the display in Simple Menu differ from the ones described in this manual.
2When you select “Customize” in step 1, select a menu
icon or background image to be changed
Select a folderSelect an image.
Repeat step 2 and set menu icons and a background image.
pWhile selecting a menu icon or background image, press l( ) to confirm
the currently set image.
pTo reset the menu icon and background image set to “Customize” to “スタンダー
ド (Standard)” in the “Pre-installed” folder, press i( ) and select “Reset”
or “All reset”, then select “YES”.
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
+m-8-6
<Color Theme Setting>
Setting Color Combination for Display
Information
pYou cannot change the color for icons and images displayed in multiple colors, the
DOCOMO pictographs, and the Internet web pages (sites) supporting i-mode.
+m-5-7
<Menu Icon Setting>
Setting Display of Main Menu
You can use Kisekae Tool to change the ring tone, Stand-by display,
menu icons and others at a time.
pSee page 204 for details on how to download Kisekae Tool files.
pSee page 369 for details on how to operate Kisekae Tool files from Data box.
■Items that can be set with Kisekae Tool
pItems that can be set differ depending on the Kisekae Tool file.
pThe setting change of phone/videophone ring tones, mail ring tone, Stand-by display,
and clock is applied only to the A Mode of 2in1. The other changes are applied to the
all modes of 2in1.
1mSet./ServiceKisekae
Highlight a Kisekae Tool file and press l()
YES
p“★” is added to the Kisekae Tool file collectively set at the moment.
pDepending on the selected Kisekae Tool file, the confirmation display might
appear asking whether to change the character size. When you select “NO”, you
might not be able to set the Kisekae Tool file correctly.
Information
pThe image you can set “Customize” is a JPEG or GIF image whose size is Stand-by
(480 x 854) or smaller and up to 300 Kbytes. Perform “Change size” or “Trim away”
for other images.
pWhen the image you set “Customize” is deleted, “スタンダード (Standard)” in the
“Pre-installed” folder returns.
pWhen Personal Data Lock is activated while “Customize” is set, the default image is
displayed.
pWhen you set “Customize”, the main menu icons do not switch even if you switch
“Select language”.
<Kisekae Tool>
Using Kisekae Tool
・Select ring tone
・Display setting
・Color theme setting
・Menu icon setting
・“Clock” and “Orientation” of Private window
・Font
・Ticker font size set.
・Ticker color set.
・Ticker scroll speed
・Positioning ring tone
・Tone
119
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can reset the items changed by Kisekae Tool.
1mi()Reset
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Reset disp. /sound . . . .Resets all of “■Items that can be set with Kisekae Tool”
to the default.
Reset menu screen . . . .Resets Main Menu to the default. You can reset also by
pressing and holding r for at least one second from
the vertical Stand-by display and selecting “YES”.
Reset menu log . . . . . . .Resets the operation records of Main Menu to the
default.
Information
pFor the functions set by Kisekae Tool, each setting display is shown with “Follow
Kisekae Tool” highlighted. You can separately change each setting, however, if you
want to reset to the setting by Kisekae Tool, you need to perform collective settings
again. You cannot select “Follow Kisekae Tool”.
pIf you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some menu
configurations change according to the usage frequency depending on the type of the
menu. Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not
apply.
Function Menu of Main Menu
Change launcher You can manually replace the items on Main Menu.
Select a destination to save toYES
Disp. default MENU You can temporarily show Main Menu of “Normal”.
pOnce you close Main Menu of “Normal”, the currently set Main
Menu returns.
Reset See page 119.
Reset Changed Design
2YES
By setting Machi-chara image, you can be notified of missed calls, new
mail messages, new i-concier information and others by Machi-chara
image.
pSee page 204 for details on how to download Machi-chara images.
pSee page 365 for details on how to operate Machi-chara images from Data box.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayMachi-chara
Set to Machi-chara
pTo release Machi-chara image, select “Release Machi-chara”.
2Highlight a Machi-chara image and press l().
p“★” is added to the Machi-chara image set at the moment.
Information
pEven if you perform “Reset disp. /sound” or “Reset menu screen”, you cannot reset
“Character size”.
pEven if you execute “Reset menu screen”, the Main Menu items you have manually
replaced by “Change launcher” are not reset.
<Set to Machi-chara>
Setting Machi-chara image
Information
pMachi-chara image is not displayed in the following cases:
・During Lock All ・During Personal Data Lock ・During Omakase Lock
・While selecting an icon and others on the Stand-by display
・While playing back an i-motion movie set as the Stand-by display
pSome Machi-chara images might be displayed in the state changed, depending on
the elapsed time after setting, Total Calls Duration, or the number of sending/receiving
mail messages. If you move these Machi-chara images to the microSD card or
execute “Reset all info”, they return to the first state.
120
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceDisplayHorizontal open menu
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2
1mSet./ServiceIllumination
Do the following operations.
<Horizontal Open Menu>
Setting Display of Horizontal Open Menu
<Illumination>
Setting Color of Call/Charging Indicator
and Others
All illum. setting You can set all illumination items at one time.
Select a pattern.
Incoming
illumination
See page 121.
Illumination in talk You can set the illumination for during a call.
Select an item.
pThe Call/Charging indicator flickers for confirmation while you
are selecting.
pIt flickers in the same color while Record Message is working,
during answer-hold (On Hold), or while a call is on hold
(Holding).
Miss/unread illum. The Call/Charging indicator flickers for missed calls, new mail
messages, new chat mail messages, new Messages R/F, not
replied i-αppli call, or new i-concier information at about 5-second
interval for about 3 hours.
ON or OFF
pIt does not flicker in Public Mode (Drive Mode), during Lock All,
and during Omakase Lock. Flickering does not resume even
after Public Mode (Drive Mode) or each lock is released.
Music&Video Ch
illum.
The Call/Charging indicator flickers when obtaining Music&Video
Channel programs is completed at about 5-second interval for
about 30 minutes.
ON or OFF
Illum. when closed The Call/Charging indicator lights when the FOMA terminal is
closed.
ON or OFF
Hourly illumination You can be notified of the specified time (every hour at 0 minutes)
by the tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator.
Select a pattern.
OFF . . . . . . . The Call/Charging indicator does not light.
Pattern 1. . . A fixed tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator
lights in the fixed color.
Pattern 2. . . The tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator
change by time.
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights and the time tone sounds for
confirmation while you are selecting.
p“Hourly illumination” does not work while a display other than
the Stand-by display is shown, or Lock All or Omakase Lock is
activated.
pTime tone sounds at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring
volume”. If “Step” is set, it sounds at Level 2.
MUSIC illumination The Call/Charging indicator flickers when you start playback by
MUSIC Player.
ON or OFF
Bluetooth
illumination
The Call/Charging indicator flickers during connecting to
Bluetooth devices.
ON or OFF
pIt flickers at about 5-second interval for about 5 minutes when
the connection is completed.
IC card illumination The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you place the
FOMA terminal over an IC card scanning device or during iC
communication.
ON or OFF
pIt does not light/flicker during IC Card Lock.
PushTalk
illumination
The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you try to get the
PushTalk talker’s right, or when a member’s state changes to
“Connected”.
ON or OFF
Side key
illumination
You can set the illumination for when you press < with the
FOMA terminal closed.
Select an item.
pThe Call/Charging indicator flickers for confirmation while you
are selecting.
pThe lighting duration differs depending on the illumination.
121
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set an illumination for each incoming type.
1mSet./ServiceIlluminationIncoming illumination
Do the following operations.
Check settings You can check the setting contents for “Incoming illumination”,
“Illumination in talk”, “Hourly illumination” and “Side key
illumination”.
+m-8-9
Incoming Illumination
Set color Select an incoming typeSelect an item.
pTo make the indicator light in colors “Color 1” to “Color 12” in
order, select “Gradation”.
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers for confirmation
while you are selecting.
Set pattern You can set the lighting pattern of the Incoming Illumination.
Select a pattern.
Standard . . . . . . . . . Lights in the same pattern repeatedly.
Melody linkage. . . . Lights with the ring tone.
Color setting
Edit color name Select a colorEnter a name.
pYou can edit “Color 1” through “Color 12” only.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Adjust color tone Select a colorAdjust the color tone.
pYou can adjust the color tone of “Color 1” through “Color 12”
only.
pUse Bo to select a color and use No to change the color
tone.
Information
<Set color>
pThe priority order of incoming illumination is; “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group
setting” → “Set color”.
When the FOMA terminal is closed, you can press > to check for missed
calls, new mail, new chat mail, new Messages R/F, record messages, and
voice mail messages. To use this function, you need to set “Side keys
guard” to “OFF” in advance.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callInfo notice setting
Select an item.
ON※. . . .Notifies you whether there are missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, or
new Messages R/F by the electronic sound and flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
OFF . . . .Turns off the information notice.
※When “Select language” is set to “日本語 (Japanese)”, you can select “電子音
(electronic sound)” or “ボイス (voice)”. With “ボイス (voice)”, Japanese
electronic voice and flickering of the Call/Charging indicator notify you of new
chat mail, new mail, missed calls, record messages and voice mail messages in
this order.
<Set pattern>
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights in specified pattern for each illumination when “Set
color” is set to other than “Color 1” through “Color 12” and “Gradation”.
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights by “Standard” when an i-motion movie or melody
with no flickering pattern is set for the ring tone.
+m-6-5
<Info Notice Setting>
Checking Missed Calls and New Mail by
Tone and Call/Charging Indicator
Information
122
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
When you have a missed call, new mail, new chat mail, or new Message R/F
(When the “Missed call” icon, “New mail” icon, “Chat mail”, or “Message R/F” icon is
displayed on the Stand-by display.)
If “Info notice setting” is set to “ON”, a double-beep tone sounds and the Call/Charging
indicator lights for about five seconds.
If “Info notice setting” is set to “ボイス (voice)” in Japanese display, a beep tone sounds
and a voice message announces that you have new mail, a missed call, and so on, and
the Call/Charging indicator lights for about five seconds.
pWhen “Info notice setting” is set to “ボイス (voice)” in Japanese display, and a new
Message R/F comes in, a voice message announces that you have new mail.
pIf you press > again while the voice is being played back, you can stop it.
When you have no missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, or new Message R/F
If “Info notice setting” is set to “ON”, or “ボイス (voice)” in Japanese display, a triple-beep
tone sounds, and the Call/Charging indicator flickers for about five seconds.
Even when “Info notice setting” is set to “ボイス (voice)” in Japanese display, the notice
is not made by voice.
If you press
.>
while the FOMA terminal is closed
Information
pYou cannot check for the mail messages held at the i-mode Center by this function.
pThe confirmation function might not work depending on the function being activated.
pThe sound volume for electronic sound cannot be changed.
p“ボイス (voice)” sounds at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. If “Step” is
set, the sound volume is Level 2.
pThe missed call, new mail, and new chat mail are informed by both the Call/Charging
indicator and the vibrator unless “Phone” of “Vibrator” has been set to “OFF”.
pThe vibrator notifies the information as follows:
・Vibrates for about 1 second when you have a missed call, new mail, or new chat
mail message.
・Vibrates for about 0.2 second when you have no missed calls, new mail, or new
chat mail message.
pIf you open the FOMA terminal during notification, it stops.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayFont
Font 1, Font 2, or Font 3
You can set the font and color of names stored in the Phonebook and
phone numbers displayed on the following displays:
■Font of dial number
・Dialing/Call Receiving display ・Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Detailed Redial display
・Detailed Sent Chaku-moji message
■Font color
・Dialing/Call Receiving/Talking display ・Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Redial
・Detailed Sent Chaku-moji message ・Sent/Received Address list
pWhen you use 2in1, the setting here applies to Number A. To specify for Number B,
operate “Disp. call/receive No.” of “2in1 setting”.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callDisp. call/receive No.
Do the following operations.
+m-6-6
<Font>
Changing Character Font
Information
pSome characters are displayed in “Font 1” regardless of the setting of this function.
pYou cannot change the font of a phone number entry or clock display.
Set Character Font and Color of Phone Numbers
Font of dial number Select a pattern.
Font color Select a color.
pYou can switch between 16 color and 256 color by pressing
c().
pYou can reset the set color by pressing i().
Information
pIf you change the background color by “Color theme setting” or “Kisekae Tool”, the
font color automatically changes as well.
123
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceDisplayCharacter size
Do the following operations.
pYou cannot change the color of pictographs.
<Character Size>
Changing Character Size
Information
Set at one time You can set all the changeable items such as character size at a
time.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
pThe confirmation display might appear asking whether to
change the character size of the menu as well. If you select
“YES”, the menu icons are set to “Enlarge menu” when you
have set to “Extra large” or “Large”, and they return to the
default when you have set “Standard” or “Small”.
pWhen “Extra large” is set, “Phonebook” and “Dialed/recv. calls”
are set to “Large”.
pWhen “Small” is set, “Phonebook” and “Dialed/recv. calls” are
set to “Standard”.
Mail You can set the character size for the detailed mail display,
detailed Message R/F display and on the displays within “Mail
settings”.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
pWhile the detailed mail display is displayed, press i()
to select “Display” and then select “Character size”. You can
change character size also by pressing 3, or pressing and
holding No for at least one second.
pYou cannot change the character size of the text of the
Decome-Anime or Deco-mail pictograms.
i-mode You can set the character size for sites, “i-mode settings” and
“Full Browser settings”.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
Phonebook You can set the character size for the Phonebook and
“Phonebook settings”.
Large or Standard
pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Character sizePhonebook.
You can set whether to display the clock on the Stand-by display and can
set its display pattern. You can set clock for the vertical Stand-by display
and horizontal Stand-by display respectively.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingClock
Stand-by clock or Stand-by clock Wide
Do the following operations.
pHighlight “Stand-by clock” or “Stand-by clock Wide” and press l( ) to
check the clock actually displayed.
Dialed/recv. calls You can set the character size for the Redial, Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, Sent Address and Received Address.
Large or Standard
pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Character sizeDialed/recv. calls.
Character input You can set the character size for the character entry display,
Message Composition display, or SMS Composition display.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
Information
pDepending on the function, characters might not be displayed in the set size.
pWhen “Extra large” or “Large” is set, some items displayed for each operating
procedure differ from the ones displayed for when “Standard” or “Small” is set.
+m-5-6
Setting Clock Display
Set Stand-by Clock Display
+l()
Position
You can set the clock position.
Select a pattern.
+i()
Pattern
You can set the display pattern of the clock.
Select a pattern.
+m()
Display size
Largest, Large, or Small
pYou cannot change the clock size on the Private window, World
Time Watch, and the sub clock.
124
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
2Press Oo().
pThe setting of this function may not be reflected depending on the setting of each
function or the condition of the FOMA terminal.
You can set display pattern of icon clock displayed on upper right (lower
right in Horizontal display) of the display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingClock
Icon clockSelect a pattern.
+c()
Day of week
When “Select language” is set to “日本語 (Japanese)”, you can
select “日本語 (Japanese)” or “英語 (English)”.
pThe setting here applies also to the clock display on the Private
window.
pIf you set to “英語 (English)”, also region names of World Time
Watch are displayed in English.
Set Icon Clock Display
125
Security Settings
Security Code
Security Codes Used on FOMA Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Changing Terminal Security Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Change Security Code> 127
Setting PIN Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<UIM Setting> 127
Releasing PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Restricting Operations and Functions on Mobile Phone
Restricting Others from Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Lock All> 128
Using Omakase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Omakase Lock> 129
Using Self Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Self Mode> 130
Hiding Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Personal Data Lock> 130
Setting a Variety of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Lock Setting> 131
Using Face Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Face Reader Setting> 132
Locking Keypad Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Keypad Dial Lock> 135
Restricting Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Key Lock> 135
Restricting Side Key Operation. . . . . . . . . <Side Keys Guard> 135
Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls or Messages
Setting not to Display Redial/Received Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Record Display Set> 136
Protecting Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events from
Prying Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . <Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only> 136
Applying Secret for Mail in Mailbox . . . .<Secret Mail Display> 137
Setting not to Display Mail in Mailbox without Permission
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail Security> 137
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries . . .<Restrictions> 137
Setting Response to Incoming Calls without Caller ID
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Call Setting without ID> 139
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation . . . . . . . . . . <Ring Time> 139
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone Numbers which are not
Stored in Phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reject Unknown> 140
Using Data Security Service . . . . . . . .<Data Security Service> 140
Resetting Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reset Settings> 142
Deleting Saved Data All at Once. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Initialize> 142
Resetting Data by Remote Control. . . . . . . . . <Remote Reset> 143
Other Security Settings
Other Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
126
Security Settings
For some functions of the FOMA terminal, you need to enter your
security code. In addition to the Terminal Security Code for operating
respective mobile phone functions, the Network Security Code to use
network services, and i-mode password are available. These security
codes help you utilize your FOMA terminal.
The Terminal Security Code is set to “0000” at purchase but you can
change it by yourself. (See page 127)
When the display for entering the Terminal Security Code appears, enter
your four- to eight-digit code and press Oo().
pWhen you enter your Terminal Security Code, the entered
numbers are indicated by “_” and not displayed.
pIf you have entered wrong numbers or nothing for about 15
seconds, a warning tone sounds and a warning message is
displayed; then the display prior to entering the Terminal
Security Code returns. Check the correct code and retry entering numbers.
Security Codes Used on FOMA Terminal
■Cautions on security codes
pYou should avoid using the numbers for security codes such as denoting your birth
date, part of your phone number, local address number, room number, “1111” or
“1234” that is easily decoded by a third party. Also make sure that you take a note of
the security codes you have selected just in case you forget them.
pTake care not to let others know your security codes. Even if your security codes are
known and used by a third party, we at DOCOMO take no responsibility in any event
for the resultant loss.
pIf you do not remember your respective security codes, you need to bring an
identification card such as your driver’s license, the FOMA terminal and UIM to the
handling counter of a docomo shop.
For details contact “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual.
Terminal Security Code
The Network Security Code is a four-digit number which is necessary for
confirming your identification at subscription on docomo shop, docomo
Information Center, and “各種お申込・お手続き (Respective applications/
procedures)”. Further, the Network Security Code is necessary for using
respective network services. This is determined at the time of contract
but can be changed by yourself.
If you have “docomo ID/Password” for “My docomo”, the overall support
site for personal computers, you can use a personal computer to take
proceedings of changing your Network Security Code to new one. Also,
you can change it by yourself from “各種お申込・お手続き (Respective
applications/procedures)” on お客様サポート(user support) by using the
i-mode phone.
※
For “My docomo” and “
各種お申込・お手続き
(
Respective
applications/
procedures)”, see the back of the back page of this manual.
You need to enter the four-digit “i-mode password” for registering or
deleting My Menu, applying for or canceling Message Services, i-mode
pay service, and so on. (Some information providers may provide you
with their specific password.)
The i-mode password is “0000” at the time of your contract, but you can
change it by yourself. (See page 199)
From i-mode, you can change the i-mode password by following
operation:
“iMenu” → “English” → “Options” → “Change i-mode Password”
For the UIM, you can set the two security codes, namely the PIN1 code
and PIN2 code. These security codes are “0000” at the time of your
contract, but you can change them by yourself. (See page 128)
The PIN1 code is the four- to eight-digit number for checking the user
each time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA terminal or each time the
FOMA terminal is turned on, so that you can prevent the third party from
using your UIM. By entering your PIN1 code, you can make or answer
calls, or use functions in the FOMA terminal.
The PIN2 code is the four- to eight-digit number for executing Reset Total
Cost, using the user certificate or applying for the issue of it, etc.
Network Security Code
i-mode Password
PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code
127
Security Settings
pIf you purchase a new FOMA terminal and use the existing UIM with the new FOMA
terminal, use the PIN1 code and PIN2 code you have set previously.
When the PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code Entry display appears, enter your four- to
eight-digit PIN1 code/PIN2 code and press Oo().
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
pIf you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in
succession, it is locked and the FOMA terminal cannot be
used. (The remaining number of times you can enter appears
on the display.)
When you enter the correct PIN1 code/PIN2 code, the
remaining number of times you can enter will return to three
times.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even from
the PIN1/PIN2 Code Entry display.
The PUK (PIN unblock code) is the eight-digit number for releasing the
PIN1 code and PIN2 code lock state. You cannot change this code by
yourself.
pIf you enter a wrong PUK (PIN unblock code) 10 times in succession, the UIM is
locked.
PUK (PIN Unblock Code)
For PIN1 code
Wrong entry 3 times in succession
Entry OK
Wrong entry 10 times
in succession
Security when the power turns on
Set new PIN code Consult the handling
counter of a docomo shop
Enter PUK (PIN unblock code)
Enter PIN1 code Enter PIN2 code
Operation of user certificate
Connecting to FirstPass sites
Change the default for the Terminal Security Code required for operating
functions to your own four- to eight-digit code so that you can make full
use of the FOMA terminal. Make sure you take a note of the security code
you have changed just in case you forget it.
1mSet./ServiceLock/Security
Change security code
Enter the current Terminal Security Code.
pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter “0000”.
2Enter a new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)
YES
You can set the FOMA terminal not to work unless you enter your PIN1
code when turning on the power.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
PIN1 code entry setON or OFF
Enter the PIN1 code.
pSee page 126 for the PIN1 code.
+m-2-9
<Change Security Code>
Changing Terminal Security Code
<UIM Setting>
Setting PIN Code
PIN1 Code Entry Set
128
Security Settings
You need to have set “PIN1 code entry set” to “ON” to change the PIN1
code.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change PIN1 code or Change PIN2 code
Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
pSee page 126 for the PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
2Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
3Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
If you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in succession on
the display requiring its entry, it is locked and the FOMA terminal cannot
be used. In this case, release the PIN1 code/PIN2 code lock and set a new
PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
1Enter the PUK (PIN unblock code)
(eight digits).
pThe entered unblock code is displayed as “_”.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even
from the PUK Entry display.
2Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
Change PIN1 Code/Change PIN2 Code
Releasing PIN Lock
3Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
If you set Lock All, you can do no operations other than answering calls
and turning on/off the power.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock all
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” and “Lock all” appear and Lock All is set.
pTo release Lock All, enter your Terminal Security Code from the Stand-by
display. Even if you turn off the power, Lock All will not be released.
<Lock All>
Restricting Others from Using
Information
pYou cannot make calls during Lock All. However, you can make emergency calls at
110/119/118. Select “YES” from the confirmation display for dialing.
pYou can receive calls, but the callers’ data such as their names and images stored in
the Phonebook are not displayed except for their phone numbers. Further, the default
ring tone sounds.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Lock All.
pIf you fail to release Lock All five times in succession, the power to the FOMA terminal
turns off. However, you can turn it on again.
pYou can receive mail messages or Messages R/F during Lock All; however, the
Receiving or Reception Result display for incoming mail messages and Messages R/
F does not appear. The icons such as “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appear after Lock All is
released.
pDuring Lock All, the notification icons, desktop icons, and schedule events are not
displayed on the desktop except “ ”, “ ”, and “ ”. When Lock All is
released, they are displayed.
pThe tickers of i-Channel are not displayed during Lock All.
pThe default Wake-up display appears during Lock All even when an i-motion movie
has been set for the Wake-up display.
pEven if you set Lock All, IC Card Lock is not activated.
129
Security Settings
When you have lost your FOMA terminal or in other cases, you can use
this service to lock your personal data (such as Phonebook entries) or IC
Card function of the Osaifu-Keitai by contacting DOCOMO. Omakase
Lock protects your privacy and Osaifu-Keitai. Also, if Omakase Lock
cannot be set at subscription and your FOMA terminal becomes available
within one year, your FOMA terminal will be locked automatically.
However, if you cancel the contract, halt the service, change the phone
number of your FOMA terminal, and change your contract to mova,
Omakase Lock cannot be set automatically even when your FOMA
terminal becomes available within one year.
To release the lock, contact DOCOMO by phone, etc.
※Omakase Lock is a pay service. However, you are not charged if you apply for this
service at the same time as applying for the suspension of the use or during the
suspension, or if you are a member of DOCOMO Premier Club. Further, if you have
signed up for Keitai Anshin Pack, you can use Omakase Lock in the fixed bill of Keitai
Anshin Pack.
※Even during Omakase Lock, your FOMA terminal corresponds to the location
provision request of GPS function if “Location request menu” is set for permission.
pFor details on Omakase Lock, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
<Omakase Lock>
Using Omakase Lock
■Setting/Releasing Omakase Lock
0120-524-360 Business hours: 24 hours
※You can set/release also from My docomo site via a personal computer or other
devices.
“Omakase lock” is displayed on the Stand-by display and Omakase Lock is set.
pDuring Omakase Lock, all the key operations are locked and respective functions
(including IC card functions) are disabled, except for answering voice calls/videophone
calls, putting them on answer-hold (On Hold), turning on/off the power, adjusting the
earpiece volume and adjusting the ring volume.
pYou can receive voice calls and videophone calls (except PushTalk calls), but the
callers’ data such as names and images stored in the Phonebook are not displayed
except for their phone numbers. In addition, the ring image and ring tone are reset to
the default. When you release Omakase Lock, the former settings return.
pMail messages received during Omakase Lock are held at the i-mode Center.
pYou can turn on/off the power, however, Omakase Lock is not released by turning off
the power.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Omakase Lock.
pNote that neither the UIM nor the microSD card is locked.
If you set Omakase Lock
Information
pEven while another function is working, Omakase Lock applies after finishing that
function.
pOmakase Lock can be set even when another lock function is set. However, if you
have set Public Mode (Drive Mode) before setting Omakase Lock, you cannot receive
voice calls and videophone calls.
pOmakase Lock cannot be set when the FOMA terminal is out of the service area,
turned off, or during Self Mode. Besides Omakase Lock might not be set depending
on your use, etc.
pWhen you have signed up for Dual Network Service and are using the mova phone,
Omakase Lock cannot be set.
pEven when the contractor and the user of the FOMA terminal differ, the FOMA
terminal will be locked if the contractor offers to DOCOMO.
pYou can release Omakase Lock only when the UIM of the same phone number at
locking is inserted in your FOMA terminal. If you cannot release it, contact “docomo
Information Center” on the back page of this manual.
130
Security Settings
You can disable all phone calls and communication functions.
During Self Mode, the caller hears the guidance to the effect that radio
waves do not reach or the power is turned off. If you use DOCOMO Voice
Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, you can use these services in
the same way as when the FOMA terminal is turned off.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecuritySelf modeYES
OK
“ ” appears and Self Mode is set.
pTo release Self Mode, perform the same operation.
<Self Mode>
Using Self Mode
Information
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even during Self Mode. In this case,
Self Mode is released.
pYou cannot receive mail messages, Area Mail messages, or Messages R/F during
Self Mode.
pEven if a call comes in during Self Mode, the icons notifying you of “Missed call” or
presence of Voice Mail messages do not appear after releasing Self Mode.
You can set the following functions such as the functions using personal
information not to be used:
<Personal Data Lock>
Hiding Phonebook Entries and Schedule
Events
・Desktop
・Record message
・Play/Erase msg.
・Select image
・Remote monitoring
・PushTalk phonebook
・Add to phonebook
・Group setting
・Search phonebook
・No. of phonebook
・Phonebook settings
・Voice dial
・Voice announce
・Kisekae Tool
・Machi-chara
・
Feel
＊
Mail image playback
・Restrictions
・Reject unknown
・Reset settings
・Initialize
・Mail
・Mail group
・Chat group
・i-mode
・Bookmark
・i-Channel
・i-concier
・Full browser
・PC movie
・Camera
・Bar code reader
・1Seg
・Music&Video Channel
・MUSIC
・MUSIC player
・i-αppli
・i-Widget
・IC card content
・ToruCa
・GPS function
・Still image
・Movie
・Video
・Chara-den
・Melody
・microSD card
・Infrared communication
・iC communication
・Voice recorder
・PDF viewer
・Document viewer
・Alarm
・Schedule
・ToDo
・Alarm setting
・Own number
・Voice memo
・Movie memo
・Text memo
・UIM operation
・“Number setting” and “Set
as ring tone” for Multi
number
・Data transfer
131
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityPersonal data lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” appears and Personal Data Lock is set.
pTo release Personal Data Lock, perform the same operation. When Timer Lock
ON At Close is set, the display for releasing Personal Data Lock appears also by
opening the FOMA terminal.
When you set “PIM/IC security mode” to “Face reader”, follow the operation of
“Use Face Reader to Release Lock” on page 134.
When you set to “Double security”, enter your Terminal Security Code after the
operation on the page 134.
When you select a function which cannot be used during Personal Data Lock, the
display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears depending on the function.
When you enter your Terminal Security Code, “ ” is cleared and you can temporarily
use the function.
pWhen you show the Stand-by display while no menu function is activated, Personal
Data Lock is set again.
To temporally release Personal Data Lock
Information
pYou can automatically receive Messages R/F, i-mode mail messages, chat mail
messages, and SMS messages during Personal Data Lock; however, the Receiving
or Reception Result display does not appear. Further, the receiving operation such as
ringing/vibration does not work, so you are not notified of receiving. The icons such as
“ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appear after Personal Data Lock is released.
pDuring Personal Data Lock, the “Notification icon” and “Desktop icon” such as “New
mail”, “Missed alarm”, “Phone number”, “URL” and “Mail address” do not appear,
however, they reappear when you release Personal Data Lock.
pDuring Personal Data Lock, you cannot check a missed call or new mail by pressing
.> with the FOMA terminal closed.
pDuring Personal Data Lock, the “Pre-installed” substitute image is sent to the other
party if you send the substitute image during a videophone call.
pIf you set “Lock all” during Personal Data Lock, “ ” is cleared and “ ” appears
instead.
pYou cannot set Personal Data Lock while “Reject unknown” is set.
You can set “Timer Lock ON At Close” that automatically activates
Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock when the specified time has elapsed
after closing your FOMA terminal.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Timer lock ON at close
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Personal data lock or IC card lock
Select an elapse time.
If you set to other than “OFF”, “ ” appears and then Timer Lock ON At Close is
set. After each lock is activated, the Lock Release display appears when you open
the FOMA terminal.
<Lock Setting>
Setting a Variety of Locks
Timer Lock ON At Close
Information
pWhen the Stand-by display is not shown, or when another function is working with the
Stand-by display shown, the lock is not activated even after the specified time
elapses. However, when another function ends after closing the FOMA terminal, the
lock is activated after the specified time elapses.
pWhen a call or mail message comes in after closing the FOMA terminal, or when you
open it, the elapsed time counter returns to 0 seconds.
pWhen this function is activated, the lock is temporarily released if you release each
lock. However, it is re-locked when the specified time elapses after closing the FOMA
terminal.
pIf you set “Work with style” to other than “OFF” and open the FOMA terminal in
Horizontal Open Style, the Lock Release display does not appear.
pIf you set “Key lock” during Timer Lock ON At Close, “ ” is cleared and “ ”
appears instead.
132
Security Settings
You can set the way to release Personal Data Lock and IC Card Lock.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
PIM/IC security mode
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Select a security mode.
Security code . . . . .Enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock. The
setting is completed.
Face reader . . . . . . .Use Face Reader authentication to release the lock.
Double security. . . .Enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock after
using Face Reader authentication. The setting is completed.
2YES
PIM/IC Security Mode
Information
pYou cannot change PIM/IC Security Mode when the face data files stored by Face
Reader Setting are fewer than three, or during Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock.
You can store your face data files in Face Reader and use it for
authentication when releasing IC Card Lock or Personal Data Lock. To
use Face Reader, you need to store three or more face data files and set
“PIM/IC security mode” to either “Face reader” or “Double security”.
■Notes on using Face Reader
pThe dirty camera might result in erroneous operation. Use this function after wiping it
with a soft cloth to clean the dirt off.
pIn environment where the face is exposed to strong light and the brightness
significantly differs depending on the region of the face, the face will not be recognized
easily. In this case, storing might become difficult or the recognition rate (the rate of
correct identification) might be lowered. Adjust so that the face is exposed to even light.
pThe face might not be recognized normally when its entire part is exposed to the light
and becomes white.
pStoring the face might become difficult or the recognition rate might be lowered when
the face conditions are as described below:
・When the features of the face (eyes, mouth, nose, and eyebrows, etc.) are hard to
see as they are covered by hair, glasses, or a mask
・When the brightness significantly differs depending on the region of the face such as
when you are under the light in a dark place
pThe recognition rate might rise by reacting in accordance with the face conditions such
as by raising the hair so that the eyes, nose, mouth, and eyebrows are clearly visible
(taking the glasses and mask off) or moving to a place where the face is exposed to
even light. The recognition rate rises also by storing the face data file additionally.
pThe face authentication technology does not completely guarantee that you are
recognized as yourself. Accordingly, we are not at all responsible for damages
resulting from the use of this product by a third party or when the damages are caused
by what you could not use the function because of wrong authentication by Face
Reader.
<Face Reader Setting>
Using Face Reader
133
Security Settings
To use Face Reader, store 3 or more face data files. You can store up to
10 face data files.
1mSet./Service
Lock/Security
Lock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal
Security CodeStore
OK
Face to the front, and locate the face
within the guide frame. You can
prevent the failure in authenticating
the face data file, which results from
the difference in the position of the
face at storing and authenticating the data.
When your face is recognized, the recognition frame for the eyes and mouth is
displayed and the guide frame becomes green. When the recognition frame is not
displayed or it comes off your eyes and mouth, place your face off the frame; then
change the facing direction of your face to correctly display the recognition frame.
pThe number of face data files is displayed by the bar on the Face Data Reading
display.
2Press Oo().
The face data file is shot.
3Press Oo().
The face data file you have shot is stored. Repeat step 1 through step 3 to store
three or more face data files.
pWhen the third face data file is stored, the message appears telling that Face
Reader can be more easily used by adding face data file.
pWhen you press r, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
the face data file.
pIf you try to store the face data file in the same environment, you might not be
able to store it. Change the direction of the face or the place for shooting.
Store
Face Data Reading
display
Stored number bar
Guide frame
Recognition frame
You can reset all the face data files stored in Face Reader.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Delete stored imagesYES
Information
pAt shooting, the Call/Charging indicator flickers and the shutter tone sounds
regardless of the Manner Mode setting. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be
changed.
Function Menu of the Face Data Reading Display
Brightness You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pYou can adjust brightness also by pressing 3 from the Face
Data Reading display.
Help You can check the cautions for shooting.
pYou can bring up Help also by pressing 0 from the Face Data
Reading display.
Delete Stored Images
At Face reader
start-up
±0
Information
pYou cannot reset the face data files during Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock.
pWhen you reset the face data files, “PIM/IC security mode” is set to “Security code”.
134
Security Settings
The images not judged as yourself by Face Reader recognition operation
are saved. You can use these images to specify who tried to illegally
access your data.
The image is overwritten every time recognition-failed image is made.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Recog. failed imageSelect an image.
pTo delete the recognition-failed images, press i( ), select “Delete this”,
and then select “YES”.
You can set Face Reader to additionally recognize blinking of the eyes.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Face reader securityNormal or High
Normal . . . Does not recognize blinking of the eyes.
High. . . . . . Recognizes blinking of the eyes.
You can set a security code to be entered instead of the Face Reader
authentication for when “PIM/IC security mode” is set to “Face reader” or
“Double security”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change security code
Enter the current Face Reader Security Code.
pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter “0000”.
Recognition-failed Image
Face Reader Security
Change Security Code
2Enter a new Face Reader Security Code (four to eight
digits)YES
When “PIM/IC security mode” is set to “Face reader”, use Face Reader to
release the lock instead of using your Terminal Security Code.
When it is set to “Double security”, use Face Reader for authentication
and then enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock.
1
Display for releasing Personal Data Lock/IC Card Lock
Match the face to the guide frame and press
Oo
().
Face to the front, and locate the face
within the guide frame. The
recognition frame for the eyes and
mouth is displayed, and the guide
frame becomes green. When the
recognition frame is not displayed or
it comes off, place your face off the
frame; then change the facing
direction of your face to correctly
display the recognition frame.
pPerform the operation for authentication with the same facial expression as when
you stored the face data file.
pPress l( ) and enter your Face Reader Security Code; then you can
operate to authenticate instead of using Face Reader.
For the Face Reader Security Code, see page 134.
When additional storing of the face data file is possible, select “OK” to bring up the
confirmation display asking whether to store additional face data file. Select “YES”, enter
your Terminal Security Code; then you can store additional face data file. When you
cannot store any more face data files, select “OK” to show the Face Data Reading
display. If the shot face is judged as another person, a shutter tone sounds and the
recognition-failed image is saved. Select “OK” to show the Face Data Reading display.
Try authentication using Face Reader again.
pWhen 10 face data files are stored and a new data file is added, the oldest data file is
overwritten.
Use Face Reader to Release Lock
Face Data Reading
display
Guide frame
Recognition frame
If you failed to be authenticated
135
Security Settings
After you are successfully authenticated by Face Reader, your eye blinking is checked.
Repeat blinking your eyes slowly. When the detection of eye blinking fails, the
authentication also fails.
pEven in the same environment as that for the authentication by Face Reader, the
detection of eye blinking may fail. Change the place or the direction of your face, and
then operate.
You can lock dialing from the numeric keys. When using the FOMA
terminal for business purposes, private use of the FOMA terminal can be
prevented.
■Unavailable operations
・Dialing from the numeric keys
・Initial setting
・Phonebook (storing, editing, deleting, copying from the microSD card,
backing up/restoring by the microSD card, sending/receiving using Infrared rays,
sending/receiving using iC communication, and sending/receiving using Bluetooth
communication)
・Phone To/AV Phone To function
・Mail To function
■Available operations
・Dialing from the Phonebook or Voice Dial
・Dialing from Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, Sent Address, or Received Address
(Only phone numbers stored in the Phonebook)
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityKeypad dial lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” is displayed and Keypad Dial Lock is set.
pTo release Keypad Dial Lock, perform the same operation.
When “Face reader security” is set to “High”
<Keypad Dial Lock>
Locking Keypad Dial
Information
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 using numeric keys even during
Keypad Dial Lock.
You can disable the keys except h.
1Press and hold Oo for at least one second.
“ ” appears and Key Lock is set.
pTo release Key Lock, perform the same operation.
You can disable the side keys p, <, and > for when the FOMA terminal
is closed.
You can prevent operation errors in a bag.
1ma(for at least one second)
“ ” appears and “Side keys guard” is set to “ON”.
pTo set to “OFF”, perform the same operation.
pIf you set Keypad Dial Lock, you can send mail only when the address is called up
from the Phonebook and when the address stored in the Phonebook is called up from
Sent Address or Received Address.
<Key Lock>
Restricting Key Operation
Information
Information
pYou cannot turn off the FOMA terminal during Key Lock.
pEven during Key Lock, you can answer an incoming call by pressing -d and an
incoming PushTalk call by pressing .p. You can get the talker’s right by pressing .p
during the PushTalk communication.
pYou can operate the external devices such as the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone
with Switch (option) regardless of the setting of this function.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Key Lock.
<Side Keys Guard>
Restricting Side Key Operation
Information
pEven when “Side keys guard” is set to “ON”, you can answer an incoming PushTalk
call by pressing .p. You can get the talker’s right by pressing .p during the PushTalk
communication.
136
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callRecord display set
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Received calls . . . . . . . . . Sets whether to display Received Calls and Received
Address.
Redial/Dialed calls . . . . . Sets whether to display Redial, Dialed Calls and Sent
Address.
2ON or OFF
pWhen you set “Received calls” to “OFF”, you cannot play back record messages
of voice calls, either.
In ordinary mode, you cannot access/refer to Phonebook entries or
schedule events stored as secret data. In Secret Mode, you can select
whether to store the stored/edited Phonebook entries/schedule events as
secret data or as ordinary data. The Phonebook entries/schedule events
you have stored/edited in Secret Data Only are stored as secret data.
You can access/refer to all the data files in Secret Mode but can access/
refer to only the secret data files in Secret Data Only.
pWhen an external device such as the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(option) is connected, the function of the side keys is valid regardless of this setting.
<Record Display Set>
Setting not to Display Redial/Received
Calls
Information
<Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only>
Protecting Phonebook Entries and
Schedule Events from Prying Eyes
1mSet./ServiceLock/Security
Secret mode or Secret data only
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
When “Secret mode” is selected, “ ” appears and Secret Mode is activated.
When “Secret data only” is selected, “ ” blinks, the number of stored secret data
items is displayed, and then Secret Data Only is activated.
pIf you call up a Phonebook entry or schedule event in Secret Mode, “ ” stays lit
for ordinary data and “ ” blinks for secret data.
pTo deactivate Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, perform the same operation or
press h from the Stand-by display.
In Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, select “Release secret” from the Function menu of
the Phonebook entry or schedule event to be released.
+m-4-0
Activate Secret Mode
+m-4-1
Activate Secret Data Only
To change secret data to an ordinary Phonebook entry or
schedule event
Information
pOnly the Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal can be stored as secret data.
pWhen you make a call to the party stored as secret data, his/her name is not
displayed but the phone number is displayed on the Dialing/Talking display.
pIf you call up a secret entry to make a call or send mail, the record is not stored in
“Redial”, “Dialed calls” or “Sent address”.
pIf you simultaneously activate “Lock all” and “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”,
deactivating “Lock all” deactivates “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”.
137
Security Settings
You can set whether to display the mail (secret mail) message from the
sender or to the destination address that matches secret data in the
Phonebook.
1lMail settingsSecret mail display
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox and Draft of the
Mail menu.
You need to enter your Terminal Security Code to display the mail
messages in security-activated boxes.
1lMail settingsMail security
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for boxes to be setl()
pWhen security is set, “ ” is added to the icon of the set box in the Mail menu.
<Secret Mail Display>
Applying Secret for Mail in Mailbox
Information
pEven when “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, you can check secret mail in Secret
Mode or in Secret Data Only.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, and any secret address is included in
addresses of simultaneous mail, that mail message is not displayed.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, and any secret member is included in chat
members, chat mail messages of all chat members are not displayed.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, Area Mail messages are not displayed in
Secret Data Only.
<Mail Security>
Setting not to Display Mail in Mailbox
without Permission
Restrict Dialing
You can disable making voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls to phone
numbers other than specified ones. When you use the FOMA terminal for business use,
this function is useful for preventing the private use. Call up the specified Phonebook
entry and press d or Oo( ) to make a voice call. (To make a videophone call,
press l( ), and to make a PushTalk call, press p.) You can specify up to 20
phone numbers.
Call Rejection
You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls from specified phone
numbers. You can set only the calls you do not want to receive to be rejected. The caller
hears a busy tone. You can specify up to 20 phone numbers.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is
advisable to activate “Caller ID request” and “Call setting w/o ID” simultaneously.
Call Acceptance
You can receive voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls only from specified
phone numbers. You can set only the calls you want to accept to be connected. You can
specify up to 20 phone numbers.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is
advisable to activate “Caller ID request” simultaneously.
Information
pIf you set security for the Outbox and Inbox, mail addresses are not stored in Sent
Address and Received Address.
<Restrictions>
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries
138
Security Settings
1Detailed Phonebook displayi()
Restrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Restrict dialing . . . You can dial the specified phone numbers only.
Call rejection . . . . . You can reject calls from the specified phone numbers.
Call acceptance. . . You can accept calls from the specified phone numbers only.
Call forwarding . . . See page 445.
Voice mail . . . . . . . See page 442.
The set item is indicated by “★”.
pWhen a Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, press Mo on the
detailed display to highlight the phone number you will set Restrictions for.
pTo set Restrict Dialing for multiple phone numbers, first set Restrict Dialing and
press r to return to the detailed Phonebook display; Mo to highlight the phone
number to be set for Restrict Dialing and continue the operation.
If you press h to return to the Stand-by display, additional settings cannot be
done. To do additional settings, release Restrict Dialing for the set phone number
and activate Restrict Dialing again, including the released phone number.
pTo release Restrictions, perform the same operation.
Restrict Dialing/Call Rejection/Call Acceptance
Information
pYou cannot set this function for Phonebook entries stored as secret data, and in the
UIM Phonebook.
pIf you activate “Personal data lock” while “Call rejection” or “Call acceptance” is set,
you can accept all incoming calls.
pYou cannot operate the following while “Restrict dialing” is set:
・Calling up/Referring to phone numbers other than specified
・Keypad dial (except for the calls to the specified phone numbers)
・Dialing from Received Calls (except for the calls from the specified phone numbers)
・Storing/Editing/Deleting Phonebook entries, copying Phonebook entries from the
microSD card, backing up/restoring by the microSD card, and copying Phonebook
entries to the UIM
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even if you set “Restrict dialing”.
1mPhonebookRestrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
pThe set item is indicated by “★”.
pTo release all the Phonebook entries set with Restrictions, press i(),
select “Release”, and then select “YES”.
2Select a Phonebook entry.
The phone number set with Restrictions is displayed.
pTo release “Restrictions” per phone number, select the phone number you want
to release by following the same steps above, and select “YES”.
pWhen a call comes in from the phone number set with “Call rejection”, or from other
than the phone number set with “Call acceptance”, the call is stored in “Received
calls” as a missed call record and the “Missed call” icon appears on the Stand-by
display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or
Call Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail
Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played
back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of the setting of
“Call rejection” or “Call acceptance”.
Check/Release Restrictions on Phonebook Entries
Information
139
Security Settings
You can set whether to receive (accept) or not to receive (reject) a voice
call, videophone call, and PushTalk call depending on the reason for no
caller ID. There are three reasons; “Unavailable”, “PublicPhone”, and
“User unset”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityCall setting w/o ID
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Unavailable. . . . . Calls from the other party who cannot notify his/her phone
number such as calls from overseas or from landline phones via
call forwarding services.
(However, the caller ID might be notified depending on the
telephone companies the calls go through.)
PublicPhone. . . . Calls from public phones, etc.
User unset . . . . . When the caller has set the caller ID not to be notified.
2Accept or Reject
pIf you select “Accept”, go to step 2 on page 106 to select a ring tone.
If you select “Same as ring tone”, the ring tone will be the one selected in “Phone”
of “Select ring tone”.
+m-1-0
<Call Setting without ID>
Setting Response to Incoming Calls
without Caller ID
Information
pIf you select “Reject”, the ring tone does not sound even if a call comes in, the call is
stored in “Received calls” as a missed call record and the “Missed call” icon appears
on the Stand-by display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice
Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time
for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA
terminal is out of the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will
not be played back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of this setting.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callRing time
Do the following operations.
+m-9-0
<Ring Time>
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation
Ring start time You can set the FOMA terminal not to start ringing operation
immediately for when a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk
call comes in from the party whose phone number is not stored in
the Phonebook. This function is effective as a countermeasure for
blocking nuisance calls such as one ring phone scam (one-giri).
ON or OFFEnter a start time (seconds).
pEnter from “01” through “99” in two digits.
Missed calls display You can set whether to display the call disconnected within the
time specified for “Ring start time” in Received Calls.
Display or Not display
Information
pWhen a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the FOMA terminal starts ringing as soon as the call comes in even if
“186”/“184” is added to the phone number. However, during Personal Data Lock, or
for the call from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, ringing starts
according to the setting of this function.
pIf the ring start time is longer than the ring time for Record Message Setting, the
ringing operations do not start, activating Record Message instead. To activate
Record Message after starting the ringing operations, set the longer ring time for
Record Message Setting than the ring start time. The same applies to the ring time for
Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service, and Auto Answer Setting.
140
Security Settings
You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls from the
party whose phone number is not stored in the Phonebook.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone
number. It is advisable to activate “Caller ID request” and “Call setting
w/o ID” simultaneously.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityReject unknown
Enter your Terminal Security CodeAccept or Reject
<Reject Unknown>
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone
Numbers which are not Stored in
Phonebooks
Information
pIf a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, the call
is not rejected, regardless of this setting.
pIf you simultaneously activate “Reject unknown” and “Call acceptance” of
“Restrictions”, the latter has priority.
pWhen a call comes in from anyone whose phone number is not stored in the
Phonebook while you set this function to “Reject”, the call is stored in “Received calls”
as a missed call record, and the “Missed call” icon appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or Call
Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail
Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played
back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pEven when this function is set to “Reject”, the FOMA terminal follows the setting of
“Call setting w/o ID” if each setting of “Call setting w/o ID” is set to “Accept”.
pYou can receive i-mode mail and SMS messages regardless of this setting.
pYou cannot set “Reject unknown” during Personal Data Lock.
pYou cannot set “Reject unknown” to “Reject” while “Ring start time” of “Ring time” is
set to “ON”.
Data Security Service enables you to save the Phonebook entries,
images, mail messages, ToruCa files※, and schedule events※ (hereafter,
referred to “saved data files”) stored in your FOMA terminal to the
DOCOMO’s Data Storage Center and to restore the saved data files when
you have lost or replaced your FOMA terminal. Further, you can notify of
your mail address change to multiple addresses at a time. You are not
charged a packet communication fee for mail sending to multiple
addresses at a time. If any personal computer (My docomo) is available,
you can use this service more conveniently.
※You need to subscribe to i-concier to save the ToruCa files and schedule events (As of
November 2008).
pFor details on Data Security Service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
pData Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis (You
need to subscribe to i-mode to apply for Data Security Service).
1Display of the data file to be savedi()
Move/copyConnect to Center or Store in Center
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pYou do not need to select “Move/copy” depending on the function.
pWhen you operate from the Inbox list, Outbox list, Draft list, or Still Image list, put
a check mark for the data files to be saved and press l().
You can select up to 10 data files.
<Data Security Service>
Using Data Security Service
Save to Data Storage Center
Information
pYou cannot save the data files stored on the UIM or microSD card.
pYou cannot save the files attached to mail.
pYou cannot save the following still images:
・Images whose sizes exceed 100 Kbytes
・Images whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited
・Images other than in JPEG or GIF format
141
Security Settings
Note that if you delete Phonebook entries from your FOMA terminal and
save the Phonebook to the Data Storage Center, the Phonebook entries
on the Data Storage Center are also deleted. When you restore the
Phonebook from the Data Storage Center to your FOMA terminal, do the
following operations.
1iiMenuEnglishMy Menu
電話帳お預かり (Data Security Service)
お預かりセンター (Data Storage Center)
Enter your i-mode password.
2Select “ケータイへダウンロード (Download to mobile
phone)” from the Phonebook on the Data Storage
CenterOK
pAbout 15 seconds later, download starts. Wait for a while with the Stand-by
display shown.
On the site of the Data Storage Center, you can set so as to periodically
update and save the Phonebook entries in your FOMA terminal to the
Data Storage Center.
Restoring to your FOMA terminal
Information
pWhen the Phonebook entries saved to the Data Storage Center exceeds the number
of Phonebook entries storable in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, the excess entries
cannot be updated.
Auto-update of the Phonebook
Information
pThe Phonebook is not automatically updated while another function is working at the
time of Auto-update.
pIf the Phonebook cannot be updated, the notification icon of “ ” (Data Sec.
Service UD) appears on the desktop. Select “ ”, and the update display appears if
Auto-update is set. If Auto-update is not set, the update display appears after you
enter your Terminal Security Code.
1mLifeKitData Security Service
Do the following operations.
You can configure Data Security Service.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
自動お預かり／更新設定 (Automatic store/update
setting)Follow the instructions on the display.
You can check the data stored in the Data Storage Center and others.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check stored data)
Follow the instructions on the display.
Setting Data Security Service
Connect to Center See page 140.
Exchanging history You can display the records of communication with the Data
Storage Center.
Select a record.
pSelect a communication completion time in the list to switch to
the detailed display.
PB image sending You can set whether to save images set for the Phonebook
entries to the Data Storage Center.
ON or OFF
Information
<Exchanging history>
pUp to 30 records are saved. When more than 30 records are saved, the older records
are overwritten.
<PB image sending>
pYou cannot save the images whose output from FOMA terminal is prohibited.
Using Data Security Service in i-concier
自動お預かり／更新設定 (Automatic store/update setting)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check stored data)
142
Security Settings
You can update the data in the Data Storage Center and in the FOMA
terminal.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かりデータ更新 (Update stored data)
Put a check mark for data files to be updated
l()
You can display the records of communication with the Data Storage
Center.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かり通信履歴 (Stored data exchanging history)
Select a record.
pSelect a communication completion time in the list to switch to the detailed
display.
You can reset the items indicated by of “Function List” to their
default. (See page 476)
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsReset settings
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
お預かりデータ更新 (Update stored data)
お預かり通信履歴 (Stored data exchanging history)
+m-2-3
<Reset Settings>
Resetting Function Settings
Information
pYou cannot execute “Reset settings” while a Bluetooth device is connected or on
standby for connection.
pYou cannot execute “Reset settings” during IC Card Lock while “PIM/IC security
mode” is set to “Face reader” or “Double security”.
pAfter you execute “Reset settings”, the tickers are not displayed. Then, when the
information is automatically updated or you press +Zo to receive the latest
information, the tickers automatically flow.
You can delete the saved data and reset the setting contents of each
function to the default.
See “Function List” for the setting at purchase. (See page 476)
pThe pre-installed data files are not deleted.
pThe pre-installed i-αppli programs are not deleted.
pThe data files stored in the pre-installed i-αppli programs are deleted. However, the
data files stored in Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs are not deleted.
pThe protected data files are also deleted.
pAll the stored data files are deleted regardless of the mode of 2in1.
pEven if you have deleted the pre-installed data files, they are restored when you
execute “Initialize”. However, if you delete the pre-installed i-αppli programs, they are
not restored.
pCharge the battery full before initializing the FOMA terminal. When the battery level is
not enough, you may not be able to initialize the FOMA terminal.
pDuring initialization, never turn off the power of the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot use other functions during initialization. Also, you cannot receive calls or
mail messages.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsInitialize
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
When initializing ends, the power automatically turns off and then turns on and the
“Initial setting” display appears.
<Initialize>
Deleting Saved Data All at Once
Information
pYou cannot execute “Initialize” while a Bluetooth device is connected or on standby for
connection.
pYou cannot execute “Initialize” during IC Card Lock while “PIM/IC security mode” is
set to “Face reader” or “Double security”.
pYou cannot delete the data saved to, stored in, or set for the UIM or the microSD card.
pYou cannot delete the setting of data communication set by a personal computer.
143
Security Settings
This service enables you to initialize each data (the phone/microSD card/
memory of the UIM) of the FOMA terminal that offered by the
administrator when you have subscribed to using this function.
The display effect that operation is disabled appears and initialization starts.
pWhen Remote Reset is activated, all the key operations are locked and respective
functions are disabled, except for answering voice calls/videophone calls and putting
them on answer-hold (On Hold). When Remote Reset starts, all the functions are
disabled.
pWhen Remote Reset is activated during ringing or during a call, all the key operations
are locked except for d and h. Remote Reset is executed after finishing a call.
pTo restore the i-αppli programs, download them from the “P-SQUARE” site. For
downloading, you are charged an additional communication fee.
pAfter you execute “Initialize”, the tickers are not displayed. Then, when the information
is automatically updated or you press +Zo to receive the latest information, the tickers
automatically flow.
pAfter you initialize the FOMA terminal, you cannot automatically obtain Music&Video
Channel programs. Access the Setting Confirmation display from the Music&Video
Channel menu to reflect the program setting.
pInitialization may take a while if the data to be deleted is bulky.
<Remote Reset>
Resetting Data by Remote Control
Information
■Inquiries
docomo Business Online From personal computers http://www.docomo.biz
※You may not be able to access due to system maintenance, etc.
If Remote Reset is activated
Information
p“Set time” is not initialized.
pThe microSD card might not be initialized while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD
mode” and the FOMA terminal is connected to a personal computer.
Other than introduced in this chapter, the following functions/services for
the Security Settings are available:
Other Security Settings
If you want Functions/Service name
Reference
page
To protect the IC card function from being used
illegally
IC Card Lock 318
To prevent crank calls or vicious sales calls from
incoming
Nuisance Call Blocking
Service 445
To prevent the incoming call that does not notify
a caller ID
Caller ID Request 446
To ensure safe and reliable data communication
by using electronic authentication services
※Limited to FirstPass sites
FirstPass
210
To update software programs in the FOMA
terminal when necessary
Software Update 521
To protect the FOMA terminal from data liable to
cause trouble
Scanning Function 527
To receive necessary mail only from among the
large volume of incoming mail
Receive Option 160
144
Security Settings
※Refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”
To store/check safety information using i-mode
when a disaster occurs
i-mode Disaster Message
Board Service
※
To change the mail address Change Mail Address
To reject mail with URL Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mail with URL)
To accept or reject mail from the specified
domain
Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject/Receive Mail
Settings)
To accept or reject mail between i-mode mobile
phones only
To accept or reject mail from the specified
address
To set the recommended Spam Mail Prevention
easily
Spam Mail Prevention
(Easy Mail Setting)
To reject the 500th and succeeding i-mode mail
messages sent from a single i-mode phone on
the same day
Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mass i-mode Mail
Senders)
To reject SMS messages Spam Mail Prevention
(SMS Rejection Settings)
To reject advertising mail that is sent unilaterally Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail
To restrict the file size of incoming mail Limit Mail Size
To confirm the settings for the mail function Confirm Settings
To stop the mail function temporarily Suspend Mail
To check whereabouts of lost mobile phone Keitai-Osagashi Service
If you want Functions/Service name
Reference
page
Information
pThe priority order of functions simultaneously set to prevent nuisance calls is as
follows: “Nuisance Call Blocking Service” → “Call rejection” → “Reject unknown/Call
setting w/o ID” → “Ring time”.
145
Mail
i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-mail
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Compose Message> 146
Creating and Sending Deco-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Creating and Sending Decome-Anime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using a Template to Create Deco-mail/ Decome-Anime
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Template> 155
Attaching a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Attachments> 157
Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically . . . .<Mail Auto-receive> 159
Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively . . . . . . . <Receive Option> 160
Checking New i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . <Check New Message> 161
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reply> <Reply with Quote> 161
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Forward> 162
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/Pasted is Received . . . 162
Operating Mailbox
Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox/Draft
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft> 164
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display . . . . 166
Managing Mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Using Mail History
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Sent Address> <Received Address> 175
Configuring Mail Settings
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder . . . . . . <Auto-sort> 176
Creating Mail Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Mail Group> 178
Setting Mail and Messages R/F . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail Settings> 179
Using Message Services
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Receive Message R/F> 181
Reading Received Messages R/F . . . . <Display Message R/F> 182
Using Early Warning “Area Mail”
Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Receiving Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . <Area Mail Settings> 185
Using Chat Mail
Using Chat Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chat Mail> 185
Creating Chat Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chat Group> 189
Using SMS
Composing and Sending SMS . . . . . . . . . . . <Compose SMS> 190
Receiving SMS Automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Receive SMS> 191
Checking New SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Check New SMS> 191
Setting SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <SMS Settings> 192
Using Web Mail
Using Web Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Web Mail> 192
146
Mail
Once you subscribe to i-mode, you can exchange e-mails over the
Internet as well as among i-mode phones.
You can attach files (photos, movie files, etc.) within 2 Mbytes in total (up
to 10 files) besides mail text. The i-mode mail also supports Deco-mail, so
you can change the character color, character size, and background
color of mail text. Further, you can use the Deco-mail pictograms, so you
can easily send expressive messages.
pFor details on i-mode mail, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages.
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages to the Outbox.
See page 150 for creating a Deco-mail message.
1mMaill()
i-mode Mail
<Compose Message>
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
Message
Composition display
Address field
Subject field
Text field
(When you enter text, the
number of bytes is displayed.)
Attachment field
2Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or
mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press
Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press
Oo().
Mail group . . . . . . . . . Select a mail group.
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pIf the destination is an i-mode phone, you can send mail also by entering only the
part preceding the “@” mark of a mail address.
pSee page 147 for sending to multiple destination addresses.
pSee page 148 for deleting an added address.
3Select the subject fieldEnter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
4Select the attachment fieldSelect an item.
pSee page 157 for how to select an attachment.
5Select the text fieldEnter text.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pSee page 148 for pasting a header or signature.
6Press l().
The animation display during transmission appears and the mail message is sent.
pTo cancel sending midway, press Oo( ) or press and hold r(for at least
one second). However, the mail message might be sent depending on the timing.
Message Entry
display
147
Mail
7OK
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be displayed
correctly at the destination.
pIf you send an i-mode mail message with a pictograph entered to another carrier’s
mobile phone, the pictograph is automatically converted into a similar pictograph at
the receiving end. Depending on the model or function of the receiving end’s mobile
phone, however, the pictograph might not be correctly displayed or be converted into
a character or “=” when no corresponding pictograph is found.
pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the FOMA terminal’s storage
maximum, they will be overwritten from the oldest one. However, protected sent mail
messages cannot be overwritten.
pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when sent mail messages in the
Outbox are saved to the maximum and all of them are protected, when 20 draft mail
messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages,
and then operate again.
pWhen you select “Compose message” from the Function menu such as when
entering a phone number, the mail address is entered as a destination address if the
phone number and mail address are stored in a Phonebook entry. When multiple mail
addresses are stored in the Phonebook entry, the first mail address is entered.
pIf you try to send the mail whose address is a phone number headed by “184”/“186”,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send
the mail.
pWhen a destination phone number or mail address is stored in a Phonebook entry,
the name stored in the Phonebook entry is displayed in the address field.
pYou cannot send mail to the addresses that include a comma (,).
pYou can enter an address in the To, Cc and Bcc fields.
pIf a Phonebook entry with a secret code is set as a destination address, the secret
code will be automatically added at sending. Even if a secret code is set for the
Phonebook entry, however, it will not be added and the i-mode mail message will be
sent as ordinary one unless the destination address is a phone number or “phone
number@docomo.ne.jp”.
p
If you store the secret code and send mail to a mail address other than that of DOCOMO
mobile phones, you might not receive the error message for unknown address.
pThe recipients might not be able to receive the full length of the subject depending on
their phones.
pYou can send up to 2,000 full-pitch characters in text to the i-mode phone of the mova
service.
pEach line feed is counted as one full-pitch character, and a space is counted as one
full-pitch or half-pitch character.
pThe mail message you entered a Deco-mail pictogram becomes a Deco-mail
message.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose i-mode mail.
Function Menu of the Message Composition Display
Information
Send You can send the mail message.
Go to step 7 on page 147.
Preview Check the address, subject, text and attachments before
sending.
pYou can send the mail message by pressing l().
Save When composing or editing the mail, you can save it to the
Draft.
Operate receiver
Add receiver You can add multiple addresses in the address field to send
the same i-mode mail to multiple recipients simultaneously.
You can send the same mail to up to five addresses at the
same time.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address. . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Received address . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone
number.
pTo consecutively add addresses, select <Not entered> and
repeat the above operations.
pPress i( ) and select “Delete receiver” to delete
the selected mail address. Select “YES”.
pPress i( ) and select “Change rcv. type” to change
the type of mail. (See page 148)
pSelect an entered mail address on the Mail Composition
display to show the Address list.
l()
148
Mail
Delete receiver You can delete the selected address when there are multiple
addresses.
YES
Change rcv. type Select a type of address.
To . . . . . This is the direct destination address. “To” recipients
are displayed at the receiving ends.※
Cc . . . . . Specify to let parties know the mail contents in
addition to the direct recipients. “Cc” recipients are
displayed at the receiving ends.※
Bcc . . . . Specify to hide the recipients from others. “Bcc”
recipients are not displayed at the receiving ends.
※They might not be displayed depending on the mobile
phone, device, or mail software of the receiving end.
Operate att. file
Activate camera You can shoot and attach an image or i-motion movie.
Select a shooting mode.
pSee page 239 and page 241 for how to shoot.
Attach file See page 157.
Delete att. file See page 159.
Template
Load template You can read in a Deco-mail template and create a Deco-mail
message.
pWhen the text has already been entered, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to delete the text.
Select a template.
The contents of the template are entered into the text.
pWhile selecting a template, press l( ) to check the
contents of the template.
pSee page 150 for creating a Deco-mail message.
Save template You can save the Deco-mail message you are creating as a
template.
YES
pSee page 205 when templates are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 155 for how to check the stored template.
Add header/sig. You can paste a header/signature at the beginning or ending
of the text of the i-mode mail message.
Add header or Add signature
pYou need to store the header/signature beforehand. (See
page 180)
Information
<Operate receiver>
pYou cannot add any addresses if the address field for “To”, “Cc”, and “Bcc” already
contains five addresses in total or contains no addresses.
pYou cannot send i-mode mail if the “To” field is blank.
<Save template>
pThe subject of i-mode mail you are composing will be the title of the template. If no
subject is entered, the title takes the name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”.
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
<Add header/sig.>
pYou cannot paste a header/signature if the text, including the header/signature, would
exceed 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf the decoration such as font color or character size is set for the top or end of text, the
header or signature will be decorated as well.
Function Menu of the Message Entry Display
Decorate mail See page 151.
Template
Load template See page 148.
Save template See page 148.
Full pitch/Half pitch See page 432.
149
Mail
Copy See page 436.
Cut See page 436.
Paste See page 436.
Undo After entering or deleting characters, pasting data, or
operating on a decoration, you can undo your most recent
operation. You can do it up to twice.
pYou can undo the operation also by pressing and holding
d for at least one second.
Pictograph/symbols
Pictograph See page 433.
Symbols See page 433.
Smiley See page 433.
Space See page 433.
Phrase/quote
Common phrases See page 433.
Kuten code See page 433.
Input time See page 434.
Quote phonebook See page 434.
Quote own data See page 434.
Paste location
By position loc. You can obtain the location information by measuring the
current location (see page 328), convert that information
into the URL, and then paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Oo()YES
From loc. history You can convert the location information from Location
History (see page 337) into the URL, and paste it to the
i-mode mail text.
Select a location recordOo()YES
From phonebook You can convert the location information stored in the
Phonebook into the URL, and paste it to the i-mode mail
text.
Select a Phonebook entryOo()YES
From own number You can convert the location information stored in “Own
number” into the URL, and paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeOo()
YES
Bar code reader See page 248.
Character input
Own dictionary See page 436.
Learned words See page 437.
Change input mode See page 434.
Predict See page 432.
Candidate display See page 434.
Character set time See page 434.
2/NIKO-touch guide See page 434.
Help See page 434.
JUMP See page 434.
Preview You can check the contents of the text before sending.
pYou can preview also by pressing p.
Information
<Undo>
pOnce you use “Undo” to return to the previous status, you cannot cancel this by using
“Undo” again.
pIf you close the Message Entry display, you cannot return to the previous status by
using “Undo” when you re-open it. (However, after you have exited “Preview”, you can
return to the previous status by “Undo”.)
<Phrase/quote>
pYou can paste up to 512 half-pitch characters by Paste Location, and the pasted URL
is counted as the number of characters in the mail text.
p“ ” is inserted before the URL pasted by Paste Location. However, you can delete
it while editing.
150
Mail
When editing an i-mode mail message, you can change the size of the
font and the color of the background as well as inserting images, thus
composing your own original mail.
You can create Deco-mail also using the templates (patterns).
(See page 155)
1Perform the operations in step 1 through step 4 on
page 146.
2Select the text fieldDecorate the text using Palette.
pSee page 151 for how to use Palette.
dSelect one of decorationsEnter text.
Enter textd(Select area)
Go to “Select area” on page 152.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters. (The number of
characters you can enter decreases depending on the decoration.)
pOnce you decorate the mail text, “ ” appears.
pYou can preview the contents of the text by pressing p.
Press i( ) to finish previewing and return to the former display.
Creating and Sending Deco-mail
Entering characters
Activated
decoration
Preview
Font color
Font size
Swing
Moving
font effect
Word
alignment
Deco-mail
pictogram
Ticker
Blink
Background
color
Insert line
Insert image
To enter text after selecting decorations
To set decorations after entering text
3Press Oo().
The Message Composition display is displayed.
Go to step 6 on page 146.
You can decorate the text of i-mode mail using Palette.
You can set multiple decorations for one point.
pYou cannot combine Word Alignment, Ticker, and Swing for one point.
pLines are inserted by Line Insert with the color specified by Font Color.
pIf Word Alignment, Ticker, or Swing is specified, the images and moving font effects
are inserted with the specified state.
pYou can enter Deco-mail pictograms using “Insert image”, and by “Pictograph” on the
Function menu as well.
Information
pEven if you delete the decorated characters, only the decoration data remain and the
number of characters you can enter might decrease. Clear the decoration and then
delete the characters. If you delete the characters by pressing and holding
-r for at least one second, the characters as well as the decoration data are deleted.
pWhen you reply with quote to a received Deco-mail message or you forward it, the
decorations and inserted images are entered in text as they are.
pIf you use a template containing an image unable to attach to mail for sending, the
image is deleted.
pWhen you send a Deco-mail message in excess of 10,000 bytes, the mail message
with the URL for browsing is received at some destination i-mode phones. However,
only the mail text without the URL for browsing might be received at some models.
pDecorations might not be correctly displayed if you send/receive Deco-mail messages
to/from the devices such as personal computers.
pThe movement of Ticker/Swing, blink and animation playback stop when a certain
period has passed.
Decorations
151
Mail
■How to use Palette
Press d from the Message Entry display to display Palette.
pWhen the cursor is over the decorated character, the Palette
appears with the icon for the set decoration depressed.
Highlight the depressed icon and press Oo( ); then
you can change, complete or cancel the decoration. You can
release the area selection also by pressing r while the
area is selected.
pPress i( ) to close Palette. You can close Palette
also by pressing r while you are operating on it.
Switch operations
You can switch between the operation of Palette and the
operation of entering text, each time you press d. You can
move the cursor and enter text with Palette displayed.
pAfter you enter text, the text entry operation returns.
When you use Palette in succession, press d and operate it.
■How to operate Decoration
Palette operation
Insert image
Font effect You can convert characters to a mark and insert it into the
text. The mark animates in various ways and conveys your
feelings to the other party.
Select a moving font effectEnter text.
pTo delete the moving font effect, move the cursor to the
moving font effect and press r.
My picture You can insert the image stored in “My picture” into the text of
mail.
Select a folderSelect an image.
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and
press r.
Camera You can insert the image shot by the camera on the spot into
the text of mail.
Shoot a still image.
pThe image size of the camera is Sub-QCIF (96 x 128), QCIF
(144 x 176) or QVGA (240 x 320).
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and
press r.
pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 239 for how to shoot.
Font color You can change the color of characters and lines to be
entered.
Select a colorEnter text.
pYou can switch between “20 Color” and “256 Color” by
pressing l().
pIn the font color changing mode, “ ” is displayed at the
upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
Background color
You can change the background color of the mail text.
Select a color.
pYou can switch between “19 Color” and “256 Color” by
pressing l().
Insert line You can insert a horizontal line into the mail text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and the line is inserted.
pTo delete the line, move the cursor to the line and press r.
Undo You can return to the previous status of the set decoration.
You can do it up to twice.
pYou can undo the operation also by pressing and holding
d for at least one second.
Decorate all reset You can release all the decorations.
YES
pIf you have inserted an image, the message “In-line image is
deleted” is displayed.
152
Mail
Select area You can set Font Color, Blink, Font Size, Word Alignment,
Ticker and Swing over the selected text you have entered.
You can also change the set decoration, add another
decoration, or cancel Blink, Ticker or Swing.
Select a start point.
pYou can select all text by pressing i( ) and
selecting “YES”.
Select an end point.
Set, change, add or cancel each decoration.
p“ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display
during selecting decoration area.
<Set, change, or add decoration>
Select an icon and set, change, or add decorations.
pSelect another icon in succession to change the multiple
decorations or add decorations.
pWhen Blink, Ticker, or Swing has been set, reselect each
icon and complete decorations.
<Release Blink, Ticker, or Swing>
Select the icon for Blink, Ticker, or Swing
Select the same icon again.
Font size You can change the size of characters to be entered.
Select a font sizeEnter text.
pIn the font size changing mode, “ ” or “ ” is displayed at
the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
Select blink You can make characters to be entered blink.
Enter text.
The set characters are blinking.
pIn the blink setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right
of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset blink)
Select ticker You can make characters to be entered and images to be
inserted flow (moving from right to left).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed
before and after the cursor.
pIn the ticker setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper
right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset ticker)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
Select swing You can make characters to be entered and images to be
inserted swing (moving to left and right back).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed
before and after the cursor.
pIn the swing setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper
right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset swing)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
Word alignment You can change the position of characters to be entered and
images to be inserted.
Select a word alignmentEnter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and the alignment is
set.
pIn the word alignment setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the
upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
153
Mail
Information
<Insert image>
pYou can insert up to 20 types of images within 90 Kbytes in total. However, you can
insert up to 2 types of Flash movies. Even if the inserted images are 20 types or
fewer, the number of inserted images reaches maximum depending on the operation
and the confirmation display for re-editing appears.
pIf multiple same images are inserted, they are counted as a single type of file. If you
copy/paste the image already inserted, that image is regarded as the same image
and handled as a single type of file. However, if you insert the same Flash image, it is
handled as the second type of files.
pYou can apply Blink, Ticker, Swing, and Word Alignment to the inserted images,
however, you cannot apply them to Flash movies.
<Font color>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which another color is set, the setting
changes to that color.
pThe color for pictographs is also subjected to the specified font color. To restore the
color to ordinary one, select “指定なし/Default”.
pYou cannot change the color of Deco-mail pictograms.
<Background color>
pYou cannot change the background color when editing the header or signature.
<Font size>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which a different font size is set, the font
size is changed to that size of the character.
pYou cannot change the size of the Deco-mail pictogram.
<Select blink>
pYou cannot make Deco-mail pictograms blink.
Decome-Anime is a mail service which enables you to create expressive
mail messages which have Flash movies with messages and images,
using Decome-Anime templates.
You can create them using templates pre-installed or purchased on the
IPs (Information Providers) site.
1lCreate new Decome-Anime
2Perform the operations in step 2 through step 4 on
page 146.
Creating and Sending Decome-Anime
Edit Decome-Anime
display
Preview
Create Decome-Anime
display
154
Mail
3Select the text fieldPhone or microSD
Select a Decome-Anime template.
pWhen a Decome-Anime template is already selected, the Edit Decome-Anime
display appears. Go to step 4.
pYou can show the preview of the Decome-Anime template by pressing
l( ) from the Decome-Anime Template list.
pWhen you select a Decome-Anime template, “ ” appears.
pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you cannot edit contents.
pWhen you send the contents of the Decome-Anime template as they are, go to
step 5.
pYou cannot edit the Decome-Anime text when you re-edit it from the Draft or
Outbox or when you forward it from the Inbox.
4Select the contents field to be edited.
Select the character entry fieldEdit characters.
Select the image entry field
Select a folder, and select the image to be changed.
pYou can show the preview by pressing m( ) from the Edit
Decome-Anime display.
pWhen you enter characters, you cannot set decoration for them and cannot enter
Deco-mail pictograms. In addition, you cannot paste header or signature.
pWhen you insert a line feed in the middle of a line, the number of characters you
can enter decreases.
pWhen the total size of Decome-Anime template, characters, and images exceeds
90 Kbytes, you can no longer enter characters and images.
pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you might not be able to insert
images even if the total size is 90 Kbytes or less.
pAs the fonts and display position of images and characters are fixed, you cannot
edit them.
pDepending on the character entry field, 」 (red) which shows the line feed position
or (orange) which shows the nonenterable area may appear on the Character
Entry (Edit) display.
To edit characters
To change images
5l()
The editing of the Decome-Anime message is completed.
Go to step 6 on page 146.
Information
pYou cannot create a Decome-Anime message when sent mail messages in the
Outbox are saved to the maximum and all of them are protected, when 20 draft mail
messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
pThe images you can insert into Decome-Anime messages are GIF files (including
animation GIF), JPEG files, and SWF files.
pWhen animation GIF files or SWF files are inserted, the volume overflow for sending
might occur.
pEven when sending fails, you cannot re-edit it.
pIn the character entry field of some Decome-Anime templates, the text such as “使い
方 (how to use)” is pre-entered. Delete it before sending.
pWhen you send a Decome-Anime message, the mail message with the URL for
browsing is received at some destination i-mode phones. However, only the
Decome-Anime text without the URL for browsing might be received at some models.
pYou cannot use the received Decome-Anime message as a template.
Function Menu of the Create Decome-Anime Display
Send You can send the Decome-Anime message.
Go to step 7 on page 147.
Preview You can check the playback of Decome-Anime message before
sending.
pSee page 157 for how the Decome-Anime messages are
played back.
pPress i( ) to return to the Create Decome-Anime
display.
Save You can save the Decome-Anime message you are creating to
the Draft. After saving, you cannot re-edit the text of the
Decome-Anime message.
YES
Operate receiver See page 147.
Operate att. file See page 148.
155
Mail
Template You can read in a Decome-Anime template to create a
Decome-Anime message.
Phone or microSD
Select a Decome-Anime template.
Go to step 4 on page 154.
pIf any Decome-Anime template is selected, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to discard the current contents
to read in the new one.
Function Menu of the Edit Decome-Anime Display
Template See page 155.
Preview See page 154.
Delete You can delete the entered image. The image entry field
becomes blank.
Quit editing You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime message.
Go to step 6 on page 146.
The template is the form data in which text and images are inserted.
Deco-mail templates and Decome-Anime templates are available.
Besides pre-installed templates, you can download templates from sites
(see page 204). You can save the sent/received/created Deco-mail
messages as the Deco-mail templates (see page 148 and page 174). You
can edit the saved Deco-mail templates using Palette. You cannot edit the
Decome-Anime templates.
pYou can delete the pre-installed templates. You can re-download them from the
“P-SQUARE” site (see page 206). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM security function (see page 39) is set for them.
1lTemplateDecomailSelect a template.
pPress l( ) to
create a Deco-mail
message using the
contents of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 146.
pEven if you set “Header/
signature” to automatically
paste the header or
signature, you cannot paste
it.
pSee page 205 when you
select “Search by i-mode”.
<Template>
Using a Template to Create Deco-mail/
Decome-Anime
Deco-mail Template
Deco-mail Template
list
Detailed Deco-mail
Template display
156
Mail
Function Menu of the Deco-mail Template List
Compose message You can create a Deco-mail message using the contents of
the template.
Go to step 2 on page 146.
Sort You can change the order of displayed templates.
Select an order.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters.
Info You can display the file size, saved date and time of the
template, and whether it contains images.
No. of templates You can display the number of saved templates.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for templates to be deleted
l()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Function Menu of the Detailed Deco-mail Template Display
Compose message You can create a Deco-mail message using the contents of the
template.
Go to step 2 on page 146.
Edit You can edit the contents of the template and save it.
Edit the textOo()YES or NO
YES. . . . Overwrites and saves.
NO. . . . . Saves as a separate file.
pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 150 for how to edit the text.
pSee page 205 when the templates are stored to the maximum.
1lTemplateDecome-AnimePhone or microSD
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
2Select a template.
The preview of the template
is displayed.
pPress l( ) to
create the Decome-Anime
message with the template
contents. Go to step 2 on
page 153.
Save insert image You can save images inserted into the template or Deco-mail
text, and set them as the Stand-by display and Wake-up display.
Select an imageYESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 203.
pSee page 205 when images are stored to the maximum.
Information
<Edit>
pThe title name when saved as a separate file takes “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(Y: Year, M: Month, D: Date, h: hour, m: minute).
<Save insert image>
pDeco-mail pictograms are saved to the “お気に入り (Favorite)” folder in the
“Decomail-pictograph” folder.
Decome-Anime Template
Decome-Anime
Template list
Preview
157
Mail
The animation is played back automatically. The effect tones may sound and the FOMA
terminal may vibrate for some Decome-Anime messages. Further, you can operate from
the playback display or preview of some Decome-Anime messages by using Bo, Oo,
0 through 9, s, or a.
pPress m( ) to pause the animation and effect tone during playback. Press
m( ) again to resume the animation playback.
pThe effect tone sounds following the setting of “Auto melody play”. Each time you show
the preview from the Decome-Anime Template list, the effect tone sounds regardless
of the setting.
pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background.
pThe FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator” or “Manner mode
set”.
pSome Decome-Anime messages refer to the phone-information data in your FOMA
terminal. To permit the use of the information in your FOMA terminal, set “Use phone
information” of “i-mode settings” to “YES”. (“YES” is set at purchase.)
When you show the Decome-Anime Playback display or
preview
Function Menu of the Decome-Anime Template List
Create Decome-Anime You can create a Decome-Anime message using the contents
of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 153.
Preview You can display the preview of the Decome-Anime template.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Copy to microSD See page 372.
Copy to phone See page 373.
Info You can display the title, file name, format, and whether it set
with file restriction.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 386.
Send all Ir data See page 387.
transmission See page 388.
You can send an i-mode mail message with files attached.
You can attach following files:
・Still image ・Melody ・Movie/i-motion movie
・ToruCa file ・PDF file ・Phonebook entry ・Schedule event
・ToDo item ・Bookmark (i-mode, Full Browser) ・Word
・Excel ・PowerPoint ・SD other files
You can attach up to 10 files within 2 Mbytes in total.
pYou cannot attach files prohibited from being attached to mail or being output from the
FOMA terminal.
p
Regardless of the “File restriction” setting, you can attach the still image or movie/
i-motion movie shot with your FOMA terminal or the files received via infrared rays.
pWhen you attach a file, another attachment field appears on the Message Composition
display.
pDepending on the destination i-mode phone, only the compatible files are received
within the memory space of that phone.
pIt might take a time to send the i-mode mail depending on the size of attached files.
1Message Composition display
Select the attachment field
Do the following operations.
Delete
Delete this See page 156.
Delete selected See page 156.
Delete all See page 156.
<Attachments>
Attaching a File
Picture Select a folderSelect an image.
pSelect an attached image to display the image. Press r to
return to the former display.
Melody Select a folderSelect a melody.
pSelect an attached melody to play back the melody. Press any
key to stop the playback.
158
Mail
imotion Select a folderSelect an i-motion movie.
pSelect the attached i-motion movie to play back the i-motion
movie. Press r during playback or stop the playback to return
to the former display.
ToruCa When the ToruCa file is a ToruCa file (details), it is attached as a
ToruCa file (details).
Select a folderSelect a ToruCa file.
pSelect the attached ToruCa file to preview it. Press r to return
to the former display.
PDF Select a folderSelect a PDF file.
pSelect an attached PDF file to display the PDF file. Press r to
return to the former display.
Phonebook Select a search methodSelect a Phonebook entry
Oo()
pWhen you specified a search method last time, the Phonebook
entry is searched by that method.
pSelect the attached Phonebook entry to display details of the
Phonebook entry. Press i() or r to return to the
former display.
Schedule Select a dateSelect a schedule eventOo()
pSelect the attached schedule event to display details of the
schedule event. Press r to return to the former display.
ToDo Select a ToDo itemOo()
pSelect the attached ToDo item to display details of the ToDo
item. Press r to return to the former display.
Bookmark i-mode or Full BrowserSelect a bookmark.
pSelect the attached bookmark to display the title, address, and
others of the bookmark. Press i() or r to return to
the former display.
Document file You can attach a file of Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Other You can attach a file stored in “SD other files”.
Select a folderSelect a file.
2Go to step 2 on page 146.
Information
<Picture>
pThe images are not sent as the attachments to i-mode phones of the mova service;
they are in the form of URLs for browsing images and automatically attached with
expiry dates and can be obtained by selecting URLs. The mail text that can be sent to
an i-mode phone of the mova service is up to 184 full-pitch characters (369 bytes).
(When the acceptable number of characters of the mova phone is “250 full-pitch
characters”)
When multiple files are attached, the files are deleted and just the mail text is sent.
pThe i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF images.
pYou can attach a Flash movie as well.
pThe still image might not be received correctly or not be displayed or coarsely
displayed depending on the model at the receiving end.
<Melody>
pMelodies stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the melodies to the
FOMA terminal. (See page 375)
pIf the receiving end is other than P-01A, the sent melody might not be played back
correctly or the attachment might be deleted.
pYou cannot receive the attached melody on the i-mode phone of the mova service.
<imotion>
pSome i-motion movies cannot be attached to mail or their file sizes may become
larger or smaller.
pMovies stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the movies to the
FOMA terminal. (See page 375)
pDepending on the mobile phone of the receiving end, i-motion movies cannot be
correctly received/displayed, might become coarse, or might be converted into
consecutive still images.
When sending movies to other than the 2 Mbytes compatible model, it is advisable to
shoot them with the following settings:
File size setting: Mail restrict’n (S)
Image quality: Normal
<ToruCa>
pToruCa files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the ToruCa files to
the FOMA terminal. (See page 321)
159
Mail
You can delete a selected attached file or all attached files.
1Message Composition display i()
Operate att. fileDelete att. file
Delete this or Delete allYES
pTo delete a single file, highlight a file to be deleted.
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, you can receive i-mode
mail, SMS messages and SMS reports automatically. (See page 160 for
receiving i-mode mail after selecting it.)
When a mail message comes in, “ (pink)” appears at the top of the
display.
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
1When i-mode mail arrives, “ (pink)”
blinks and the receiving message is
displayed.
When receiving is completed, the display shows the
number of received i-mode mail messages and
Messages R/F.
pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.
pTo cancel receiving midway, select “Cancel” or press and hold r for at least
one second while “Mail Receiving...” is displayed. However, the mail message
might be received depending on the timing.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 30) appears on
the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.
pSee page 33 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
Delete Attached File
<Mail Auto-receive>
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pYou can automatically receive up to 100 Kbytes of an i-mode mail message including
attached files. You can manually obtain the attached files in excess of 100 Kbytes
from the i-mode Center. (See page 162)
pWhen the total number or size of received messages stored in the FOMA terminal has
reached the maximum, the mail messages will be overwritten in the priority order of
mail in the “Trash box” folder and older received mail. However, unread or protected
mail is not overwritten.
pWhen the total number of unread or protected mail messages in the Inbox has
reached the maximum, no new mail can be received and “ (dark blue)” is displayed.
To receive i-mode mail, delete received mail or read unread mail or release protection
of mail until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new message”.
pYou can receive i-mode mail with melodies, still images, or other files attached. You
can receive incompatible attached files but you cannot display them.
pWhen you receive mail from a device that can set To, Cc and Bcc, you can check
whether the message was sent to you as To, Cc or Bcc.
pMail Messages received in the following cases are held at the i-mode Center:
・When the power is off ・During a videophone call
・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area
・During infrared communication ・While connecting to the FirstPass center
・During PushTalk communication ・During Omakase Lock
・During iC communication ・While copying to the microSD card
・While connecting to the Data Storage Center
・When the space of the Inbox is full with protected or unread messages
pWhen i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, “ (pink)” appears, and
when they are held to the maximum, “ (dark blue)”, appears.
160
Mail
1Reception Result displayMail
Select an i-mode mail message to be
displayed.
pFor a Decome-Anime message, the Decome-Anime
Playback display appears. Press i( ) to show
the detailed display.
pPress and hold No for at least one second from the
detailed i-mode mail display to change the size of
characters. (See “Mail” on page 123.)
Display Newly Received i-mode Mail
Information
pUndisplayable characters are replaced by spaces, etc.
pWhen the number of characters in the text of received i-mode mail exceeds the
maximum, “/” or “//” is inserted at the end of the text and the excess part is deleted
automatically.
pThe still image automatically displayed at opening might not be correctly displayed.
When the image is larger than the screen size, it is displayed shrunk with a
proportional ratio retained.
pSome decorations inserted into the decorated mail (HTML mail) sent from a personal
computer might not be displayed correctly.
You can check the titles of i-mode mail messages held at the i-mode
Center and select them to receive, or delete them at the Center before
receiving.
To use this function, set “Receive option setting” to “ON” beforehand.
When “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot receive i-mode
mail messages automatically. When a mail message comes in the i-mode
Center, “ ” is displayed.
You can set whether to select and receive necessary i-mode mail only.
1lMail settingsReceive option settingON or OFF
1lReceive optionOperate following the procedure
described in “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “OFF”, the display to the effect that it will
be set to “ON” appears.
Press Oo( ) to set “Receive option setting”.
pYou can show the Receive Option display also by iiMenu
メニューリスト (Menu List)メール選択受信 (Receive Option).
<Receive Option>
Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively
Receive Option Setting
Select and Receive Mail Messages
Information
pEven when Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”, you will still receive all mail
messages if you execute “Check new message”. If you do not want to receive all mail
messages, remove a check mark from “Mail”. (See page 179)
pWhen you show the Receive Option display, the “ ” icon goes off. Also, the “ ” icon
goes off if you turn the power off or show the mail display.
pYou cannot select SMS messages for receiving.
161
Mail
i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F arriving at the i-mode Center
are automatically sent to your FOMA terminal. However, the messages
will be held at the i-mode Center if your FOMA terminal cannot receive
mail because it is turned off or out of the service area, or when Receive
Option Setting is set to “ON”.
When “ (pink)” is displayed, receive mail by checking the i-mode Center.
See “Receive option” when “ ” is displayed.
1mMailCheck new message
“ (pink)” and “ (yellow)/ (yellow)” blink, the message “Checking...” is
displayed, and then you receive i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F.
As the checking results, the number of newly received i-mode mail messages and
Messages R/F is shown.
pYou can operate this also by pressing and holding l for at least one second
from the vertical Stand-by display.
pYou can also execute “Check new msg.” during a voice call by pressing
i().
pTo cancel receiving midway, press and hold r for at least one second.
However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing.
<Check New Message>
Checking New i-mode Mail
Information
pWhen icons such as “ (dark blue)”, “ (dark blue)/ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”
are displayed, the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more i-mode mail messages or
Messages R/F. Delete unnecessary mail and messages, or read unread mail and
messages, or release protection. (Read and unprotected mail and messages are
overwritten automatically from the oldest one.)
pEven when i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, the “ (pink)” icon to
that effect, or the “ (dark blue)” icon telling that messages are held to the maximum
at the i-mode Center might not appear. (This happens if mail arrives at the Center
when, for instance, your FOMA terminal is off.)
pYou can select items to be checked by “Set check new message”.
pYou cannot use this function to receive SMS messages. Use “Check new SMS” to
receive them.
By “Rep.w/ i-mode mail”, you can reply with a normal i-mode mail
message, and by “Rep. w/ Deco-Anime”, you can reply with a
Decome-Anime message. By “Reply with quote”, you can quote the text
of your received i-mode mail to reply. You cannot use “Reply with quote”
for Decome-Anime messages and SMS messages.
1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi()
Reply/forwardRep.w/ i-mode mail, Rep. w/
Deco-Anime or Reply with quote
pPress l( ) to reply by i-mode mail.
pIf other recipients of the simultaneous mail are found, you can choose whether to
reply to the sender only or to all addresses.
Select “To sender” or “To all”.
pJust one quotation mark (see page 180) is added to the beginning of the text in
the i-mode mail to be replied with quote.
2Enter a subject and text, and then send.
When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 3 on page 146.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 3 on page 190.
After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.
<Reply> <Reply with Quote>
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
Information
pFor the sender’s address that cannot be replied to (such as when the mail address
exceeds 50 half-pitch characters), “ ” is displayed.
p“Re:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be replied or replied with a
quotation. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess is deleted.
(When “Re:” has already been prefixed, it changes to “Re2:” and will be counted up to
“Re99:”.)
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your reply.
Also, you cannot quote it when using the DOCOMO keitai datalink or infrared
communication function. See page 167 for pasted data.
pIf the Deco-mail text contains images prohibited from being attached to mail or being
output from the FOMA terminal, such images will be deleted when you reply.
162
Mail
You can forward the i-mode mail or SMS messages to others.
1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi()
Reply/forwardForward
pYou can forward also by pressing m( ) from the Inbox list.
2Enter an address and send the mail.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message or a Decome-Anime message,
go to step 2 on page 146.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 190.
After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.
<Forward>
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail
Information
p“Fw:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be forwarded. When the subject
exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess is deleted. (When “Fw:” has already
been prefixed, it changes to “Fw2:” and will be counted up to “Fw99:”.)
pWhen you forward an i-mode mail message with a file you have not obtained yet, the
file information is deleted.
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your
forwarding mail. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DOCOMO keitai datalink or
infrared communication function. See page 167 for pasted data.
pWhen a mail message is forwarded and a ToruCa file (details) that contains data
whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited is attached to the mail message,
the attached file returns to a ToruCa file before receiving details.
pWhen a mail message on the microSD card is forwarded, the attached file is deleted.
pWhen you “Forward” a mail/SMS message received to Address B/Number B in Dual
Mode of 2in1, the sent mail message is retained in the Outbox or Draft, even if you
switch to A Mode.
You can receive up to 2 Mbytes of the attached files on your FOMA
terminal. However, if attached files exceed 100 Kbytes, only information
of all or part of attached files are received. You need to obtain attached
files again from the i-mode Center.
The FOMA terminal supports following files:
・Still image ・Melody ・Movie/i-motion movie
・PC movie ・ToruCa file ・PDF file ・Phonebook entry
・Schedule event ・ToDo item ・Bookmark (i-mode, Full Browser)
・Word ・Excel ・PowerPoint
You cannot play back or display the files other than above. You can save
them to any folder in “SD other files”, or use the i-mode mail to forward
them.
You can use “Attachment preference” to select the files to be received.
pWhen multiple data items are pasted, they might not be displayed.
You can obtain the receive option attached files held at the i-mode
Center.
1Detailed Received Mail display
Select an attached file which has not
been obtained.
After obtaining is completed, files are played back/
displayed.
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/
Pasted is Received
Obtain Receive Option Attached Files
Information
pYou cannot obtain the attached files when the unused memory space in the Inbox is
smaller than the files.
163
Mail
You can play back or display the attached/pasted files already obtained.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
displaySelect an attached file.
The file is played back or displayed.
pFor a PC movie or document file, the confirmation display appears telling that you
cannot play it back/display it. Play it back/display it after saving it to the microSD
card.
pFor the files which are not supported by the FOMA terminal, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to save them.
pWhen Phonebook entry, schedule event, ToDo item, and bookmark including
multiple data is attached, you can display only the first attached data.
Play Back/Display Attached or Pasted Files
Information
pWhen the sender’s device is other than P-01A, the received melodies might not be
played back correctly.
pWhen the first attached file is an obtained still image, that still image only is
automatically displayed when the mail message is opened. The size of a still image
displayed automatically is up to 5M (1944 x 2592) size.
pWhen the image size is larger than the screen, it is displayed shrunk.
pYou cannot play back a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pYou cannot play back a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pYou cannot display a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in
excess of 100 Kbytes.
You can save the attached or pasted files that you have obtained. You
can set some files for a ring tone, or an image on the Stand-by display,
Wake-up display, or other displays.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
display/Detailed Message R/F display
Highlight an attached file and press i()
Operate fileSave attached fileYES
pPC movies are saved to the destination folder in “microSD” folder of “PC Movie”.
pDocument files are saved to the destination folder in “Document viewer”.
pThe files not supported by the FOMA terminal are saved to the destination folder
in “SD other files”.
pEven if the files are supported by the FOMA terminal, some of them cannot be
saved to the FOMA terminal depending on the file such as an invalid data file or
whose size is too large. In that case, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to save it to the microSD card. When you save it, it is saved to a
destination folder in “SD other files”.
pThe confirmation display might appear telling that a part of the file cannot be
saved depending on the attached file.
2Select a destination or folder to save to.
For melodies, go to step 3 on page 205.
For still images, go to step 3 on page 203.
pBookmarks are saved according to each information of i-mode or Full Browser.
pIf the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or
there is no usable memory space when you save SD other files, PC movies, or
document files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
unnecessary files to save new files. Select “YES”, and select unnecessary files
from the displayed list in Data Box to delete them. See page 205 when files other
than SD other files, PC movies, or document files are stored to the maximum.
Save Attached or Pasted Files
164
Mail
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
You can save up to 30 Area Mail messages separately from i-mode mail
messages and SMS messages.
You can check the received i-mode mail messages, SMS messages, and
Area Mail messages.
pWelcome mail messages have been saved by default.
1lInboxSelect a folder.
pSee page 182 for displaying Messages R/F.
Information
pYou cannot save a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot save a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot save a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess
of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
<Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft>
Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox/Draft
Display Mail from Inbox
Inbox Folder list
2Select a mail message.
pWhen you select an unread
mail message, “ (pink)”
changes to “ ”.
pFor a Decome-Anime
message, the
Decome-Anime Playback
display appears. Some
Decome-Anime messages
are played back repeatedly.
Press i( ) to
show the detailed Received
Mail display. See page 157
for how the Decome-Anime
messages are played back.
pUse No to check other
mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message
from the detailed Received Mail display, the Decome-Anime Playback display
does not appear.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Further, you
can press m()/c() or >/< to scroll page by page. You
cannot scroll the Decome-Anime messages.
Inbox list Detailed Received
Mail display
Information
pYou are not charged a communication fee for welcome mail messages.
pYou cannot reply to welcome mail messages.
pThe attached melody, effect tone of the Flash movie in mail text, and effect tone of
Decome-Anime text sound following the setting of “Auto melody play”. However,
when a mail message with an attached melody includes the effect tone of the Flash
movie in mail text or effect tone of Decome-Anime text, the melody is preferentially
played back. The effect tone does not sound.
pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background.
165
Mail
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
You can check the sent i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.
1lOutboxSelect a folder.
2Select a mail message.
pFor a Decome-Anime
message, the
Decome-Anime Playback
display appears. Press
i( ) to show the
detailed Sent Mail display.
See page 157 for how the
Decome-Anime messages
are played back.
pUse No to check other
mail messages. When you
press No to show the
Decome-Anime message
from the detailed Sent
Mail display, the
Decome-Anime Playback display does not appear.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Further, you
can press m()/c() or >/< to scroll page by page. You
cannot scroll the Decome-Anime messages.
Display Mail from Outbox
Outbox Folder list
Outbox list Detailed Sent Mail
display
Information
pThe effect tone of the Decome-Anime text sounds following the setting of “Auto
melody play”.
pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background.
You can edit and send i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the
Draft. You can save up to 20 i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
1lDraft
2Select a mail message.
When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 2 on page 146. When you have
selected an Decome-Anime message, go to step 2 on page 153. When you have
selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 190.
Display Mail from Draft
Draft list
Information
pWhen you select the i-αppli mail folder, the mail-linked i-αppli that supports the folder
starts.
166
Mail
■Mail menu
Icons might have the following marks:
■Inbox Folder list
Folder status
“ ” appears when unread messages are found,
and “ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.
Folder name
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and
Detailed Display
Unread mail messages or messages are
stored in the Inbox.
Failed-to-send mail messages are stored in the
Outbox.
Draft mail messages are stored in the Draft.
“Mail security” is activated. (displayed also for
chat mail)
Ordinary folder
i-αppli mail folder
Message R folder
Message F folder
Trash box folder
■Inbox list and detailed Received Mail display
Mail status and type
“ ” appears when protection is set.
Received date and time
The Inbox list shows the time for the mail received today, and shows the date for the
mail received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail
was received. The Japanese date and time the mail was received from the Center is
displayed.
Phone number or mail address of the sender or of another recipient of simultaneous mail
(pink) Unread mail
Read mail
Forwarded mail
Replied mail
Type of the received mail (Detailed display only)
Sender’s mail address (Detailed display only)
Sender’s mail address that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only)
Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail (Detailed display only)
Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail that cannot be
replied to (Detailed display only)
Inbox list
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
Inbox list
For “Date+subject”
Detailed Received
Mail display
167
Mail
Subject
When “Mail list display” is set to “Date+sender/receiver subject”, the subject is
displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to “Date+subject”, it is
displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with
files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is
added at the top.
For SMS messages or Area Mail messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(“SMS” or “Area Mail” is displayed on the detailed display.)
In Dual Mode of 2in1, “ ” is displayed at the end of the subject or sender’s address
of i-mode mail messages/SMS received to Address B/Number B.
Attached or pasted data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Inbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Received Mail display>
“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).
(blue) SMS messages in the
FOMA terminal
SMS messages on the UIM
Area Mail
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file (List only)
i-motion movie file
PC movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
Attached file before obtaining
(Detailed display only)
Attached file suspended to be
obtained (Detailed display only)
Attached file failed to be
obtained (Detailed display only)
i-αppli start information
(List only)
i-αppli mail (List only)
Multiple files (List only)
Multiple pasted files
File with the UIM security
<For Inbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Feel＊Mail icon
When you press c( ) from Inbox list, the Feel＊Mail image is played back.
See page 181 for Feel＊Mail.
Text of mail
■Outbox Folder list
Folder status
“ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.
Folder name
Ordinary folder
i-αppli mail folder
Attached file
i-αppli mail
File with the UIM security
168
Mail
■Outbox list and detailed Sent Mail display
Mail status
“ ” appears when protection is set.
Sent date and time
The Outbox list shows the time for the mail sent today, and shows the date for the mail
sent until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was sent.
“ ” appears when the date/time is corrected.
Recipient’s phone number or mail address
(pink) Mail successfully sent
Mail failed to be sent
Simultaneous mail successfully sent to all addresses
(gray) Simultaneous mail sent to some addresses
(pink) Simultaneous mail failed to be sent to all addresses
Mail address successfully sent (Detailed display only)
Mail address failed to be sent (Detailed display only)
Outbox list
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
Outbox list
For “Date+subject”
Detailed Sent Mail
display
Subject
When “Mail list display” is set to “Date+sender/receiver subject”, the subject is
displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to “Date+subject”, it is
displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with
files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is
added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (“SMS” is displayed on the
detailed display.)
Attached data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Outbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Sent Mail display>
“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).
<For Outbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Text of mail
(blue) SMS messages in the
FOMA terminal
SMS messages on the
UIM
SMS report received [List
(Date+sender/receiver
subject) and detailed
display only]
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file (List only)
i-motion movie file
PC movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
i-αppli mail (List only)
Multiple files (List only)
File with the UIM security
Attached file
i-αppli mail
File with the UIM security
169
Mail
■Draft list
Mail status
Saved date and time
The Draft list shows the
time for the mail saved
today, and shows the date
for the mail saved until
yesterday. “ ” appears
when the date/time is
corrected.
Recipient’s phone
number or mail address
When the phone number or mail address is stored in the Phonebook, the name stored
in the Phonebook is displayed.
Subject
When “Mail list display” is set to “Date+sender/receiver subject”, the subject is
displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to “Date+subject”, it is
displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with
files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is
added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(pink)
Ordinary mail
Simultaneous
mail
(blue) SMS messages
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
For “Date+subject”
Attached data
<For Date+sender/receiver subject>
<For (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Text of mail
Attached file
File with the UIM security
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file
i-motion movie file
PC movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
Multiple files (List only)
File with the UIM security
Information
pSee “Mail list display” on page 179 to change a method to display the Inbox/Outbox/
Draft list.
pWhen “Name in phonebook” of “Mail list display” is checked, the name stored in the
Phonebook is displayed as sender or recipient. However, when the sender’s mail
address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, the name is not displayed even when
“phone number@docomo.ne.jp” is stored in the mail address field in a Phonebook
entry. Store the phone number part only to display the name. When a sender’s/
recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry stored as
secret data, the name is not displayed. It is displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data
Only.
Even when a sender’s/recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a
Phonebook entry not stored as secret data, the name is not displayed in Secret Data
Only. Switch to Secret Mode or release Secret Data Only to display the name.
pWhen “Message” of “Mail list display” is not checked, the text does not appear on the
Inbox/Outbox/Draft list.
170
Mail
Managing Mail Messages
Function Menu of the Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder You can add a new folder. You can add up to 22 folders to
each of “Inbox” and “Outbox”.
Enter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Edit folder name You can edit the names of the added folders only.
Edit the folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Sort folder You can sort folders. You can sort the added folders,
Message R/F folder, and the i-αppli mail folders.
Use Bo to sort the orderOo()
Delete folder All the mail messages including secret mail in the folder will be
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Open folder You can display the mail messages in the i-αppli mail folder
without running mail-linked i-αppli.
Read all
[Inbox Folder only]
You can change unread mail in the folder to already-read mail.
YES
Sort
Re-sort in this You can resort mail messages following the sorting conditions
specified by “Auto-sort”.
YES
pWhen the folder is applied with Mail security (see page 170),
you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Re-sort in all You can resort mail messages in all Inbox/Outbox folders
following the sorting conditions specified by “Auto-sort”.
YES
pWhen the folder applied with Mail security (see page 170) is
found, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Auto-sort See page 176.
Mail security You can set the folder to open only when you enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
Ir/ transmission
Send all Ir data See page 387.
All transmission See page 389.
No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail
messages, Messages R/F, and sent mail messages.
Delete
DEL all read mails
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the read mail messages including secret
mail in all Inbox folders. All the read SMS messages on the
UIM are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all recv. mails
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in
all Inbox folders. All the received SMS messages on the UIM
are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all sent mails
[Outbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in
all Outbox folders. All sent SMS messages on the UIM are
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
171
Mail
Information
<Delete folder>
pYou cannot delete an i-αppli mail folder if corresponding mail-linked i-αppli exists.
If the software program does not exist, you can delete the i-αppli mail folder, but this
will delete both folders created in the Outbox Folder list and Inbox Folder list.
<Re-sort in this> <Re-sort in all>
pYou cannot re-sort the mail messages in the “Chat” folder and “Trash box” folder.
pMail messages which are not applied to the sorting conditions are sorted into the
“Inbox” or “Outbox” folder.
<Mail security>
pYou can neither delete the Mail-Security-activated folder nor edit its name.
Function Menu of the Inbox List/Outbox List/Draft List
Reply/forward
Rep.w/ i-mode mail
[Inbox only]
See page 161.
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime
[Inbox only]
See page 161.
Reply with quote
[Inbox only]
See page 161.
Forward
[Inbox only]
See page 162.
Edit
[Outbox only]
You can re-edit the sent mail message and send it again.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to
step 2 on page 146.
When you have selected a Decome-Anime message, go
to step 2 on page 153.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2
on page 190.
Protect
Protect ON/OFF
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can protect the mail message so that it is not
overwritten and deleted. You can protect all the received
and sent messages. (2,500 received messages, 1,000
sent messages)
The protected one is indicated by “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
pYou can switch between protected and unprotected also
by pressing 1 from the detailed Received Mail display
or detailed Sent Mail display.
ProtectSLCT. ON/OFF
[Inbox/Outbox]
Put/Remove a check mark for mail messages to be
protected/unprotectedl()
pA check mark is placed to the mail already protected.
Move/copy
Move
[Inbox/Outbox]
Select a destination folder
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved
l()YES
Move to trash
[Inbox only]
You can move mail messages to the “Trash box” folder.
The mail messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are
preferentially overwritten (deleted).
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved to
the trash boxl()YES
UIM operation
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can copy or move the mail message to the UIM or
FOMA terminal. (See page 419)
Copy to microSD See page 372.
Store in Center See page 140.
Search/sort
Search mail
172
Mail
Search sender/
Search receiver
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a mail address or
phone number of a sender or recipient.
“Search sender” for received mail and “Search receiver” for
sent mail are displayed respectively.
Search sender or Search receiverSelect an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and
select a phone number or mail
address.
Received address . . .Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Sent address . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Enter address. . . . . . .Enter the mail address or phone
number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
Search subject
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
Search
subject+msg
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject or text.
Enter a part of a subject or text.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
Sort
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can change the order of displayed mail messages.
Select an order.
Filter
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can display the mail messages only that satisfy the
condition.
Select a type.
Display all
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can re-display all mail messages in “By date↑” order
after using Search Mail, or the Sort or Filter function.
Mail history
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can display the history of sent/received mail from the
sender or to the recipient being selected or displayed. Up
to 1,000 histories are displayed in the chronological order
from the most recent one.
Select a sender’s or destination address.
The target sent/received mail histories are displayed.
. . . . .Sent mail
. . . . .Received mail
pSelect a history to show the detailed Received Mail
display or detailed Sent Mail display. Press r to return
to the former display.
pYou can display also by pressing 7 on the detailed
Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display.
Color label
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can color the characters on the Inbox list and Outbox
list for classifying mail. Select “Default” to set ordinary
character color.
Select a color.
List setting You can select the item to be displayed on the list. You can
also switch between the name stored in the Phonebook
and the mail address/phone number for the display in the
sender’s/destination address field.
You can set to list the mail messages by subject
depending on the setting of “Mail list display”.
Select an item to be displayed.
pYou can switch each time you press c() from
the Outbox list and Draft list.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 386.
Send all Ir data
[Draft only]
See page 387.
transmission See page 388.
All transmission
[Draft only]
See page 389.
173
Mail
No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail
messages, sent mail messages and draft mail messages.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for mail messages to be deleted
l()YES
Delete read mails
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the read mail messages in the folder.
YES
Delete all SMS-R
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the SMS reports. While SMS reports are
displayed by the Search Mail function or Filter function,
only the displayed SMS reports are deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all frm folder
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can delete all mail messages in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete all
[Draft only]
You can delete all the draft mail messages.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Edit>
pTo use “Mail group” for destination addresses, delete all the entered addresses, press
+l( ) to complete the deletion, and then re-select the address field.
<Protect>
pYou cannot protect mail messages in the “Trash box” folder.
pIf you protect all the sent messages which are stored to the maximum, you can no
longer compose i-mode mail messages.
<Move to trash>
pIf you move unread mail to the Trash box, it changes to read mail.
<Search/sort>
pEven if you set “No title” for “Search subject” of “Search mail”, you cannot search for
the i-mode mail whose subject is not entered and displayed as “No title”.
<Color label>
pColor Label applied to the mail messages is released when they are copied to the
microSD card, copied/moved to the UIM, copied/moved from the UIM or sent via
infrared rays or iC transmission.
pColor Label applied to the SMS messages on the UIM is released when the UIM is
dismounted and then mounted.
Function Menu of the Detailed Received Mail Display/
Detailed Sent Mail Display
Information
Reply/forward
Rep.w/ i-mode mail
[Received Mail only]
See page 161.
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime
[Received Mail only]
See page 161.
Reply with quote
[Received Mail only]
See page 161.
Forward
[Received Mail only]
See page 162.
Edit
[Sent Mail only]
See page 171.
Resend
[Sent Mail only]
You can re-send the sent mail message.
YES
Protect ON/OFF See page 171.
Move/copy
Copy Select an item to be copied.
pSee page 436 for how to copy.
pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient of
simultaneous mail are found or the multiple destination
addresses are found, select a mail address or phone
number to be copied.
Move Select a destination folder.
174
Mail
Move to trash
[Received Mail only]
You can move the mail to the “Trash box” folder. The mail
messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are preferentially
overwritten (deleted).
YES
UIM operation You can copy or move the mail to the UIM or FOMA terminal.
(See page 419)
Copy to microSD See page 372.
Store in Center See page 140.
Operate file
Save attached file See page 163.
Save insert image See page 156.
Save D-pictograph
[Received Mail only]
You can save Deco-mail pictograms in the mail text at once.
You can save up to 20 of them.
YES
pSee page 205 when the Deco-mail pictograms are stored to
the maximum.
pSee page 346 for how to check the stored Deco-mail
pictograms.
Save as template You can save the sent/received Deco-mail message as a
template.
YES
pSee page 205 when the templates are stored to the
maximum.
pSee page 155 for how to check the stored template.
Property You can display the file name and file size of the image
inserted into the text.
Select an image.
Delete att. file YES
Store
Store address See page 94.
Add to phonebook See page 94.
Auto-sort You can store a sender or subject as a sort condition.
(See page 176)
Add desktop icon See page 31.
Mail history See page 172.
Color label See page 172.
Display
Name/address You can display the sender’s/destination address by the name
stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address/phone
number.
pYou can switch also by pressing 5.
Scroll See page 179.
Character size See “Mail” on page 123.
Display SMS report
[Sent Mail only]
You can check the result of the SMS message you sent, or
the date and time it arrived at the destination. To receive the
SMS report, set “SMS report request” to “ON”.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 386.
transmission See page 388.
Delete YES
pYou can delete the mail message also by pressing 0.
Information
<Resend>
pIf you re-send a failed-to-send mail message, it is saved as the sent mail message. If
you re-send the failed-to-send simultaneous message to all addresses, it is saved as
the sent mail message.
175
Mail
Sent and received i-mode mail messages and SMS messages are stored
in Sent Address and Received Address, up to 30 messages each. You
can check the list for the mail addresses and phone numbers. When you
exchange mail messages with the same mail address or phone number,
the older one is deleted.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 60 records for Address A/Number A and Address B/
Number B are stored in Received Address in total.
1Press and hold Vo for at least one
second.
: i-mode mail successfully sent
: SMS message successfully sent
: i-mode mail failed to be sent
: SMS message failed to be sent
: Time-difference corrected time
pPress m( ) from the Sent Address list to display Redial. When the Sent
Address list is displayed from Dialed Calls, you can press m( ) to display
Dialed Calls.
pYou cannot display the Sent Address list even by pressing and holding Vo for at
least one second from the horizontal Stand-by display.
Press and hold Co for at least one
second.
: i-mode mail
: SMS message
: Time-difference corrected time
: i-mode mail message/SMS received to Address B/
Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pPress m( ) from the Received Address list to display Received Calls.
pYou cannot display the Received Address list even by pressing and holding Co
for at least one second from the horizontal Stand-by display.
<Sent Address> <Received Address>
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
When Using Sent Address
When Using Received Address
Sent Address list
Received Address
list
2Select a record to be displayed.
The detailed display of the Address list is displayed.
pWith an SMS message for which the other party’s phone number is not notified,
the reason for no caller ID is displayed.
pTo send i-mode mail to the displayed address, press Oo( ) and go to
step 3 on page 146. To send an SMS message to the displayed phone number,
press Oo( ) and go to step 3 on page 190.
pTo store in the Phonebook, press m( ). Go to step 2 of “Storing
Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook” on page 95.
Function Menu while Sent/Received Address is Displayed
Add to phonebook See page 94.
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message. The mail address
is entered in the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 146.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message. The phone number is
entered into the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 190.
Dialing If the mail address has been stored in a Phonebook entry, you
can make a voice call, videophone call or PushTalk call to the
phone number stored in the Phonebook.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to be sent
to the other party during a videophone call. To cancel the
setting, select “Release”.
pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook
entry, you can dial the first phone number.
Dial
pThe set item is indicated by “★”.
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”, select
an international call access code, and follow the procedure
above after selecting “Dialing” from the Function menu. (See
page 61)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See
step 2 of “Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call” on
page 58)
176
Mail
You can automatically save the mail messages that satisfy the set
conditions to the specified folder. This function applies to only the added
folders and i-αppli mail folders.
1Inbox Folder list/Outbox Folder listi()Sort
Auto-sort
Follow the operation of the Function menu list on page 177 to set “Auto-sort”.
If you select a folder for which Auto-sort conditions have been set, the Auto-sort
Setting display appears.
Feel＊Mail
[Received Address only]
The Feel＊Mail image is played back. See page 181 for Feel
＊Mail.
pYou can play back the Feel＊mail image also by pressing
c().
Character size You can switch the character size for Redial, Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, Sent Address, and Received Address. (See
“Dialed/recv. calls” on page 123)
Redial/Dialed calls
[Sent Address only]
You can display the Redial list or the Dialed Call list.
Received calls
[Received Address only]
You can display the Received Call list. All received calls (all
calls) are displayed.
Add desktop icon See page 31.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for records to be deleted
l()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Auto-sort>
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder
You can specify a sort condition and folder from the detailed Sent/
Received Mail display.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
displayi()StoreAuto-sort
Do the following operations.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition or to overwrite
it. Select “YES” to release the set condition and set the new one.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition. Select “YES”
to release the condition set for another folder and to set it for the selected folder.
pYou cannot change the setting for a Mail-Security-activated folder.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to add the address.
Auto-sort Storing
Address sort You can set the displayed sender’s/recipient’s address for a
sorting condition.
Select a folder.
pWhen multiple addresses are found, select an address.
Subject sort You can edit the displayed subject and set it for a sorting
condition.
Edit the subjectSelect a folder.
To change the condition
When the same condition is set for another folder
When storing another address for the folder set for “Address
sort”
Information
pYou can store a total of 700 addresses in all folders.
177
Mail
pWhen multiple conditions match, sorting is done in the priority below.
Sort all
Subject sort
Reply impossible/Send impossible
Address sort (Look-up address/Enter address)
Address sort (Look-up mail group)
Address sort (Look-up group)
pMail messages sent simultaneously to multiple members cannot be sorted by
“Address sort” or “Send impossible”.
pArea Mail messages are not sorted by “Address sort”.
Function Menu of the Auto-sort Setting Display
Information
Address sort
Look-up address You can look up a mail address or phone number in the
Phonebook or Received/Sent Address and set it to the folder
for sorting.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Received address . . .Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Sent address . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Look-up group You can set a group to be sorted into the folder.
Select a group.
Look-up mail group You can set a mail group to be sorted into the folder.
Select a mail group.
Enter address You can directly enter a mail address or phone number to be
sorted into the folder.
Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”,
enter the phone number only. You can sort SMS messages
as well if you enter the phone number only.
Subject sort You can enter the subject of i-mode mail messages to be
sorted into the folder. One subject can be set per folder.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Reply impossible You can set reply-disabled mail messages to be sorted. You
can set for only one folder.
Send impossible You can set failed-to-send mail messages to be sorted. You
can set for only one folder.
Sort all You can sort all mail messages into the i-αppli mail folder. You
can set for only one i-αppli mail folder each in the Inbox and
Outbox. When “Sort all” is set, other sort settings are disabled.
YES
Edit addr/subj You can edit and store the mail address, phone number, and
subject set for the folder.
Edit the mail address, phone number or subject.
List setting You can switch whether to display the destinations by the
name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address or
phone number.
Name or Address
pYou can switch also by pressing c().
Release
Release this You can release the sort condition. (The item is deleted from
the Auto-sort Setting display.)
YES
178
Mail
Release selected You can select mail addresses or phone numbers, and
release the sort condition for them. (The items are deleted
from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Put a check mark for mail addresses or phone numbers
to be releasedl()YES
Release all You can release all sort conditions. (The items are deleted
from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
YES
Information
<Look-up group>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the name.
pYou cannot set groups on the UIM.
pThe secret mail messages received in ordinary mode (not in “Secret mode” or “Secret
data only”) are not sorted into the folder.
<Look-up mail group>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the mail group name.
<Subject sort>
pWhen the subject matches sort conditions for multiple folders, it is sorted to the folder
nearest to the “Inbox” folder or “Outbox” folder.
pEven if you set “No title”, the i-mode mail titled with “No title” because of no entry
cannot be sorted.
pSMS messages cannot be sorted by subject.
<Sort all>
pYou cannot sort SMS reports or SMS messages that have been directly received on
the UIM.
You can store mail addresses by group. You can send mail to regular
destinations.
You can store up to five addresses per group, and up to 20 groups.
1mPhonebookPhonebook
settingsMail group
Select a Mail group to be stored.
pWhen mail addresses are stored in a Mail group,
“ ” appears at the lower left of the display. Press l( ) to compose
i-mode mail to a selected Mail group set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 146.
2Highlight <Not stored> and press
l().
pIf you select a stored mail address, the Mail Group
Address Confirmation display appears.
3Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
When you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.
+m-2-6
<Mail Group>
Creating Mail Group
Mail Group list
Detailed Mail Group
display
Function Menu of the Mail Group List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to the Mail group.
Go to step 3 on page 146.
Edit group name Enter a name of the Mail group.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Reset group name You can reset the name of Mail group to the default.
YES
179
Mail
1lMail settingsDo the following operations.
Function Menu of the Detailed Mail Group Display/Mail
Group Address Confirmation Display
Edit address Go to step 3 on page 178.
pYou can edit the address also by pressing l().
Look-up address You can call up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Mail Settings>
Setting Mail and Messages R/F
Scroll You can set the number of lines that are scrolled at a time for
when you press Bo from the detailed mail display, detailed
Message R/F display, Message Composition display and preview
display.
Select the number of lines.
Character size See “Mail” on page 123.
Mail list display You can set items to be displayed on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list
by using radio buttons or check boxes.
Select a display formatl()
Message display You can set whether to display received mail in standard display
(from the top) or from the text.
Standard or From message
Mail security See page 137.
Secret mail display See page 137.
Auto color label You can specify the text color of the sender, received date/time
and others on the Inbox list by mail address. You can store up to
10 items.
<Not stored>Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Enter address. . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pTo change the set color, press i( ) and select “Select
color”.
pTo delete the set item, press i( ) and select “Delete”
→ “Delete this” or “Delete all” and select “YES”. If you select
“Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Select a color.
Pred. conv. at reply You can set whether to preferentially display the words contained
in the subject and text of the received mail message as
conversion candidates when you reply to, reply with quote to, or
forward it.
ON or OFF
Header/signature See page 180.
Set check new
message
You can select items to be checked from among i-mode mail,
Message R and Message F, for when you perform “Check new
message”.
Put a check mark for the items to be checked
l()
Auto-display See page 182.
180
Mail
Receiving display You can set whether to display the Message Receiving and
Reception Result displays, even during operation of another
function.
Alarm preferred or Operation preferred
Alarm preferred
. . .Prioritizes the Message Receiving and Reception Result
displays when you have new mail.
Operation preferred
. . . Prioritizes the display of the current operation when you have
new mail.
Receive option
setting
See page 160.
Attachment
preference
You can set whether to receive the attached file with an i-mode
mail message. The attached files for which you remove a check
mark are held at the i-mode Center. Even when you put a check
mark, if attached files exceed 100 Kbytes, all or part of attached
files are held at the i-mode Center.
Put a check mark for items to be receivedl()
pPut a check mark for “Tool data” to receive Phonebook entries,
schedule events, ToDo items, and bookmarks.
pPut a check mark for “Other” to receive PC movies, document
files, and files unsupported by the FOMA terminal.
Auto melody play You can set whether to play back the attached or pasted
melodies automatically for when you display the text of received
mail, or message R/F.
ON or OFF
Feel＊Mail settings See page 181.
Chat setting See page 188.
Check settings You can check each of “Mail settings”.
Information
<Message display>
pEven if “From message” is set, the message might not be displayed from the text
depending on the number of characters in the text.
<Auto color label>
pEven when you set this function, the text color of the mail message already received
does not change.
You can store a header, signature and quotation mark. Also, you can set
whether to automatically paste the header or signature.
1lMail settingsHeader/signature
Do the following operations.
<Set check new message>
p If you do not want to receive Messages R and Messages F by “Check new
message”, change these settings to “ ”.
<Auto melody play>
pYou cannot play back attached or pasted melodies during Play Background
regardless of the setting of “Auto melody play”.
Header/Signature
Information
Header The header is the sentence such as greeting at the beginning of
the text.
Select the header fieldEnter a headerl()
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pIf you do not want the header to be pasted automatically, select
“Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 148 for adding a
header by mail message.
Signature The signature is your name and other information, placed at the
end of the text.
Select the signature fieldEnter a signature
l()
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pIf you do not want the signature to be pasted automatically,
select “Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 148 for
adding a signature by mail message.
Quotation marks The quotation mark is the symbol indicating a quotation from
received mail for when you reply to mail.
Enter a quotation mark.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Information
pYou can set decorations in a header and signature.
pEven if you have put a check mark for “Insert”, the header and signature cannot be
pasted when you compose i-mode mail from a template or i-αppli.
181
Mail
The Feel＊Mail reproduces the atmosphere of a mail message by actions
of 45 types of animated characters. Once you activate Feel＊Mail, a
Feel＊Mail image is played back after you receive an i-mode mail/SMS
message.
pTo end the playback, press h or r.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, press p or </> to
end the playback of Feel＊Mail images on the Private
window.
1lMail settingsFeel＊Mail settings
Do the following operations.
pYou cannot paste the header, signature, and quotation marks to Decome-Anime
messages and SMS messages.
Feel＊Mail Settings
Information
Disp. /play new one A Feel＊Mail image is played back after you receive an i-mode
mail/SMS message.
ON or OFF
pWhen this function is set to “OFF”, a Feel＊Mail icon does not
appear on the Received Address list/Detailed Received
Address display, the Inbox list, and the detailed Received Mail
display even while “Disp. /play in history” is set to “ON”.
Disp. /play in
history
A Feel＊Mail icon appears on the Received Address list/Detailed
Received Address display, the Inbox list, or the detailed Received
Mail display.
ON or OFF
Message services automatically deliver information you want to your
FOMA terminal.
When your FOMA terminal is in the service area, it receives Messages R/
F automatically from the i-mode Center.
“ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” appears at the top of the display when a
Message R/F is delivered.
You can save up to 100 each of received Messages R/F.
1When you receive a Message R/F, the
“ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” blinks and
the message for receiving the Message
R/F appears.
After the message is received, the number of received mail messages and
Messages R/F is displayed.
pYou can display the Message R/F list by selecting “MessageR” or “MessageF”.
pIf “Auto-display” is set to other than “OFF”, the contents of received Message R/F
are displayed automatically. They are displayed for 15 seconds when “Mail/Msg.
ring time” is set to 0 through 10 seconds, or for the specified duration plus 5
seconds when it is set to 11 seconds or longer.
pIf no keys are pressed for the specified duration, “ ” or “ ” (see page 30)
appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies
depending on the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ” or “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the
Message R/F list.
pSee page 33 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
“ ” is added to “Message R/F” of i-mode menu.
<Receive Message R/F>
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
When unread Messages R/F are found
Information
pReceived Messages R/F are not automatically displayed while a display other than
the Stand-by display is shown, while an i-αppli program is running, during Public
Mode (Drive Mode), during Lock All, or during Personal Data Lock.
182
Mail
You can set how to automatically display Messages R/F received during
standby or a voice call.
1lMail settingsAuto-display
Select an option for automatic display.
pWhen the Messages R/F exceeds the maximum number of messages that can be
saved, they are overwritten starting from the oldest one. Unread or protected
Messages R/F are not overwritten.
pWhen the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more Messages R/F, “ (dark blue)” or
“ (dark blue)” is displayed. Delete unnecessary Messages R/F, read unread
Messages R/F or release protection.
pWhen the icon “ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” is displayed, the i-mode Center holds
Messages R/F. When the icon “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)” is displayed, the
i-mode Center can hold no more Messages R/F. Perform “Check new message” to
receive them.
pEven after Messages R/F are displayed automatically, they are still displayed as
unread ones in the Message R/F list. However, if you scroll through the messages
during automatic display, they will be indicated as read ones.
pMessages R/F received in the following cases are held at the i-mode Center:
・When the power is off ・During a videophone call
・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area
・During infrared communication ・While connecting to the FirstPass Center
・During PushTalk communication ・During Omakase Lock
・During iC communication ・During copy to microSD
・While connecting to the Data Storage Center
・When the space for Messages R/F is full with protected or unread messages
Auto-display
Information
Information
pWhen you receive Messages R/F during a voice call, the message is displayed
automatically after the call ends.
pThe Messages R/F are not displayed automatically when “Mail security” is set for
“Inbox”, or when “Mail security” is set for “MessageR” folder or “MessageF” folder.
1lInboxMessageR or MessageF
Select a Message R/F to be displayed.
pYou can display Messages
R/F also by iMessage
R/FMessageR or
MessageF.
pWhen you select an unread
Message R/F, “ (pink)”
changes to “ ”.
pUse No to check other
Messages R/F.
pWhen the text of Message
R/F is long, use Bo to
scroll the display to check
it. Also, you can press
m()/c() or </> to scroll page by page.
■Message R/F list and detailed Message R/F display
Status of Message R/F
“ ” appears when protection is set.
<Display Message R/F>
Reading Received Messages R/F
Detailed Message R/F
display
Message R/F list
(pink) Unread Message R/F
Read Message R/F
Detailed Message
R/F display
Message R/F list
183
Mail
Received date and time
The list shows the time for the Message R/F received today, and shows the date for
the Message R/F received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and
time the Message R/F was received.
Subject
The data attached or pasted
The detailed display shows the data volume.
Text of message
The phone number stored in the Phonebook is displayed by the name stored in the
Phonebook.
Valid melody file
Valid image file
Valid ToruCa file
Multiple attached files
Multiple pasted files
File with the UIM security
Function Menu of the Message R/F List
Protect
Protect ON/OFF You can protect a Message R/F not to be overwritten or
deleted.
You can protect up to 50 messages (Message R and
Message F each).
Protected messages are indicated by “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
Unprotect all YES
Search/sort
Sort You can rearrange the displaying order.
Select a displaying order.
Filter You can display only Messages R/F that satisfy the condition.
Select a displaying type.
Display all After you execute “Sort” or “Filter”, you can reset it and list all
Messages R/F by “By date ↑”.
No. of messages You can display the total number of Messages R/F stored in
the FOMA terminal, as well as the number of unread
messages and protected messages.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for Messages R/F to be deleted
l()YES
Delete read mails You can delete all read Messages R/F.
YES
DEL all frm folder You can delete all Messages R/F.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Search/sort>
pTo return to the former status, execute “Display all”.
pIf you close the list and re-open it, you can return to the list of all items.
Function Menu of the Detailed Message R/F Display
Protect ON/OFF See page 183.
Operate file
Save attached file You can save attached or pasted files. (See page 163)
Save insert image You can save the attached image and set it as the Stand-by
display, Wake-up display, or another display. (See page 156)
Save BG image YESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 203.
Save D-pictograph You can save the all Deco-mail pictograms inserted into the
text. (See page 174)
184
Mail
This service enables you to receive reports such as emergency
earthquake alerts distributed from the Japan Meteorological Agency.
pYou can receive Area Mail messages without i-mode contract.
pYou might not be able to receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:
・During a call (voice call/videophone call)
・During packet communication (i-mode communication, data communication,
PushTalk communication)
・During updating software program
pYou cannot receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:
・During Omakase Lock
・During international roaming
・During Self Mode
※When you could not receive the messages by the reasons above, you cannot
receive them again.
Add to phonebook See page 94.
Delete YES
Early Warning “Area Mail”
When you receive an Area Mail message, the ring tone for Area Mail
sounds. “Ring volume”, “Ring time”, and “Vibrator” follows the settings
of “Mail”.
When you receive an emergency earthquake alert, a dedicated buzzer
(alert) sounds, and the vibrator works to notify you. Further, the contents
are automatically displayed. “Ring volume” is fixed to “Level 4”, and
“Vibrator” is fixed to “Melody linkage”, so you cannot change their
settings. You can use “Area mail settings” to set “Beep time”.
Up to 30 Area Mail messages are saved separately from i-mode mail
messages and SMS messages in the Inbox.
1When an Area Mail message arrives,
“ ” blinks, the message telling its
arrival appears, and the Call/Charging
indicator flickers.
pIf you press any key, the former display returns.
pThe contents of some Area Mail messages might be automatically displayed
when you receive them. To clear it, press Oo, r, or h.
pSee page 164 for displaying Area Mail messages.
Receiving Early Warning “Area Mail”
Reception Result
display
Information
pThe buzzer does not sound when you receive an emergency earthquake alert with the
manner setting set by “Manner mode” or “Super silent”. However, the buzzer sounds
with “Original” set to sound any of the following tones. When every setting is set to
mute, the buzzer does not sound:
・Phone volume ・Mail volume ・Alarm volume
・Memo tone ・Keypad sound
pEven when “Vibrator” of “Original” is set to “OFF”, the vibrator works if you receive an
emergency earthquake alert.
pWhen you receive a new Area Mail message with 30 Area Mail messages saved, the
read messages are overwritten from the oldest. When all 30 messages are not read,
they are overwritten from the oldest one in order.
pWhether the details of a received Area Mail message are displayed or not depends on
the setting by the Area Mail message provider.
185
Mail
1lArea mail settingsDo the following operations.
You can send or receive chat mail messages to and from multiple
persons on a single display. To use Chat Mail, you need to store chat
members. You can easily store them by creating chat groups.
<Area Mail Settings>
Setting Early Warning “Area Mail”
Receive setting You can set whether to use Area Mail.
Read exemption clause thoroughlyON or OFF
Receive entry You can register Message IDs for the reports to be received other
than emergency information. You can register up to 20 IDs.
pYou do not need to operate “Receive entry” for receiving only
emergency earthquake alert and disaster/evacuation
information.
<New>Enter your Terminal Security Code
Enter a registration nameEnter a Message ID.
pTo edit a registered Message ID, highlight it, press
l( ), and then enter your Terminal Security Code.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters for an
arbitrary registration name. For a Message ID, enter 4 half-pitch
characters specified by the service provider.
pYou can edit also by selecting “Edit” from the Function menu.
Select “Delete this” to delete the Message ID, and select
“Delete all” and enter your Terminal Security Code to delete all
Message IDs.
pYou cannot edit/delete “Emergency information”.
Beep time You can set the duration the beep sounds.
Enter a beep time (seconds).
pEnter it in two digit, from “01” through “30”.
<Chat Mail>
Using Chat Mail
You can store up to six chat members including the user (yourself).
1lChat maili()
Chat member<Not recorded>
Enter a mail address.
pTo edit a stored member, select the member.
pWhen the mail address is “phone
number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone number only.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
Store Chat Members
Chat Member list
Information
pIf you edit the mail address of the stored member, the member’s name and image are
changed.
Function Menu of the Chat Member List
Edit You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 1 of “Store Chat Members” on page 185.
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Received Address, or Sent Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address. . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Received address . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Change member
186
Mail
Chat group You can store the members stored in a chat group as chat
members.
Group list or Member list
Group list . . . . . You can select members by chat group.
Member list . . . You can select members from all the
members stored in chat groups.
pIf you select “Group list”, select a chat group.
The members from the selected group are stored.
pIf you select “Member list”, check the members you want to
store and press l().
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to replace all the chat
members.
Mail group You can store the mail addresses stored in Mail group as chat
members.
Select a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to replace all the chat
members.
Display setting You can check the chat member’s name, image, background
color, and mail address.
pYou can press No to switch members.
pThe mail address of the user (yourself) is not displayed.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
1lChat mail
2Oo()Enter characters.
pYou can enter up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch
characters.
3Press l().
The chat mail message is sent.
The sent chat mail message is displayed at the top of the
Chat Mail display.
4The display for receiving chat mail
appears and a chat mail message is
received.
The received chat mail message is displayed at the top of
the Chat Mail display.
Repeat step 2 through step 4 to send and receive chat mail messages.
5rYES or NO
YES . . . . You can delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat” folder.
NO . . . . . You do not delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat”
folder.
Chat Mail ends.
pYou can end Chat Mail also by pressing h.
pWhen no sent and received chat mail messages are found, the confirmation
display does not appear.
Exchange Chat Mail Messages
Chat Mail display
187
Mail
■Chat Mail display
Image
The image you have stored in Chat Group is
displayed.
Member name
The chat member’s name store in the chat
group is displayed. Also, the name is displayed
with a specified background color.
pWhen the name is not stored in the chat
group, up to eight half-pitch characters from
the beginning of the mail address are
displayed. When the mail address is stored in
the Phonebook, up to four full-pitch/eight
half-pitch characters from the beginning of
the name are displayed.
Broadcast mark
Displayed when the chat mail message set with multiple addresses is received.
(blue): All addresses are stored in Chat Member.
(dark blue): Addresses that are not stored in Chat Member are found.
Sent/Received date and time
The date and time the chat mail message was sent/received are displayed. The time is
displayed for the chat mail messages sent/received today and the date for the chat mail
messages sent/received until yesterday.
Text
The text of chat mail message is displayed. The number of characters of the text to be
displayed is up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch characters.
If the text exceeds four lines, is displayed and you can switch the pages by pressing
No.
pYou cannot switch the page of the text on the Chat Mail history.
pThe text of the chat mail message successfully sent is displayed in black. The text of
the chat mail message failed to be sent is displayed in gray.
Input box
Entered characters (characters to send) are displayed from the beginning by a factor of
one line.
Current
Chat mail
Chat Mail
history
Information
pThe communication fee for when you send chat mail messages to multiple chat
members is the same as for sending a chat mail message to one member. (However,
the information volume for the added address increases the communication fee.)
pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot exchange chat mail
messages.
If you receive a chat mail message during standby, “ ” appears on the
desktop.
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ); then Chat Mail starts
up.
pWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail messages, you cannot exchange
chat mail messages. Delete unnecessary mail messages or read unread mail
messages, or release the protection and then operate.
pAttached files or pasted data are not displayed.
pSent/Received chat mail messages are saved to the “Chat” folder.
pThe subject of a sent chat mail message is “チャットメール (chat mail)” (half-pitch
characters).
pEven when the chat mail text on the Chat Mail display contains the phone number,
mail address, or URL, the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions are
not available. However, those functions will be available when Chat Mail is finished
and chat mail message is brought up from the “Inbox” or “Outbox”.
pDuring playing back a music file by MUSIC Player, a tone for the chat mail message
does not sound.
If You Receive Chat Mail during Standby
Information
Information
pMessages are recognized as chat mail messages in the following cases:
・When the sender’s address or destination address is stored in Chat Member or in a
chat group
・When the subject contains “チャットメール (chat mail)” (all full-pitch or all half-pitch
characters)
pEven when you receive a chat mail message from a member of a chat group other
than Chat Member while Chat Mail is running, “ ” appears.
188
Mail
If you start Chat Mail from a mail address or from a chat group that is not stored in Chat
Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete stored member and
start Chat Mail.
Select “YES”; then the current chat members are deleted and the sender’s mail address
or chat group members are stored in Chat Member.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop
The sender’s mail address is stored in Chat Member. When the sender’s mail address
has been stored in a chat group, the members in that chat group are stored in Chat
Member. However, the mail address selected as the destination is only the mail address
of the sender.
If you start Chat Mail from Chat Group
The chat group members are stored in Chat Member. All members of the group are
selected as the destination.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop or Chat Group
Function Menu of the Chat Mail Display
Send You can send the chat mail message.
Select receiver From among chat members, you can select destination
addresses to send the chat mail messages to.
Put a check mark for destination addresses to send the
messages tol()
Chat member You can store chat members. (See page 185)
Broadcast address You can check the destination addresses you have
simultaneously sent a chat mail message to.
pWhen there are destination addresses that are not stored in
Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether
to store them in Chat Member. If you store them in Chat
Member, select “YES” and put a check mark for the destination
addresses to be stored and press l().
Reload You can receive chat mail messages that you could not
automatically receive. If you receive a new chat mail message,
the Chat Mail display is updated.
View first line You can display the latest chat mail message.
View last line You can display the oldest chat mail message.
1lMail settingsChat setting
Do the following operations.
Delete read mails You can delete all the received read chat mail messages and
sent chat mail messages including secret mail and chat mail
messages failed to send.
YES
Information
<Broadcast address>
pYou can store up to six members (including yourself) in Chat Member.
Chat Setting
Sound setting You can set a tone for when you send/receive a chat mail
message on the Chat Mail display.
Select a folderSelect a tone.
pThe tone does not sound when a chat mail message comes in
from a member not stored in Chat Member.
Chat image You can set whether to display images on the Chat Mail display.
ON or OFF
User setting You can set the name and image of the user (yourself).
Select the name fieldEnter a user name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not change the user name, go to the next step.
Select the image fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
189
Mail
You can store the mail addresses you want to exchange chat mail per
group.
By storing multiple members in a group, you can set them as chat
members at a time.
You can store up to five mail addresses per group. You can create up to
five groups.
1mPhonebookPhonebook
settingsChat groupSelect a chat
group to be stored.
pWhen the selected chat group has any member,
“ ” appears at the lower left of the display.
If you press l( ), Chat group members are stored in Chat Member and
Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 186.
2Highlight <Not stored> and press
l().
pIf you select a stored mail address, the Chat Group
Address Confirmation display appears.
3Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the entered mail address is stored in the Phonebook, and the image is
stored in the Phonebook, the image is also set.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone
number only.
pWhen you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.
+m-2-6
<Chat Group>
Creating Chat Group
Chat Group list
Detailed Chat Group
display
Function Menu of the Chat Group List
Activate chat The members in the chat group are stored as chat members and
Chat Mail starts.
Go to step 2 on page 186.
Edit group name Enter a chat group name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Reset group name You can reset the name of the chat group to the default.
YES
Function Menu of the Detailed Chat Group Display/Chat
Group Address Confirmation Display
Edit You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 189.
pYou can edit also by pressing l().
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Change member You can store members from a Mail group in the chat group.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored members in the chat group, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the
members.
Member setting You can set the member’s name and image. You can switch
members by pressing No.
Select the member name fieldEnter a member’s name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.
pNot to change the member’s name, go to the next step.
Select the picture fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
Delete YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
190
Mail
You can compose and send SMS messages. You can save up to 1,000
sent SMS messages including i-mode mail messages to the Outbox.
pYou can send and receive SMS messages to and from subscribers of overseas
carriers other than DOCOMO. For the countries and overseas carriers available for the
service, refer to the DOCOMO Global Service web page.
pYou can move/copy the sent SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 418)
1mMail
Compose SMS
2Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number.
Sent address . . . . . . . . Select a phone number and press Oo().
Received address. . . . Select a phone number and press Oo().
Enter address . . . . . . . Enter a phone number.
Only one address can be specified.
pYou can enter up to 21 digits (including “+”).
pWhen the address is that of overseas carriers other than DOCOMO, enter “+”
(press and hold 0 for at least one second), “country/area code”, and
“destination mobile phone number” in that order. When the mobile phone number
begins with “0”, enter the phone number except for the “0”. Also, you can enter
“010”, “country/area code”, and “destination mobile phone number” in that order
to send SMS messages. (When you reply to SMS messages received from
overseas, enter “010”.)
3Select the text fieldEnter text.
pThe number of characters you can enter differs depending on the “SMS input
character”.
4Press l().
The animation display during transmission appears and mail is sent.
<Compose SMS>
Composing and Sending SMS
SMS Composition
display
Address field
Text field
5OK
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be sent
successfully to the destination.
pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the maximum number of storage,
they will be overwritten starting from the oldest sent mail. However, protected sent
mail cannot be overwritten.
pYou cannot compose an SMS message when sent mail messages in the Outbox are
saved to the maximum and all of them are protected, when 20 draft mail messages
are saved, or when the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages,
and then operate again.
pEven if “Activate” of “Caller ID notification” is set to “OFF”, the caller ID is notified to the
other party you send an SMS message to. If you attempt to send an SMS message to
the phone number headed by “184”/“186”, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail.
pIf you set “SMS report request” to “ON”, you cannot send SMS messages to the
i-mode phone of the mova service.
p“+” is valid only at the beginning of the address.
pYou cannot send the message to addresses that include any characters other than
numbers, “_”, “#” and “+”.
pYou cannot start a new line while editing the text.
pThe special symbols (see page 501) are replaced by half-pitch spaces.
pEach space is counted as a character.
pYou cannot reply to the SMS message whose sender is User unset/PublicPhone/
Unavailable.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose SMS messages.
Function Menu of the SMS Composition Display
Send You can send the SMS message.
Go to step 5 on page 190.
Preview Before sending, you can check the address and the text contents.
pPress l( ) to send the SMS message.
191
Mail
You can save up to 2,500 received SMS messages including i-mode mail
messages.
pYou can move/copy the received SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 418)
1When an SMS message arrives,
“ (pink)” lights and the receiving
message is displayed.
When receiving ends, the display shows the number of
received SMS messages.
pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 30) appears on
the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.
pSee page 33 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
Save You can save the SMS message you are composing or editing to
the Draft.
pYou cannot save the message when the address field and text
field are blank.
SMS report req. See page 192.
SMS valid. per. See page 192.
SMS input char. See page 192.
<Receive SMS>
Receiving SMS Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pWhen the number of unread or protected messages in the Inbox has reached the
maximum, no new messages can be received and “ (dark blue)” is displayed. To
receive SMS messages, delete mail in the Inbox or read unread mail or release
protection until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new SMS”.
pIf you receive connection SMS, it is displayed in the Inbox list by the order that FOMA
terminal received.
1Reception Result displayMail
Select an SMS message to be
displayed.
pPress and hold No for at least one second from the
detailed SMS display to change the size of characters.
(See “Mail” on page 123)
When SMS messages arrive at the SMS Center, they are automatically
sent to your FOMA terminal, but will be held at the SMS Center if your
FOMA terminal cannot receive messages such as when it is off or out of
the service area.
You can receive the messages by “Check new SMS”.
1mMailCheck new SMS
2Return
If the Center holds SMS messages, the FOMA terminal automatically receives
them.
Display Newly Received SMS Messages
Information
pDepending on the characters entered in the received SMS message, spaces might be
displayed.
pWhile the sender’s address (phone number) is highlighted in the displayed SMS
message, you can press +Oo( ) to make a voice call, videophone call, or
PushTalk call to the displayed number (the Phone To/AV Phone To function).
Further, if the sender’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the stored “name”
is highlighted. In this case, you can dial the phone number in the same way.
pA Short Mail message is received as an SMS message on the FOMA terminal. When
the sender does not notify you of the phone number, the reason is displayed in the
sender’s field.
<Check New SMS>
Checking New SMS
Information
pSome SMS messages are not delivered immediately after checking.
192
Mail
You can set whether to request an SMS report for when sending an SMS
message.
The SMS report lets you know that your SMS message was delivered to
the destination.
You can check received SMS reports in the “Inbox” folder.
1lSMS settingsSMS report requestON or OFF
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
You can set the period that the SMS Center holds an SMS message sent
but unsuccessfully delivered due to the out-of-service area, etc.
1lSMS settingsSMSvalidity period
Select a holding period.
pIf you select “None”, the stored SMS message is re-sent after a certain period of
time and deleted from the SMS Center.
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
pWhen “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”, etc. are displayed, you cannot receive any
more SMS messages. Delete unnecessary mail, read unread mail, or release
protection. (Read and unprotected messages are overwritten automatically from the
oldest one.)
pYou cannot use this function to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Use “Check
new message” to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F.
<SMS Settings>
Setting SMS
SMS Report Request
Information
SMS Validity Period
You can set the characters you can enter into the text of SMS messages.
You can set to enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and
half-pitch symbols.
1l
SMS settings
SMS input character
Select an item.
Japanese (70char.) . . . You can enter full-pitch and half-pitch characters. You
cannot enter pictographs except “ ” and “ ” (see
page 497). You can enter up to 70 characters for the text.
English (160char.). . . . You can enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters
and half-pitch symbols. You can enter up to 160
characters for the text.
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
You can set the address and “Type of number” for the SMS Center. This
setting is for getting any service other than SMS Service you currently use.
1lSMS settingsSMS center selection
User settingEnter an address
International or Unknown
pYou can enter up to 20 half-pitch characters for the address. However, if “:” or
“#” is included, you cannot set it for “International”.
pYou can reset User Setting to “DOCOMO” by ResetEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES.
You can send mail messages or browse received mail messages on the
i-mode site.
pYou can use only in B Mode or Dual Mode of 2in1.
pFor details on Web mail, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [2in1]”.
1lWeb mail
Operate following the instructions on the display.
SMS Input Character
SMS Center Selection
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
<Web Mail>
Using Web Mail
193
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Displaying a Site
Accessing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <iMenu> 194
Viewing and Operating Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Displaying Most Recently Accessed Site. . . . . . . .<Last URL> 198
Using My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <My Menu> 198
Changing i-mode Password . . . .<Change i-mode Password> 199
Displaying Internet Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Enter URL> 199
Saving Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Bookmark> 200
Saving Site Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Screen Memo> 201
Downloading Images, Melodies, etc. from Sites
Saving Image from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Save Image> 203
Downloading Data from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Download> 204
Uploading Images, Movies, etc. to Sites
Uploading Files to Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Useful Functions of i-mode
Operations from Highlighted Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Setting i-mode
Setting i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <i-mode Settings> 208
Setting Connection Timeout . . . . . <Set Connection Timeout> 208
Changing a Host from i-mode (ISP Connection Communication)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Host Selection> 209
Using Certificates
Operating SSL Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <SSL Certificate> 209
Setting FirstPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Client Certificate> 210
Changing Hosts for Certificate Issue . . . . . .<Certificate Host> 211
Using i-motion
i-motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Downloading i-motion from Sites. . . . . . <Download i-motion> 213
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Automatic Replay Setting> 214
Using i-Channel
i-Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Using i-Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Setting How Ticker is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using i-concier
i-concier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Displaying i-concier Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Configuring i-concier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
194
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
i-mode is the service that makes use of the display of the FOMA terminal
supporting i-mode (i-mode phone) to enable you to use online services
such as site (program) access, Internet access, and i-mode mail.
pi-mode is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.
pFor details on i-mode, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
i-mode
■Before Using i-mode
pContents of sites (programs) and web pages (Internet web pages) are generally
protected by copyrights law. Data such as text and images that you obtained to the
i-mode phone from sites (programs) and Internet web pages can be used for
personal entertainment but cannot be used in whole or in part, as it is or after
modification, for commercial purposes or sent as e-mail attachments or output from
your i-mode phone to other devices, unless you have permission from the copyright
holders.
pIf you replace the UIM with another one or turn on the power with the UIM not
inserted, you cannot display/play back files depending on the model, such as still
images/movies/melodies obtained from sites, attached files (still images/movies/
melodies and other files) sent/received by mail, screen memos, or Messages R/F.
pWhen the file whose display and/or playback is restricted by the UIM is set for the
Stand-by display or specified ring tone, the FOMA terminal works with the default
contents when you replace the existing UIM with new one or turn on the power with
the UIM not inserted.
You can use a variety of services offered by IPs (Information Providers).
From the display of the FOMA terminal, you can check your bank
balance, reserve tickets, and do similar tasks. (IPs offer different types of
services. Some of them need to be applied for separately.)
1iiMenu
While you are online, “ ” blinks.
p“ ” blinks while you are using the i-mode service (during i-mode standby).
pTo cancel during the connection, select “Cancel”. To cancel while obtaining a
page, press l().
pTo end i-mode, press hand select “YES” while the site is displayed. “ ” goes
off and i-mode ends. It may take longer to end i-mode.
2Select an item (link).
Repeat selecting items (links) to display the desired site.
pYou can select underscored items on the displayed site. When you select an
item, it is highlighted.
pIf there is a number at the head of the item showing the link, you can connect to
that link directly by pressing the numeric key corresponding to that number.
(Some sites cannot be connected.)
pWhile the site is displayed, press Bo to scroll through line by line. Press
m()/c() or </> to scroll through page by page.
<iMenu>
Accessing Sites
i-mode menu
195
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
The display for establishing authentication appears. When obtaining is completed, the
SSL page appears and “ ” lights.
pTo cancel during authentication, select “Cancel”. To cancel obtaining the SSL page
after authentication, press l().
The confirmation display appears asking whether to close the SSL page. Select “YES” to
display an ordinary site; “ ” goes off.
The iMenu can be displayed in English.
1iiMenuEnglish
iMenu in English will be displayed.
pTo change back to the Japanese display, select “日本
語 (Japanese)”.
When you try to obtain an SSL site (SSL page)
To return to a non-SSL site
Information
pDepending on the site, you may need to apply for the service in writing separately, or
to pay information fees to use it.
pThe maximum display size of the images on the site is 480 x 1400 dots. If an image is
larger than 480 x 1400 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained.
pDepending on the site, “ ” might be displayed when the image is not correctly
displayed.
pDepending on the site or data, you might not be able to download or save melodies,
PDF files, software programs, and others.
pWith some Internet web pages (sites) supporting i-mode, the color setting might make
the text difficult or impossible to see.
pWhen you are asked from the site to send information about music you have played
back on the FOMA terminal, the confirmation display appears for about sending your
music information. Select “YES” to send the information (title names, artist names,
and played dates) of the music played back on the FOMA terminal. The sent music
information is used for the IP (information provider) to provide customized information
to you.
Change to iMenu in English
Basic operating methods while a site is displayed are explained.
The FOMA terminal saves the files such as the displayed Internet web
pages to a temporal storage area called a cache. By pressing No, you
can show the page stored in the cache without communicating.
pWhen you show a page that exceeds the cache size of the FOMA terminal or a page
configured (created) to always read its latest information, the FOMA terminal starts
communication.
pWhen i-mode ends, the cache is cleared.
1Press Co to return to the previous page.
Press Vo to go to the next page.
You can move back up through the pages that you have displayed so far by pressing
Co repeatedly. However, if you display a different page (“D”) from the previous page
(“B”), you cannot return to “C” from “D” even when you press Co twice. Instead, the
pages are displayed in the order of “D” → “B” → “A”.
Information
pThe iMenu in English differs slightly from the iMenu in Japanese.
pItems such as Tokusuru Menu and News are not shown on the iMenu in English.
pGenerally, “What’s New” site will be updated every other Monday.
Viewing and Operating Sites
Return to Obtained Previous Page/Go to Obtained Next Page
To turn pages
<When pages have been displayed in the order of
“A”→“B”→“C”→“B”→“D”>
…Sequence of page display
…Sequence when previous page from
the display “D” has been displayed
A B C
D
CoCo
Co
196
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
In sites, you may use the displayed radio buttons, check boxes, text
boxes, and pull down menus.
Information
pWhen you display a page stored in cache, you cannot display text or settings you
entered when connected before.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the site behavior might differ from the one for
ordinary sites.
Select/Enter Information on Sites
Name Display example Operation/Explanation
Radio
button
: Not selected
: Selected
Radio buttons are for selecting one from multiple
choices.
Check box : Not selected
: Selected
Check boxes are for selecting one or more items
from multiple choices.
Text box You can enter characters. Highlight a text box and
press Oo( ) to show the Character Entry
display.
Pull down
menu
You can select an item from the option list. Highlight
a pull-down menu and press Oo( ) to show
the option list.
pYou might be able to select multiple items from
pull-down menus. Each time you use Bo to
highlight an item and press Oo( ), you can
select/release items repeatedly. After selecting
items, press l().
Flash is an animation technology using pictures and sound. Flash
movies make the sites more attractive. You can download Flash movies
to your FOMA terminal and play them back or set them for the Stand-by
display.
Information
pDepending on the site, the display authenticating your user ID or password might
appear.
Enter your user ID and password, and then select “OK”.
Flash Function
Information
pThe maximum display size of the Flash movies on the site is 480 x 700 dots. If a Flash
movie is larger than 480 x 700 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio
retained.
pSome Flash movies refer to the phone-information data in your FOMA terminal. To
permit the use of the information in your FOMA terminal, set “Use phone information”
to “YES”. (“YES” is set at purchase.)
pEffect tones sound for some Flash movies. To mute them, set “Sound effect setting”
(or “Sound effect”) to “OFF”.
pThe effect tone and vibrator for the Flash movie set for the Stand-by display do not
work.
pThe effect tone for Flash movies does not sound during Play Background.
pSome Flash movies may vibrate the FOMA terminal while they are being played back.
The FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator”.
pWhen you play back a Flash movie after saving to Data Box, microSD card, or Screen
Memo, it might look different depending on the saving location.
pSome Flash movies might not work correctly.
pYou cannot save the Flash movies if an error occurs while they are being played back.
pYou can operate some Flash movies by using +Mo or +Oo. Flash movies can be
operated sometimes even when “ ” is not displayed.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the behavior might differ from ordinary sites.
197
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
When you select an item, the confirmation display might appear asking
whether to send the Phone/Terminal and UIM ID.
pThe “Phone/Terminal and UIM ID” to be sent is used by the IP (Information Providers)
for identifying the user, providing customized information, and judging if the contents
the IP offers are available on the user’s mobile phone.
pThe “Phone/Terminal and UIM ID” is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the
Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IPs (Information Providers) or others,
by this operation.
Phone/Terminal and UIM ID
Function Menu while Site is Displayed
iMenu You can return to “iMenu”.
Bookmark
Add bookmark See page 200.
Bookmark Go to step 1 of “Display Web Pages or Sites from a
Bookmark” on page 200.
Screen memo
Add screen memo See page 201.
Screen memo list Go to step 2 on page 202.
Internet
Enter URL You can enter a URL to display an Internet web page.
Select the text box.
Go to step 2 on page 199.
pThe URL of the displayed site is input beforehand.
Switch to FB See page 223.
Reload The site contents will be updated with the latest information.
Save image See page 203.
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL/
image of a displayed site/screen memo pasted or attached.
Select an item.
Attach URL . . . . . . . .Pastes a URL to the text of an i-mode
mail message.
Attach image. . . . . . .Select an image to attach it to an
i-mode mail message.
Insert dec. mail. . . . .Select an image to paste it to a
Deco-mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 146.
pSee page 150 for Deco-mail.
Add to phonebook See page 94.
Add desktop icon See page 31.
Others
Change CHR code When characters are not correctly displayed, you can convert
them to the correct ones.
pThis setting is valid only for the site and Internet web page
being displayed.
Title You can display the title of the displayed site.
URL You can display the URL of the displayed site.
Certificate You can check the subject name, author, validity period and
serial number of the certificate used in SSL communication.
Up to five certificates are displayed.
Set image display See page 208.
Sound effect See page 208.
Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the
beginning.
pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display area,
the Flash movie might not be played back.
198
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
When you end i-mode, the URL of the page displayed last is stored as
“Last URL”.
You can display the page you viewed last time by selecting “Last URL”
from the i-mode menu.
1iLast URL
Information
<Compose message>
pThe number of characters of the URL you can paste to the text is up to 256 half-pitch
characters. If the URL contains 256 half-pitch characters or more, you cannot paste it.
pYou may not be able to attach or paste some images to i-mode mail.
<Change CHR code>
pWhen characters are not correctly displayed, repeat the operation. However, the
previous character is displayed if you repeat the operation four times.
pEven when you repeat this operation, the correct character might not appear.
pIf you change the character code when the correct characters are displayed, wrong
characters might appear instead.
<Title>
pUp to 128 half-pitch/64 full-pitch characters can be displayed for a title.
<Last URL>
Displaying Most Recently Accessed Site
Display Last URL
Information
pSome pages cannot be stored as “Last URL”, such as pages whose URLs contain
more than 2,048 half-pitch characters, the data acquisition completion display for
melodies or i-motion movies, etc. and FirstPass Center pages.
You can initialize the URL of the page you viewed last time to the iMenu
URL.
1ii-mode settingsReset last URLYES
If you register frequently used sites in My Menu, you will be able to
access them easily.
You can register up to 45 sites.
1Call up a page to be registeredRegister My Menu
pThe page configuration differs depending on the site.
2Select the i-mode password text box
Enter the i-mode password決定 (OK)
pThe entered i-mode password is displayed as “_”.
pSee page 126 for the i-mode password.
1iiMenuEnglishMy Menu
Select a site to be accessed.
Reset Last URL
<My Menu>
Using My Menu
Register Sites in My Menu
Information
pSome sites cannot be registered in My Menu.
pWhen you subscribe to a pay site in Menu list, it will be registered in My Menu
automatically.
Access Sites from My Menu
199
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel/i-concier
The i-mode password (four digits) is required to subscribe to and
unsubscribe from message services and i-mode pay sites, and to do
i-mode mail settings.
Be sure not to let others know your i-mode password.
1iiMenuEnglishOptions
Change i-mode Password
Select the “Current Password” text box
Enter the i-mode password (four digits).
pIf you enter the i-mode password for the first time, enter “0000” (four zeros) which
is set at a time of your contract.
pThe entered numeral is displayed as “_”.
2Select the “New Password” text box
Enter a new i-mode password (four digits).
pEnter your own i-mode password.
3Select the “New Password (Confirmation)” text box
Enter the new i-mode password (four digits)Select
pEnter the same number that you entered in step 2.
Information
pIf you are using Dual Network Service, you might not be able to use My Menu
registered by the mova phone using the FOMA terminal, or My Menu registered by
the FOMA terminal using the mova phone.
<Change i-mode Password>
Changing i-mode Password
Information
pNote that if you do not remember the i-mode password, you need to bring an
identification card such as your driver’s license to the handling counter of a docomo
shop.
1iGo to location<NEW>
2Enter a URLOK
pYou can enter up to 256 half-pitch alphanumeric characters and symbols (up to
512 half-pitch characters for Full Browser).
pFor Full Browser, the confirmation display appears telling that the web page might
not be displayed.
Up to 10 entered URLs can be stored in URL History.
1iGo to location
Select a URL to be displayedOK
pExcluding “http://” and “https://”, up to 22 half-pitch
characters can be displayed.
pYou can edit the URL by selecting the URL’s text box.
<Enter URL>
Displaying Internet Web Pages
Information
pFor i-mode, Internet web pages not supporting i-mode or some type of internet web
pages to be connected might not be displayed correctly.
pWhen the file size of the page you have received exceeds the maximum obtainable
size of a page, receiving is suspended. The data obtained so far might be displayable
by selecting “OK”.
Displaying Web Pages from URL History
URL History list
Information
pWhen the entered URLs exceed 10 items, the URL histories are overwritten
automatically, starting from the oldest one.
pWhen you newly enter a URL to access a site, that URL is saved as a different record
even if you access the same URL.